Teledyne Drums T200H M Users Manual

T200HM to the manual f6049b5b-ec69-458f-95a5-93fcff74246b

2015-02-03

: Teledyne Teledyne-Drums-T200H-M-Users-Manual-464456 teledyne-drums-t200h-m-users-manual-464456 teledyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 412 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MODEL T200H/M

NITROGEN OXIDES ANALYZER

9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE

SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201

USA

Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190

Phone: 858-657-9800

Fax: 858-657-9816

Email: api-sales@teledyne.com

Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 20 June 2012

ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI)

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation, Inc. (TAPI) is a worldwide market

leader in the design and manufacture of precision analytical instrumentation used

for air quality monitoring, continuous emissions monitoring, and specialty process

monitoring applications. Founded in San Diego, California, in 1988, TAPI

introduced a complete line of Air Quality Monitoring (AQM) instrumentation,

which comply with the United States Environmental Protection Administration

(EPA) and international requirements for the measurement of criteria pollutants,

including CO, SO2, NOX and Ozone.

Since 1988 TAPI has combined state-of-the-art technology, proven measuring

principles, stringent quality assurance systems and world class after-sales

support to deliver the best products and customer satisfaction in the business.

For further information on our company, our complete range of products, and the

applications that they serve, please visit www.teledyne-api.com or contact

sales@teledyne-api.com.

NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT

TRADEMARKS

All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing

in this document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein

for identification purposes only.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

iii

SAFETY MESSAGES

Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of

avoiding personal injury or instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully.

Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol, and are placed

throughout this manual; the safety symbols are also located inside the instrument. It is

imperative that you pay close attention to these messages, the descriptions of which

are as follows:

WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard

HAZARD: Strong oxidizer

GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for

specific information.

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning

Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without

protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the

instrument.

Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be

performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.

Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central

safety grounding point for the instrument.

CAUTION

This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described

in this manual. If you use this instrument in a manner other than that for which it

was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous

consequences.

NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es)!

For Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of this instrument or any other

Teledyne API product, contact Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department:

Telephone: 800-324-5190

Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com

or access any of the service options on our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ

Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel

dans le but d’éviter des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments.

Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque consigne de sécurité est

représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent

dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux

consignes suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique

DANGER : Oxydant puissant

AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE : Lire la consigne

complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques

MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude

Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou

sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à

l’instrument.

Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent

être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.

Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central

de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.

MISE EN GARDE

Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans

ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour

laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible

et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.

NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz

combustibles!

07270B DCN6512

WARRANTY

WARRANTY POLICY (02024 F)

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne

Instruments, Inc., provides that:

Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment

failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.

COVERAGE

After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to

provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers

in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be

performed by the customer.

NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT

Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the

extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment

manufacturer’s warranty.

PRODUCT RETURN

All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for

handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the

repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.

The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyne-

api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and packing instructions

and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures when returning parts for repair or

calibration may void your warranty. For anti-ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to

“Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service” in the Primer on Electro-

Static Discharge section of this manual, and for RMA procedures please refer to our Website at

http://www.teledyne-api.com under Customer Support > Return Authorization.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

vii

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is comprised of multiple documents, in PDF format, as listed below.

Part No. Rev Name/Description

07270 B T200H/M Operation Manual

05147 H Menu Trees and Software Documentation (inserted as Appendix A in this manual)

07351 A Spare Parts List - T200H (located in Appendix B of this manual)

07367 A Spare Parts List - T200M (located in Appendix B of this manual)t

05149 B Repair Request Form (inserted as Appendix C in this manual)

Documents included in Appendix D:

0691101 A Interconnect Wire List

06911 A Interconnect Wiring Diagram

01669 G PCA 016680300, Ozone generator board

01840 B PCA Thermo-electric cooler board

03632 A PCA 03631, 0-20mA Driver

03956 A PCA 039550200, Relay Board

04354 D PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface

04181 H PCA 041800200, PMT pre-amplifier board

04468 B PCA, 04467, Analog Output

01840 B SCH, PCA 05802, MOTHERBOARD, GEN-5

03632 D SCH, PCA 06697, INTRFC, LCD TCH SCRN,

03956 B SCH, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

06731 A SCH, AUXILLIARY-I/O BOARD

Note We recommend that all users read this manual in its entirety before

operating the instrument.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

viii

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

REVISION HISTORY

This section provides information regarding changes to this manual.

T200H/T200M Operation Manual PN 07270

Date Rev DCN Change Summary

2012 June 20 B 6512 Administrative updates

2011 March 04 A 5999 Initial Release

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI) ............................................................................... i

SAFETY MESSAGES..................................................................................................................................................................iii

CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ...................................................................................................................................................... iv

Warranty ...................................................................................................................................................................................... v

About This Manual ......................................................................................................................................................................vii

Revision History .......................................................................................................................................................................... ix

Table of Contents........................................................................................................................................................................ xi

List of Figures.............................................................................................................................................................................xiv

List of Tables..............................................................................................................................................................................xvi

LIST OF APPENDICES ............................................................................................................................................................xvii

1. Introduction, Features, and Options.......................................................................................................................................19

1.1. Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................19

1.2. Features .........................................................................................................................................................................19

1.3. Using This Manual..........................................................................................................................................................19

1.4. Options...........................................................................................................................................................................20

2. Specifications and Approvals .................................................................................................................................................23

2.1. T200H/M Operating Specifications.................................................................................................................................23

2.2. Approvals and Certifications...........................................................................................................................................24

2.2.1. Safety .....................................................................................................................................................................24

2.2.2. EMC........................................................................................................................................................................24

3. Getting Started.......................................................................................................................................................................25

3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................25

3.2. Ventilation Clearance .....................................................................................................................................................26

3.3. T200H/M Layout.............................................................................................................................................................26

3.4. Electrical Connections....................................................................................................................................................32

3.4.1. Power Connection ..................................................................................................................................................32

3.4.2. Analog Inputs (Option 64) Connections..................................................................................................................33

3.4.3. Analog Output Connections....................................................................................................................................33

3.4.4. Connecting the Status Outputs...............................................................................................................................34

3.4.5. Current Loop Analog Outputs (OPT 41) Setup .......................................................................................................36

3.4.6. Connecting the Control Inputs ................................................................................................................................38

3.4.7. Connecting the Alarm Relay Option (OPT 61)........................................................................................................39

3.4.8. Connecting the Communications Ports...................................................................................................................40

3.5. Pneumatic Connections .................................................................................................................................................42

3.5.1. About Zero Air and Calibration (Span) Gases ........................................................................................................42

3.5.2. Pneumatic Connections to T200H/M Basic Configuration ......................................................................................44

3.5.3. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed..................................................................................................49

3.6. Initial Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................59

3.6.1. Startup....................................................................................................................................................................59

3.6.2. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................59

3.6.3. Functional Check....................................................................................................................................................60

3.7. Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................................61

3.7.1. Basic NOx Calibration Procedure............................................................................................................................61

3.7.2. Basic O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure..................................................................................................................66

4. Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................................................................71

4.1. Overview of Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................71

4.2. Sample Mode .................................................................................................................................................................73

4.2.1. Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................................73

4.2.2. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................75

4.3. Calibration Mode ............................................................................................................................................................77

4.3.1. Calibration Functions..............................................................................................................................................77

4.4. SETUP MODE................................................................................................................................................................77

4.5. SETUP  CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration Information ...............................................................................78

4.6. SETUP  ACAL: Automatic Calibration.........................................................................................................................79

4.7. SETUP  DAS - Using the Data Acquisition System (DAS).........................................................................................80

4.7.1. DAS Structure.........................................................................................................................................................81

4.7.2. Default DAS Channels............................................................................................................................................83

4.7.3. Remote DAS Configuration ....................................................................................................................................96

07270B DCN6512

Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

xii

4.8. SETUP  RNGE: Range Units and Dilution Configuration............................................................................................97

4.8.1. Range Units............................................................................................................................................................97

4.8.2. Dilution Ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................98

4.9. SETUP  PASS: Password Feature .............................................................................................................................99

4.10. SETUP  CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock ............................................................................................101

4.11. SETUP  MORE  COMM: Setting Up the Analyser’s Communication Ports .........................................................103

4.11.1. DTE and DCE Communication ...........................................................................................................................103

4.11.2. COM Port Default Settings .................................................................................................................................103

4.11.3. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port Testing.........................................................................................104

4.11.4. Analyzer ID.........................................................................................................................................................108

4.11.5. RS-232 COM Port Cable Connections ...............................................................................................................109

4.11.6. RS-485 Configuration of COM2..........................................................................................................................111

4.11.7. Ethernet Interface Configuration.........................................................................................................................111

4.11.8. USB Port Setup ..................................................................................................................................................117

4.11.9. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up....................................................................................................................................119

4.11.10. MODBUS SETUP.............................................................................................................................................122

4.12. SETUP  MORE  VARS: Internal Variables (VARS) .............................................................................................124

4.12.1. Setting the Gas Measurement Mode ..................................................................................................................126

4.13. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: Diagnostics MENU........................................................................................................127

4.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features.....................................................................................................................128

4.13.2. Signal I/O............................................................................................................................................................128

4.13.3. Analog Output Step Test ....................................................................................................................................130

4.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS and Reporting Ranges......................................................................................................131

4.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................134

4.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION ....................................................................................................................148

4.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................................158

4.14. SETUP – ALRM: Using the optional Gas Concentration Alarms (OPT 67) ................................................................166

4.15. Remote Operation ......................................................................................................................................................167

4.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O ...............................................................................................167

4.15.2. Remote Operation ..............................................................................................................................................169

4.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation .......................................................................................................176

4.15.4. Using the T200H/M with a Hessen Protocol Network .........................................................................................176

5. Calibration Procedures.........................................................................................................................................................183

5.1.1. Interferents for NOX Measurements......................................................................................................................183

5.2. Calibration Preparations...............................................................................................................................................184

5.2.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables................................................................................................184

5.2.2. Zero Air.................................................................................................................................................................184

5.2.3. Span Calibration Gas Standards & Traceability....................................................................................................185

5.2.4. Data Recording Devices.......................................................................................................................................186

5.2.5. NO2 Conversion Efficiency (CE) ........................................................................................................................... 186

5.3. Manual Calibration .......................................................................................................................................................191

5.4. Calibration Checks .......................................................................................................................................................195

5.5. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves...................................................................................................................196

5.6. Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves...................................................................................................................199

5.7. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures ..................................................................................................................200

5.8. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal) ...................................................................................................................................201

5.9. Calibration Quality Analysis..........................................................................................................................................204

6. Instrument Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................................205

6.1. Maintenance Schedule.................................................................................................................................................205

6.2. Predictive Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................................207

6.3. Maintenance Procedures..............................................................................................................................................207

6.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter ................................................................................................................207

6.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter...............................................................................................................209

6.3.3. Maintaining the External Sample Pump................................................................................................................210

6.3.4. Changing the NO2 converter.................................................................................................................................211

6.3.5. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ...................................................................................................................................212

6.3.6. Changing Critical Flow Orifices.............................................................................................................................214

6.3.7. Checking for Light Leaks ......................................................................................................................................215

7. Troubleshooting & Repair ....................................................................................................................................................217

7.1. General Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................................217

7.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with Warning Messages..............................................................................................................218

7.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions .....................................................................................................................219

7.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function .............................................................................................................220

7.1.4. Status LED’s.........................................................................................................................................................222

7.2. Gas Flow Problems ......................................................................................................................................................225

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table of Contents

xiii

7.2.1. T200H Internal Gas Flow Diagrams......................................................................................................................226

7.2.2. T200M Internal Gas Flow Diagrams .....................................................................................................................229

7.2.3. Zero or Low Flow Problems..................................................................................................................................231

7.2.4. High Flow..............................................................................................................................................................233

7.2.5. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports Correct Flow .........................................................................233

7.3. Calibration Problems ....................................................................................................................................................234

7.3.1. Negative Concentrations ......................................................................................................................................234

7.3.2. No Response........................................................................................................................................................234

7.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span.......................................................................................................................................235

7.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key ..........................................................................................................................235

7.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Button .......................................................................................................................236

7.3.6. Non-Linear Response...........................................................................................................................................236

7.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ...............................................................................................237

7.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes...........................................................................................................237

7.4. Other Performance Problems.......................................................................................................................................237

7.4.1. Excessive noise....................................................................................................................................................238

7.4.2. Slow Response.....................................................................................................................................................238

7.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings..............................................................................................................................................238

7.5. Subsystem Checkout ...................................................................................................................................................239

7.5.1. Simple Leak Check using Vacuum and Pump......................................................................................................239

7.5.2. Detailed Leak Check Using Pressure ...................................................................................................................239

7.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check ........................................................................................................................240

7.5.4. AC Power Configuration .......................................................................................................................................241

7.5.5. DC Power Supply Test Points .............................................................................................................................. 245

7.5.6. I2C Bus .................................................................................................................................................................245

7.5.7. Touch Screen Interface ........................................................................................................................................246

7.5.8. LCD Display Module.............................................................................................................................................246

7.5.9. General Relay Board Diagnostics.........................................................................................................................246

7.5.10. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................................247

7.5.11. CPU....................................................................................................................................................................249

7.5.12. RS-232 Communication......................................................................................................................................250

7.5.13. PMT Sensor........................................................................................................................................................251

7.5.14. PMT Preamplifier Board .....................................................................................................................................251

7.5.15. High Voltage Power Supply................................................................................................................................251

7.5.16. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly..............................................................................................................................252

7.5.17. NO2 Converter ....................................................................................................................................................253

7.5.18. O3 Generator ......................................................................................................................................................255

7.5.19. Box Temperature................................................................................................................................................255

7.5.20. PMT Temperature...............................................................................................................................................255

7.6. Repair Procedures .......................................................................................................................................................256

7.6.1. Disk-on-Module Replacement ..............................................................................................................................256

7.6.2. O3 Generator Replacement ..................................................................................................................................257

7.6.3. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement ...............................................................................................................257

7.6.4. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration .......................................................................................................................258

7.6.5. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC .......................................................................................................................260

7.7. Removing / Replacing the Relay PCA from the Instrument..........................................................................................263

7.8. Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................................................................264

7.9. Technical Assistance....................................................................................................................................................265

8. Principles of Operation.........................................................................................................................................................267

8.1. Measurement Principle.................................................................................................................................................267

8.1.1. Chemiluminescence .............................................................................................................................................267

8.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination ................................................................................................................................. 269

8.2. Chemiluminescence Detection .....................................................................................................................................270

8.2.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube.....................................................................................................................................270

8.2.2. Optical Filter .........................................................................................................................................................270

8.2.3. Auto Zero..............................................................................................................................................................271

8.2.4. Measurement Interferences..................................................................................................................................272

8.3. Pneumatic Operation....................................................................................................................................................274

8.3.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold.................................................................................................................................274

8.3.2. Sample Gas Flow .................................................................................................................................................275

8.3.3. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices .............................................................................................................276

8.3.4. Sample Particulate Filter.......................................................................................................................................280

8.3.5. Ozone Gas Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................281

8.3.6. O3 Generator ........................................................................................................................................................282

8.3.7. Perma Pure® Dryer...............................................................................................................................................283

07270B DCN6512

Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

xiv

8.3.8. Ozone Supply Air Filter.........................................................................................................................................285

8.3.9. Ozone Scrubber ...................................................................................................................................................285

8.3.10. Pneumatic Sensors.............................................................................................................................................286

8.3.11. Dilution Manifold .................................................................................................................................................287

8.4. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65A) Principles of Operation .....................................................................................................288

8.4.1. Paramagnetic Measurement of O2........................................................................................................................288

8.4.2. Operation Within the T200H/M Analyzer ..............................................................................................................289

8.4.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor.................................................................................................................289

8.5. Electronic Operation.....................................................................................................................................................290

8.5.1. CPU......................................................................................................................................................................291

8.5.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell ..............................................................................................................................292

8.5.3. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT).................................................................................................................................293

8.5.4. PMT Cooling System............................................................................................................................................295

8.5.5. PMT Preamplifier..................................................................................................................................................295

8.5.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board......................................................................................................................................297

8.5.7. Relay Board..........................................................................................................................................................297

8.5.8. Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry......................................................................................................................301

8.5.9. Motherboard .........................................................................................................................................................302

8.5.10. Analog Outputs...................................................................................................................................................304

8.5.11. External Digital I/O..............................................................................................................................................304

8.5.12. I2C Data Bus.......................................................................................................................................................304

8.5.13. Power-up Circuit .................................................................................................................................................304

8.6. Power Distribution & Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................................305

8.7. Front Panel/Display Interface Electronics.....................................................................................................................306

8.7.1. Front Panel Interface PCA....................................................................................................................................306

8.8. Software Operation ......................................................................................................................................................307

8.8.1. Adaptive Filter.......................................................................................................................................................308

8.8.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset...............................................................................................................................308

8.8.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) .......................................................................................................309

8.8.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation..............................................................................................................310

8.8.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) ...............................................................................................................310

9. A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge...................................................................................................................................311

9.1. How Static Charges are Created..................................................................................................................................311

9.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage................................................................................................................312

9.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage ...........................................................................................................................313

9.4. Basic Principles of Static Control..................................................................................................................................314

9.4.1. General Rules.......................................................................................................................................................314

9.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance ......................................................................315

Glossary...................................................................................................................................................................................319

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 3-1: Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................27

Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control..............................................................................................27

Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts .............................................................29

Figure 3-4: T200H/M Rear Panel Layout .......................................................................................................30

Figure 3-5: T200H/M Internal Layout .............................................................................................................31

Figure 3-6: Analog In Connector ....................................................................................................................33

Figure 3-7: Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................34

Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................35

Figure 3-9: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .....................................................................36

Figure 3-10: Control Input Connector...............................................................................................................38

Figure 3-11: Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments..........................................................................................39

Figure 3-12: T200H/M Multidrop Card .............................................................................................................41

Figure 3-13: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.............................44

Figure 3-14: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.....................................45

Figure 3-15: T200H Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration..........................................47

Figure 3-16: T200M Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration..........................................48

Figure 3-17: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) ....................................................49

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table of Contents

Figure 3-18: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas.................49

Figure 3-19: T200H – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A .................................50

Figure 3-20: T200M – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A.................................51

Figure 3-21: T200H - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D ...............55

Figure 3-22: T200M - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D...............56

Figure 3-23: T200H – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A .........................................................57

Figure 3-24: T200M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A..........................................................58

Figure 3-23: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ......................................................................................................66

Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display with “SAMPLE” Indicated in the Mode Field ...............................................72

Figure 4-2: Viewing T200H/M TEST Functions..............................................................................................75

Figure 4-3: Viewing and Clearing T200H/M WARNING Messages...............................................................76

Figure 4-4: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the DAS .......................................................96

Figure 4-5: Default Pin Assignments for Rear Panel com Port Connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE) ........... 109

Figure 4-6: CPU COM1 & COM2 Connector Pin-Outs in RS-232 mode. ................................................... 110

Figure 4-7: COM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration............................................................................ 115

Figure 4-8: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode.................................................................................... 120

Figure 4-9: RS-232-Multidrop Host-to-Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ...................................................... 121

Figure 4-10: Analog Output Connector Key.................................................................................................. 131

Figure 4-11: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ....................................................................................... 151

Figure 4-12: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs ...................................................................................... 153

Figure 4-13: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs .................................................................... 154

Figure 4-14. DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu ................................................................ 157

Figure 4-15: Status Output Connector .......................................................................................................... 167

Figure 4-16: Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply............................................................................... 169

Figure 4-17: Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply ......................................................................... 169

Figure 4-18: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ........................................................................... 175

Figure 5-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency......................................... 187

Figure 5-2: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) ................................................. 191

Figure 5-3: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas.............. 192

Figure 5-4: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 196

Figure 6-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly.......................................................................................... 208

Figure 6-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer ....................................................................................... 209

Figure 6-3: NO2 Converter Assembly.......................................................................................................... 211

Figure 6-4: Reaction Cell Assembly............................................................................................................ 213

Figure 6-5: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly ..................................................................................................214

Figure 7-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages................................................................................ 219

Figure 7-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions................................................................................................. 221

Figure 7-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator .................................................................................. 222

Figure 7-4: Relay Board PCA...................................................................................................................... 223

Figure 7-5: T200H – Basic Internal Gas Flow............................................................................................. 226

Figure 7-6: T200H – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A .............................................. 227

Figure 7-7: T200H – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A............................................................. 228

Figure 7-8: T200M – Basic Internal Gas Flow............................................................................................. 229

Figure 7-9: T200M – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A.............................................. 230

Figure 7-10: T200M – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A ............................................................ 231

Figure 7-11: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers .......................................................................... 241

Figure 7-12: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)............................................................................................... 242

Figure 7-13: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 243

Figure 7-14: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP6) ....................................................................... 244

Figure 7-15: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test ....................................................................................... 248

Figure 7-16: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly............................................................................................ 253

Figure 7-17: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout....................................................................................................... 259

Figure 7-18: T200H/M Sensor Assembly ...................................................................................................... 260

Figure 7-19. 3-Port Reaction Cell Oriented to the Sensor Housing.............................................................. 261

Figure 7-20: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place............................................................................ 263

Figure 7-21: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations.................................................................................... 263

Figure 8-1: T200H/M Sensitivity Spectrum ................................................................................................. 268

Figure 8-2: NO2 Conversion Principle ......................................................................................................... 269

07270B DCN6512

Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

xvi

Figure 8-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube ................................................................................................... 270

Figure 8-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle................................................................................. 271

Figure 8-5: External Pump Pack ................................................................................................................. 275

Figure 8-6: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200H............................................................... 277

Figure 8-7: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200M .............................................................. 278

Figure 8-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ......................................................................... 279

Figure 8-9: Ozone Generator Principle .......................................................................................................282

Figure 8-10: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process ........................................................................... 283

Figure 8-11: T200H/M Perma Pure® Dryer ................................................................................................... 284

Figure 8-12: Vacuum Manifold ...................................................................................................................... 286

Figure 8-13: Dilution Manifold ....................................................................................................................... 288

Figure 8-14: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation ................................................................................... 289

Figure 8-15: T200H/M Electronic Block Diagram.......................................................................................... 290

Figure 8-16: T200H/M CPU Board Annotated .............................................................................................. 291

Figure 8-17: PMT Housing Assembly ........................................................................................................... 293

Figure 8-18: Basic PMT Design .................................................................................................................... 294

Figure 8-19: PMT Cooling System ................................................................................................................ 295

Figure 8-20: PMT Preamp Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 296

Figure 8-21: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram......................................................................................... 298

Figure 8-22: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 299

Figure 8-23: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA.......................................................................................... 301

Figure 8-24: Power Distribution Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 305

Figure 8-25: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram.................................................................... 306

Figure 8-26: Basic Software Operation ......................................................................................................... 307

Figure 9-1: Triboelectric Charging............................................................................................................... 311

Figure 9-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station .................................................................................................... 314

LIST OF TABLES

Table 2-1: Model T200H/M Basic Unit Specifications...................................................................................23

Table 3-1: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings..................................................................................34

Table 3-4: Analog Output Pin-Outs...............................................................................................................34

Table 3-5: Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................35

Table 3-6: Control Input Signals ...................................................................................................................38

Table 5-5: Alarm Relay Output Assignments................................................................................................39

Table 3-8: Inlet / Outlet Connector Descriptions...........................................................................................42

Table 3-9: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ................................................43

Table 3-10: Zero/Span Valve States...............................................................................................................51

Table 3-11: Two-Point Span Valve Operating States .....................................................................................53

Table 4-1: Analyzer Operating modes ..........................................................................................................73

Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined................................................................................................................74

Table 4-3: List of Warning Messages ...........................................................................................................76

Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................77

Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions ........................................................................78

Table 4-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS.................................................................................80

Table 4-7: DAS Data Channel Properties.....................................................................................................81

Table 4-8: DAS Data Parameter Functions ..................................................................................................82

Table 4-9: T200H/M Default DAS Configuration...........................................................................................84

Table 4-10: Password Levels..........................................................................................................................99

Table 4-11: COM Port Communication modes............................................................................................ 104

Table 4-13: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties...................................................................................... 113

Table 4-14: Internet Configuration Menu Button Functions......................................................................... 116

Table 4-15: Variable Names (VARS) ...........................................................................................................124

Table 4-16: T200H/M Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions .................................................................................... 127

Table 4-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active ......................................................... 131

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table of Contents

xvii

Table 4-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments............................................................................................... 131

Table 4-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range ......................................................................................... 132

Table 4-20: Example of Analog Output Configuration for T200H/M ............................................................ 132

Table 4-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .................................................................................................... 134

Table 4-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings............................................................................... 140

Table 4-23: Analog Output DAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data ..................................... 141

Table 4-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration ................................................................... 151

Table 4-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ......................................................................... 154

Table 4-26: T200H/M Available Concentration Display Values................................................................... 158

Table 4-27: T200H/M Concentration Display Default Values ...................................................................... 159

Table 4-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings....................................................................................... 166

Table 4-30: Control Input Pin Assignments ................................................................................................. 168

Table 4-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands ....................................................................................... 170

Table 4-32: Command Types....................................................................................................................... 170

Table 4-33: Serial Interface Documents ......................................................................................................176

Table 4-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ....................................................... 177

Table 6-28: T200H/M Hessen Protocol Response Modes .......................................................................... 178

Table 4-35: T200H/M Hessen GAS ID List.................................................................................................. 180

Table 4-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments ................................................................................... 181

Table 5-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ............................................. 185

Table 5-2: AutoCal Modes ......................................................................................................................... 201

Table 5-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters......................................................................................... 201

Table 5-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence.................................................................................................... 202

Table 5-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation.......................................................................................... 204

Table 6-1: T200H/M Preventive Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................... 206

Table 6-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions........................................................................................... 207

Table 7-4: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)............................................................... 243

Table 7-5: Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6) ................................................................ 244

Table 7-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code........................................................................... 245

Table 7-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ....................................................................................... 245

Table 7-8: Relay Board Control Devices.................................................................................................... 246

Table 7-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ....................................................................... 247

Table 7-10: Status Outputs Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 248

Table 7-11: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs ................................................................................ 252

Table 8-1: List of Interferents ..................................................................................................................... 273

Table 8-2: T200H/M Valve Cycle Phases.................................................................................................. 276

Table 8-3: T200H/M Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates................................................ 280

Table8-4: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 299

Table 8-5: Typical Thermocouple Settings ................................................................................................ 300

Table 9-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities ...................................................................... 312

Table 9-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD............................................................... 312

LIST OF APPENDICES

APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION

APPENDIX B - T200H/M SPARE PARTS LIST

APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - T200H/M

APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS

07270B DCN6512

Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

xviii

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES, AND OPTIONS

1.1. OVERVIEW

The Models T200H and T200M (also referred to in this manual as T200H/M when

applicable to both models) use the proven chemiluminescence measurement principle,

coupled with state-of-the-art microprocessor technology for monitoring high and

medium levels of nitrogen oxides. User-selectable analog output ranges and a linear

response over the entire measurement range make them ideal for a wide variety of

applications, including extractive and dilution CEM, stack testing, and process control.

1.2. FEATURES

The Models T200H and T200M include the following features:

 LCD Graphical User Interface with capacitive touch screen

 Bi-directional RS-232, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet (optional USB and RS-485) ports

for remote operation

 Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices

 T200H: 0-5 ppm to 0-5000 ppm, user selectable

 T200M: 0-1 to 0-200 ppm, user selectable

 Independent ranges for NO, NO2, NOX

 Auto ranging and remote range selection

 NOX-only or NO-only modes

 Microprocessor controlled for versatility

 Multi-tasking software allows viewing of test variables while operating

 Continuous self checking with alarms

 Permeation drier on ozone generator

 Digital status outputs provide instrument condition

 Adaptive signal filtering optimizes response time

 Temperature & pressure compensation, automatic zero correction

 Converter efficiency correction software

 Minimum CO2 and H2O interference

 Catalytic ozone scrubber

 Internal data logging with 1 min to 365 day multiple averages

1.3. USING THIS MANUAL

The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display

during the various operations being described. These representations are not intended to

be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.

07270B DCN6512

Introduction, Features, and Options Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

1.4. OPTIONS

Option Option

Number Description/Notes Reference

Pumps Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same

pneumatic performance.

11A Ship without pump N/A

11B Pumpless Pump Pack N/A

12A Internal Pump 115V @ 60 Hz N/A

12B Internal Pump 220V @ 60 Hz N/A

12C Internal Pump 220V @ 50 Hz N/A

Rack Mount

Kits Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks

20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in. (660 mm) chassis slides N/A

20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in. (610 mm) chassis slides N/A

21 Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29) N/A

23 Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides) N/A

Carrying Strap/Handle Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer

Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying.

Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage.

Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21.

Cannot be used with rack mount slides.

N/A

CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD

THE T200H OR T200M ANALYZER WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS).

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND THAT TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE

ANALYZER. DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE MOVING IT.

Analog Input and USB port Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as

meteorological instruments).

64B

Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal

DAS Section 3.4.2

Current Loop Analog

Outputs

Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog

outputs.

Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA.

May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs.

Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field.

Section 3.4.5

Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables

42A

Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for

one year of operation of this instrument including replacement

sample particulate filters.

Appendix B

Calibration Valves Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources,

rather than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections.

50A

AMBIENT ZERO AND AMBIENT SPAN VALVES

Zero Air and Span Gas input supplied at ambient pressure.

Gases controlled by 2 internal valves; SAMPLE/CAL & ZERO/SPAN.

Section 3.5.3.1

50D

ZERO SCRUBBER AND DUAL PRESSURIZED SPAN VALVES

Zero Air Scrubber produces/supplies zero air to the ZERO inlet port.

Dual Pressurized Span Valves for two gas mixtures to separate inlet ports,

HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN.

Section 3.5.3.2

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Introduction, Features, and Options

Option Option

Number Description/Notes Reference

Communication Cables For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.

Type Description

60A RS-232

Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about

1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or

code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.

Section 3.4.8

60B RS-232

Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about

1.8 m length. Section 3.4.8

60C Ethernet

Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN

communications. Section 3.4.8

60D USB

Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear

panel USB port) and personal computer. Section 3.4.8

USB Port For remote connection

64A

For connection to personal computer. (Separate option only when

Option 64B, Analog Input and USB Com Port not elected).

Sections 3.4.8.2

and 4.11.8

Concentration Alarm Relays Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user.

Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This

relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures”

that come standard on all TAPI instruments.

Section 3.4.7

RS-232 Multidrop Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers.

Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.

Each instrument in the multidrop network requres this card and a

communications cable (Option 60B).

Sections 3.4.8.3

and 4.11.9

Other Gas Options Second gas sensor and gas conditioners

65A Oxygen (O2) Sensor

Figure 3-23, Figure

3-24 and Sections

3.7.2 and 8.4

86A

Sample Gas Conditioner (Dryer/NH3 Removal) for sample gas

stream only. Converts analyzer to dual-conditioner instrument. (contact Sales)

Sample Oxygenator for proper operation of the NO2-to-NO catalytic

converter. Injects oxygen into sample gas that is depleted of oxygen. (contact Sales)

Special Features Built in features, software activated

N/A

Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places

the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling,

yet ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands.

This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to

Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks.

Call Customer Service for activation.

N/A

Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display

messages in a language other than the instrument’s default

language.

Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing

the second language.

N/A

Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted

sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where

the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling

method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.

Call Customer Service for activation.

Section 4.8.2

07270B DCN6512

Introduction, Features, and Options Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS

2.1. T200H/M OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2-1: Model T200H/M Basic Unit Specifications

Min/Max Range

(Physical Analog Output) T200H: Min: 0-5 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm T200M: Min: 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-200 ppm

Measurement Units ppm, mg/m3 (user selectable)

Zero Noise <20 ppb (RMS)

Span Noise <0.2% of reading above 20 ppm

Lower Detectable Limit 40 ppb (2x noise as per USEPA)

Zero Drift (24 hours) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Zero Drift (7 days) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Span Drift (7 Days) <1% of reading (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Linearity 1% of full scale

Precision 0.5% of reading

Lag Time 20 s

Rise/Fall Time 95% in <60 s (~10 s in NO only or NOX only modes)

T200H:

 40 cm³/min sample gas through NO2

converter & sensor module

 250 cm3/min ± 10% through bypass

manifold

 290 cm³/min total flow

T200M:

250 cm³/min sample gas through NO2

converter & sensor module

Gas Flow Rates

O2 Sensor option adds 80 cm³/min to total flow though T200H/M when installed.

Temperature Range 5 - 40 C operating range

Humidity Range 0-95% RH non-condensing

Dimensions H x W x D 18 cm x 43 cm x 61 cm (7" x 17" x 23.6")

Weight, Analyzer 18 kg (40 lbs) without options

Weight, Ext Pump Pack 7 kg (16 lbs)

AC Power

T200H:

100V-120V, 60 Hz (175W)

220V-240V, 50 Hz (155W)

T200M:

100V-120V, 60 Hz (55W)

220V-240V, 50 Hz (75W)

Power, Ext Pump 100 V, 50 Hz (300 W); 100 V, 60 Hz (255 W); 115 V, 60 Hz (285 W);

220 - 240 V, 50 Hz (270 W); 230 V, 60 Hz (270 W)

Environmental Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2

Analog Outputs 4 user configurable outputs

Analog Output Ranges

All Outputs: 0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V

Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop.

All Ranges with 5% under/over-range

Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)

Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto-isolators, 7 defined, 1 spare

Control Inputs 6 Control inputs, 4 defined, 2 spare

Alarm outputs 2 relay alarms outputs (Optional equipment) with user settable alarm limits

- 1 Form C: SPDT; 3 Amp @ 125 VAC

Standard I/O

1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T

2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)

2 USB device ports

8 opto-isolated digital outputs

6 opto-isolated digital inputs

4 analog outputs

Optional I/O

1 USB com port

1 RS485

8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit)

4 digital alarm outputs

Multidrop RS232

3 4-20mA current outputs

07270B DCN6512

Specifications and Approvals Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

2.2. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS

The Teledyne API Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers T200H and T200M were tested and

certified for Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the

compliance statements for those requirements and directives.

2.2.1. SAFETY

IEC 61010-1:2001, Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control, and laboratory use.

CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive

North American:

cNEMKO (Canada): CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04

NEMKO-CCL (US): UL No. 61010-1 (2nd Edition)

2.2.2. EMC

EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity

EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions

FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions

CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

07270B DCN6512

3. GETTING STARTED

3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP

CAUTION

THE T200H AND THE T200M EACH WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT

OPTIONS INSTALLED. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND TO USE TWO

PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE ANALYZER.

Note It is recommended that you store shipping containers/materials for future

use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair

and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and

shipping procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com

under Customer Support > Return Authorization.

WARNING

NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES OR

ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER.

1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please

advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.

2. Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance

characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record, titled

Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04413) is an important quality assurance

and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records

file for this instrument.

3. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping

damage, as follows:

a. Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the front panel.

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be

felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection

when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.

See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge section in this manual for more information on preventing

ESD damage.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

b. Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards

the rear).

c. Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel.

d. Lift the cover straight up.

4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other

components are in good shape and properly seated.

5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses

to make sure they are firmly and properly seated.

6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.

These are checked on the paperwork (Form 04490) accompanying the analyzer.

3.2. VENTILATION CLEARANCE

Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to

leave sufficient ventilation clearance.

AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE

Back of the instrument 10 cm / 4 inches

Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch

Above and below the instrument. 2.5 cm / 1 inch

3.3. T200H/M LAYOUT

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel layout of the analyzer, and Figure 3-4 shows the rear

panel with optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the IZS

option. Figure 3-5 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. This configuration includes

the IZS option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer (briefly described in

Section 1.4).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-1: Front Panel

Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control

CAUTION – Avoid Damaging Touch screen

Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to operate the touch screen.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control. Upon analyzer start-

up, the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main

display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above (may or may not display a Fault alarm). The

LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault states; also on the

screen is the gas concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time readouts for the

primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen also shows what

mode the analyzer is currently in, as well as messages and data (Param). Along the

bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only those that are currently

applicable will have a label. Table 3-1 provides detailed information for each component

of the screen.

Table 3-1: Display Screen and Touch Control Description

Field Description/Function

LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows:

Name Color State Definition

SAMPLE Green

Off

Blinking

Unit is not operating in sample mode, DAS is disabled.

Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data

being stored.

Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated,

DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled

CAL Yellow

Off

Blinking

Auto Cal disabled

Auto Cal enabled

Unit is in calibration mode

Status

FAULT Red Off

Blinking

No warnings exist

Warnings exist

Conc Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the

currently selected units of measure

Mode Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode

Param Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function

values and response messages during interactive tasks.

Control Buttons Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable.

Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts illustrated in

this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas concentration) fields in the

display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart. The eight touch

control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row

of each menu chart.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts

The rear panel is illustrated in Figure 3-4 and described in Table 3-2.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Figure 3-4: T200H/M Rear Panel Layout

Table 3-2: Rear Panel Description

Component Function

Cooling Fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear.

AC power

connector

Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer.

CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power

specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label

Model label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides voltage and frequency specs

SAMPLE Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here.

Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero/span valve options installed.

EXHAUST Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside

the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.

SPAN 1 On units with zero/span valve options installed, connect a gas line to the source of

calibrated span gas here.

ZERO AIR

(option)

Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span valve options installed but no internal zero air

scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here.

RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.

COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485.

RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only.

DCE DTE Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment

during RS-232 communication.

STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).

ANALOG OUT For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.

CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes.

ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings.

ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable

ANALOG IN Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these

signals.

USB Option for direct connection to laptop computer, using USB cable.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-5: T200H/M Internal Layout

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.4. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable

length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include

Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232,

and RS-485.

Refer to Figure 3-4 for the location of the rear panel electrical and pneumatic

connections.

3.4.1. POWER CONNECTION

Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying

at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth

ground.

CAUTION

CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SPECIFICATIONS ON THE REAR PANEL

LABEL SHOWING THE MODEL NAME AND NUMBER OF THE INSTRUMENT FOR

COMPATIBILITY WITH THE LOCAL POWER BEFORE PLUGGING THE T200H/M INTO

LINE POWER.

Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or frequency is incorrect.

WARNING – RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE INSTRUMENT’S CHASSIS.

POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION.

DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.

TURN OFF ANALYZER POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR

CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.

DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF.

The T200H/M analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either

50 or 60 Hz. To avoid damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage

matches the voltage indicated on the rear panel serial number label and that the

frequency is between 47 and 63 Hz.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.4.2. ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION 64) CONNECTIONS

The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other

instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the

analyzer’s internal DAS. The input voltage range for each analog input is 0-10 VDC,

and the input impedance is nominally 20kΩ in parallel with 0.1µF.

Figure 3-6: Analog In Connector

Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3: Analog Input Pin Assignments

PIN DESCRIPTION DAS

PARAMETER1

1 Analog input # 1 AIN 1

2 Analog input # 2 AIN 2

3 Analog input # 3 AIN 3

4 Analog input # 4 AIN 4

5 Analog input # 5 AIN 5

6 Analog input # 6 AIN 6

7 Analog input # 7 AIN 7

8 Analog input # 8 AIN 8

GND Analog input Ground N/A

1 See Section 4.7 for details on setting up the DAS.

3.4.3. ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

The T200H/M is equipped with four analog output channels accessible through a

connector on the back panel of the instrument. Each of these outputs may be set to

reflect the value of any of the instrument’s DAS data types. (see Table A-6 of T200H/M

Appendix A – P/N 05147).

The following table lists the default settings for each of these channels. To change these

settings, see Sections 6.13.4

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 3-1: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings

CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING

PARAMETER A1 A2 A3 A43

DATA TYPE1 NXCNC1 NOCNC1 N2CNC1 NXCNC2

RANGE 0 - 5 VDC2

REC OFS 0 mVDC

AUTO CAL. ON

CALIBRATED NO

OUTPUT ON

SCALE 100 ppm

UPDATE 5 sec

1 See Table A-6 of T200H/M Appendix A for definitions of these DAS data types

2 Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3.

3 On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, DAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4.

To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate

contacts of the analog output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer.

NALOG OUT

+ - + - + - + -

Figure 3-7: Analog Output Connector

Table 3-4: Analog Output Pin-Outs

PIN ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL

1 V Out I Out +

Ground I Out -

3 V Out I Out +

Ground I Out -

5 V Out I Out +

Ground I Out -

7 V Out Not Available

Ground Not Available

3.4.4. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS

The analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts logic-level digital

inputs, such as programmable logic controller (PLC) chips, are accessed through a 12

pin connector labeled STATUS on the analyzer’s rear panel.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

EMITTER BUS

FOR PINS 1-8

STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +

SYSTEM OK

HIGH RANGE

CONC VALID

ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

DIAGNOSTIC

MODE

LOW SPAN

Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector

Note Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the amount of current the

input will draw. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature,

external resistors must be used to limit the current through the individual

transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V supply).

Table 3-5: Status Output Signals

PIN # STATUS CONDITION (ON = CONDUCTING)

1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.

2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement (NO, NO2 or NOx) is valid.

OFF any time the hold-off feature is active.

3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of the Auto Range Mode.

4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO point calibration mode.

5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN point calibration mode.

6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode.

7 LOW SPAN CAL ON when in low span calibration (optional equipment necessary)

8 Not Used

D EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are tied together.

Not Used

+ DC POWER + 5 VDC, 300 mA (combined rating with Control Output, if used).

Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.4.5. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPT 41) SETUP

This option adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s

analog outputs. This option may be ordered separately for the first three of the analog

outputs and can be installed at the factory or added later. Call Teledyne API sales for

pricing and availability.

The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA

(for example 0-20, 2-20 or 4-20 mA). Information on calibrating or adjusting these

outputs can be found in Section 4.13.6.3.

Figure 3-9: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small

to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD

protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.

See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing

ESD damage.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.4.5.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage Outputs.

To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC

output operation:

1. Turn off power to the analyzer.

2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.

3. Remove the top cover:

a. Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel

b. Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side).

c. Lift the cover straight up.

4. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the

motherboard.

5. Place a shunt between the leftmost two pins of the connector (see Figure 3-9).

6. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.

The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that

output.

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small

to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD

protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.

See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing

ESD damage.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.4.6. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS

Control Inputs are used to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes. Locate

the 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel.

There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available

from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is

required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

SPAN CAL

ZERO CAL

LOW SPAN

CONTROL IN

Local Power Connections External Power Connections

SPAN CAL

ZERO CAL

LOW SPAN

CONTROL IN

5 VDC Power

Supply

A B C D E F U + A B C D E F U +

RANGE HI

Figure 3-10: Control Input Connector

Table 3-6: Control Input Signals

INPUT # STATUS DEFINITION ON CONDITION

A REMOTE ZERO CAL The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of

the display will read ZERO CAL R.

B REMOTE SPAN CAL The analyzer is placed in Span Calibration mode. The mode field of

the display will read SPAN CAL R.

C REMOTE LO SPAN CAL

The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part of

performing a low span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the

display will read LO CAL R.

D REMOTE RANGE HI The analyzer is placed into high range when configured for dual

ranges..

E SPARE

F SPARE

Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies

(same as chassis ground).

U External Power input Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A - F.

+ 5 VDC output

Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A - F, place a

jumper between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage

through this port is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply,

if used).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.4.7. CONNECTING THE ALARM RELAY OPTION (OPT 61)

The T200H/M can be equipped with a set of 2 concentration alarms. Each alarm can be

independently enabled or disabled as well as programmed with its own, individual alarm

limit point (see Section 4.14 for details on programming the alarms).

The status of each alarm is available via a set of alarm relay outputs located on the lower

right hand corner of the analyzer’s rear panel (see Figure 3-4). While there are four

relay outputs on the back of the analyzer, only Two of the outputs correspond to the

instrument’s two concentration alarms.

Table 5-5: Alarm Relay Output Assignments

RELAY NAME AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4

ASSIGNED ALARM ST_SYSTEM_OK21 CONCENTRATION

ALARM 1

CONCENTRATION

ALARM 2 SPARE

1 ST_SYSTEM OK2 is a second system OK status alarm available on some analyzers.

LARM OUT

AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC

ST_SYSTEM_OK2

(Optional Alert)

CONCENTRATION

ALARM 1

CONCENTRATION

ALARM 2 SPARE

Figure 3-11: Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments

Each of the two concentration relay outputs has 3-pin connections that allow the relay to

be connected for either normally open or normally closed operation. Table 3-7 describes

how to connect the alarm relays.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 3-7: Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation

RELAY PIN

STATE1

RELAY FUNCTION N

O C N

COMMENTS

Concentration Alarm 1

Active

Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for

CONC_ALARM_1

 DAS Trigger CONCW1 ACTIVATED

 CONC ALARM1 WARN appears on Analyzer Display

AL2

Concentration Alarm 1

Inactive Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for

CONC_ALARM_1

Concentration Alarm 2

Active

Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for

CONC_ALARM_2

 DAS Trigger CONCW2 ACTIVATED

 CONC ALARM2 WARN appears on Analyzer Display

AL3

Concentration Alarm 2

Inactive Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for

CONC_ALARM_2

1 NO = Normally Open operation.

C = Common

NC = Normally Closed operation.

3.4.8. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATIONS PORTS

For RS-232 or RS-485 (option) communications through the analyzer’s two serial

interface ports, refer to Section 4.11 for information and connection instructions.

3.4.8.1. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet

For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable

from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. See

Section 4.11.7 for configuration instructions.

Note The T200H/M firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP. If your

network also supports DHCP, the analyzer will automatically configure its

LAN connection appropriately. If your network does not support DHCP,

see Section 4.11.7.2 for instructions on manually configuring the LAN

connection.

3.4.8.2. Connecting to a Personal Computer (PC)

If the USB port is configured for direct communication between the analyzer and a

desktop or a laptop PC, connect a USB cable between the analyzer and the PC or laptop

USB ports, and follow the set-up instructions in Section 4.11.8. (RS-485 communication

is not available with the USB com port option).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.4.8.3. Connecting to a Multidrop Network

The multidrop option is used with RS-232 and utilizes both com port DB-9 connectors

(RS-232 and COM2) on the rear panel to enable communications of up to eight

analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables. It is subject to the

distance limitations of the RS 232 standard.

The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which is seated on the analyzer’s

CPU card (see Figure 3-12). One Option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one

6’ straight-through, DB9 male  DB9 Female cable (P/N WR0000101).

If your unit has a Teledyne API RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 4.11.9

for instructions on setting it up.

Figure 3-12: T200H/M Multidrop Card

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.5. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS

Note To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small

plugs inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel.

Remove and store the dust plugs for future use, such as storage, moving,

shipping.

CAUTION!

Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE and EXHAUST

ports on the rear panel!

Table 3-8: Inlet / Outlet Connector Descriptions

REAR PANEL LABEL FUNCTION

SAMPLE Connects the sample gas to the analyzer. When operating the analyzer

without zero span option, this is also the inlet for any calibration gases.

EXHAUST Connects the exhaust of the analyzer with the external vacuum pump.

SPAN On Units with a zero/span valve, this port connects the external calibration gas

to the analyzer.

ZERO AIR On Units with a zero/span valve, this port connects the zero air gas or the zero

air cartridge to the analyzer.

3.5.1. ABOUT ZERO AIR AND CALIBRATION (SPAN) GASES

3.5.1.1. Zero Air

Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical

composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the

analyzer, in this case NO and NO2. If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero

air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air from ambient air.

If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should

be matched to the matrix of the measured medium. Pure nitrogen could be used as a

zero gas for applications where NOX is measured in nitrogen. Special considerations

apply if measuring NOX in a matrix that does not contain oxygen, see Section 8.3.11 for

more information.

3.5.1.2. Calibration (Span) Gas

Calibration (or Span) gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition

of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range.

In this case, NOX, NO and NO2 measurements made with the T200H/M, it is

recommended that you use a span gas with an NO concentration equal to 80% of the

measurement range for your application.

EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppm, an

appropriate span gas concentration would be 400 ppm NOx.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Even though NO gas in nitrogen could be used as a span gas, the matrix of the balance

gas is different and may cause interference problems or yield incorrect calibrations. The

same applies to gases that contain high concentrations of other compounds (for example,

CO2 or H2O). The span gas should match all concentrations of all gases of the measured

medium as closely as possible.

Cylinders of calibrated NO gas traceable to NIST-standard reference materials

specifications (also referred to as EPA protocol calibration gases) are commercially

available.

Table 3-9: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases

NIST-SRM4 TYPE NOMINAL

CONCENTRATION

2627a

2628a

2629a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

5 ppm

10 ppm

20 ppm

1683b

1684b

1685b

1686b

1687b

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

50 ppm

100 ppm

250 ppm

5000 ppm

1000 ppm

2630

2631a

2635

2636a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

1500 ppm

3000 ppm

800 ppm

2000 ppm

2631a

1684b

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in N2

3000 ppm

100 ppm

Note If a dynamic dilution system such as the Teledyne API Model T700 is used

to dilute high concentration gas standards to low, ambient

concentrations, make sure that the NO concentration of the reference gas

matches the dilution range of the calibrator. Choose an NO gas

concentration that is in the middle of the dilution system’s range.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.5.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS TO T200H/M BASIC CONFIGURATION

Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the most common configurations for gas supply and

exhaust lines to the Model T200H/M analyzer. Please refer to Figure 3-4 for the

locations of pneumatic connections on the rear panel and Table 3-2 for the descriptions.

Note Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE

(Teflon) or glass or materials. They should not come in contact with FEP

or stainless steel materials.

Source of

SAMPLE GAS

Removed during

calibration

Instrument

Chassis

SAMPLE

EXHAUST

PUMP

MODEL T700

Gas Dilution

Calibrator

VENT (if no vent

on calibrator)

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

NOx Gas

(High Concentration)

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Figure 3-13: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Source of

SAMPLE GAS

Removed during

calibration

Instrument

Chassis

SAMPLE

EXHAUST

PUMP

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

VENT

3-way Valve

Manual

Control Valve

VENT here if input

is pressurized

NOX Gas

(High Concentration)

Figure 3-14: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

1. Attach a 1/4" exhaust line between the external pump and the EXHAUST port of the

analyzer.

2. Attach an additional 1/4" exhaust port of the pump.

CAUTION

The exhaust from the analyzer must be vented outside the shelter or immediate

area surrounding the instrument and conform to all safety requirements using

a maximum of 10 meters of 1/4” PTFE tubing.

3. Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet port. Ideally, the pressure of the

sample gas should be equal to ambient atmospheric pressure.

Note Maximum pressure of any gas at the SAMPLE inlet should not exceed 1.5

in-Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient

atmospheric pressure.

In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized

manifold, a vent must be provided to equalize the sample gas with

ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer.

The vented gas must be routed outside the immediate area or shelter

surrounding the instrument.

4. Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic

fittings for leaks using procedures defined in Section 7.5.1.

Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the internal pneumatic flow of the standard

configuration of the T200H and T200M respectively.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-15: T200H Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

VACUUM

PRESSURE

SENSOR

SAMPLE

PRESSURE

SENSOR

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

FLOW PRESSURE

SENSOR PCA

INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

PERMAPURE

DRYER

NO/NOX

VALVE

AUTOZERO

VALVE O3

GENERATOR

SAMPLE

GAS

INLET

Filter

Orifice Dia.

0.004"

PUMP

NOXExhaust

Scrubber

Destruct

EXHAUST

GAS

OUTLET

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

REACTION

CELL

PMT

COMNO

COM

NO2

Converter

Figure 3-16: T200M Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration

Note Pneumatic Diagrams do not reflect the physical layout of the instrument.

The most significant differences between the T200H and T200M versions in regards to

pneumatic flow are:

 A bypass line leading directly from the particulate filter to the exhaust manifold is

present on the T200H, but not in the T200M.

 The diameter of the critical flow orifice controlling the gas flow into the sample

chamber is smaller and therefore the flow rate of sample gas through the instrument

is lower.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.5.3. CONNECTIONS WITH INTERNAL VALVE OPTIONS INSTALLED

If your analyzer is equipped with either the zero/span valve option (50A) or the 2-span

point valve option (50D), the pneumatic connections should be made as shown in Figure

3-17 and Figure 3-18:

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Source of

SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

Instrument

Chassis

Sample

Exhaust

Span Point

Zero Air

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span

Concentration

MODEL T700

Gas Dilution

Calibrator

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

Figure 3-17: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A)

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Source of

SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

VENT

Instrument

Chassis

Sample

Exhaust

High Span Point

Low Span Point

Zero Air

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span

Concentration

Calibrated NO

at LOW Span

Concentration

VENT

On/Off

Valves

Figure 3-18: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span Point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas

Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic

fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in Section 7.5.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.5.3.1. Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Valves (OPT 50A)

The Model T200H/M NOx analyzer can be equipped with a zero/span valve option for controlling the flow of

calibration gases generated from external sources. This option contains two solenoid valves located inside the

analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero, span or sample gas to the instrument’s sensor.

The user can control these valves from the front panel keyboard either manually or by activating the instrument’s

CAL or AutoCal features (Section 5.8). The valves may also be opened and closed remotely through the serial

ports (Section 4.11) or through the external, digital control inputs (Section 4.15).

This option also includes a two-stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all NO and NO2 from

the zero air source (ambient air). The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO to

NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of NO2). This assembly also includes a small particle filter to

prevent scrubber particles to enter the analyzer as well as two more rear panel fittings so each gas can enter the

analyzer separately.

Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show the internal, pneumatic layouts with the zero/span valve option installed for a

Model T200H and T200M respectively.

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

Filter

NOXExhaust

Scrubber

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Figure 3-19: T200H – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-20: T200M – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A

Table 3-10: Zero/Span Valve States

MODE VALVE CONDITION

Sample/Cal Open to sample gas inlet

SAMPLE Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet

Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated)

ZERO

CALIBRATION Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet

Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated)

SPAN

CALIBRATION Zero/Span Open to span gas inlet / IZS gas (activated)

The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled:

 Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located

under the DIAG Menu (Section 4.13.2),

 By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 5.8),

 Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 4.15.1.2) or Ethernet

option.

 Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 4.11).

All supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer’s enclosure. In order to

prevent back-diffusion and pressure drop effects, these vent lines should be between 2

and 10 meters in length.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.5.3.2. Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span Valve (OPT 50D)

The zero air scrubber of Option 50D is a cartridge, which is used to produce and supply

zero air to the analyzer’s ZERO inlet port. The cartridge mounts to the outside rear panel

and contains two chemicals: 50% volume of Purafil Chemisorbant to convert NO to

NO2, followed by 50% volume of charcoal to absorb NO2.

The dual pressurized span valves of Option 50D are a special set of valves that allows

two separate NOx mixtures to enter the analyzer from two independent sources.

Typically these two gas mixtures will come from two, separate, pressurized bottles of

certified calibration gas: one mixed to produce a NO, NO2 or NOx concentration equal

to the expected span calibration value for the application and the other mixed to produce

a concentration at or near the midpoint of the intended measurement range. Individual

gas inlets, labeled HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN are provided at the back on the

analyzer.

The valves allow the user to switch between the two sources via the front panel

touchscreen control buttons or from a remote location by way of either the analyzer’s

digital control inputs or by sending commands over its serial I/O port(s).

Note The analyzer’s software only allows the SLOPE and OFFSET to be

calculated when sample is being routed through the HIGH SPAN inlet.

The LOW SPAN gas is for midpoint reference checks only.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

The state of the optional valves can be controlled:

 Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O submenu located

under the DIAG menu (Section 4.13.2),

 By activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 5.8),

 Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 4.15.1.2) or Ethernet.

 Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 4.11).

Table 3-11: Two-Point Span Valve Operating States

MODE VALVE CONDITION

Sample/Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

SAMPLE

Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve Open to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

ZERO

CAL

Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve Open to HIGH SPAN inlet

HIGH

SPAN

CAL

Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

Low Span

Check

Low Span Valve Open to LOW SPAN inlet

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-21: T200H - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Figure 3-22: T200M - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.5.3.3. Internal Flow for O2 Sensor Option 65A

Please see Section 3.7.2 for calibration connections and method.

VACUUM

PRESSURE

SENSOR

SAMPLE

PRESSURE

SENSOR

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

FLOW PRESSURE

SENSOR PCA

INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

NO/NOX

VALVE

AUTOZERO

VALVE

Destruct

GENERATOR

EXHAUST

GAS

OUTLET

SAMPLE

GAS

INLET

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Sensor

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

Orifice Dia.

0.004"

PUMP

NOXExhaust

Scrubber

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

REACTION

CELL

PMT

PERMAPURE

DRYER

Filter

Orifice Dia.

0.004"

OPTION, O2

SENSOR, P/N 04453

COMNO

COM

NO2

Converter

Figure 3-23: T200H – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Figure 3-24: T200M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A

07270B DCN6512

3.6. INITIAL OPERATION

CAUTION!

If the presence of ozone is detected at any time, call Teledyne API Technical Support as soon

as possible:

800-324-5190 or email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com

If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation of the T200H/M analyzer, we

recommend that you read Section 8 before proceeding. For information on navigating

the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A.

3.6.1. STARTUP

After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, an initial functional check is in

order. Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately. The

display will briefly show a logo splash screen at the start of initialization.

The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up

sequence and start monitoring NOX, NO, NO2 gases. Allow a one-hour warm-up period.

During the warm-up period, the front panel display may show messages in the

Parameters field, such as WARNING messages.

3.6.2. WARNING MESSAGES

During warm-up, internal temperatures and other parameters may be outside of specified

limits. The software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power

up.

SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0

TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

Press CLR to clear the current

message.

If more than one warning is active, the

next message will take its place

Once the last warning has been

cleared, the analyzer returns to

SAMPLE mode

SAMPLE RANGE=200.0 PPM NO = 0.0

< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP

SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0

TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

TEST deactivates warning

messages

MSG activates warning

messages.

<TST TST> keys replaced with

TEST key

NOTE:

If the warning message persists after several attempts to

clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not

an artifact of the warm-u

eriod

Section 4.2.2 provides a table of warning messages with their definitions and the steps to

view and clear them. If warning messages persist after 30 minutes, investigate their

cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Section 7.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.6.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK

After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the

software properly supports any hardware options that were installed.

Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating

parameters. Appendices A and C include a list of test functions viewable from the

analyzer’s front panel as well as their expected values. These functions are also useful

tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer (Section 7). The

enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (part number 04490) lists these values

before the instrument left the factory. To view the current values of these test functions

press the <TST TST> buttons:

1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM1

A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM1

A4:NXCNC2=100%1

NOX STB

SAMP FLOW

OZONE FLOW

PMT

NORM PMT

AZERO

HVPS

RCELL TEMP

BOX TEMP

PMT TEM P

MF TEMP

O2 CELL TEMP2

MOLY TEMP

RCEL

SAMP

NOX SLOPE

NOX OFFSET

NO SLOPE

NO OFFSET

O2 SLOPE2

O2 OFFSET2

TIME

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM NOX = XXX

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

default settings for us er

selectable reporting range

settings.

2 Only appears if O2 sensor

tion is installed.

Toggle <TST TST> to scroll

throu

h list of functions

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.7. CALIBRATION

An initial calibration and functional check should be conducted upon first-time startup.

Note Once you have completed the followng set-up procedures, please fill out

the quality questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to

Teledyne API.

This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our

service and our products. Thank you.

3.7.1. BASIC NOX CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as

used during the analyzer’s factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your

calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation

Data Sheet.

The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available

valve options installed. Section 5 contains instructions for calibrating instruments with

these options.

If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the

instrument’s analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should

be carried out for each parameter.

 Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1

 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Sections 4.13.3 and 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

STEP 1 - Set Units:

To select the concentration units of measure press:

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

UNIT DIL EXIT

SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: PPM

PPM MGM ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Press this button to

select the

concentration units

of measure:

PPM or MGM

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

STEP 2 - Dilution Ratio:

If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T200H/M and your application involves

diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ratio as follows:

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

UNIT DIL EXIT

SETUP X.X DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain

0 0 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Toggle these

buttons to select the

dilution ratio factor

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to the

previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the

previous display..

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

STEP 3 – Set NOx and NO span gas concentrations :

Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of

concentration values likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory

setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog outputs is to be set to transmit

concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output (see Section

4.13.4)

If you supply NO span gas to the analyzer as well as NOx, the values for expected NO

and NOx span gas concentrations need to be identical.

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc

0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOX & NO span concentration

values automatically default to

80.0 Conc.

If this is not the the concentration of

the span gas being used, toggle

these buttons to set the correct

concentration of the NOX and NO

calibration gases.

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to

the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to

the

CONCENTRATION

MENU.

If using NO span gas

in addition to NOX

repeat last step.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

STEP 4 – Zero/Span Calibration :

To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

SAM PLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAM PLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TS T > C AL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT

SAM PLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

EXIT at this point

returns to the

SAMPLE menu.

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the NO/NOx

measurement

Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.

W ait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

SAM PLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX =X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X .XX X

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.

W ait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

SAM PLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

The SPAN key now appears

during the transition from

zero to span.

You may see both keys.

If either the ZERO or SPAN

buttons fail to appear see

Section 10 for

troubleshooting tips.

Analyzer continues to

cycle through NOx,

NO, and NO2

measurements

throughout this

procedure.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

3.7.2. BASIC O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well.

3.7.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup

The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows:

Calibrated N2

at HIGH Span

Concentration

Calibrated O2

at 20.8% Span

Concentration

Source of

SAMPLE GAS

Removed during

calibration

Instrument

Chassis

SAMPLE

EXHAUST

PUMP

VENT

3-way

Valve

Manual

Control Valve

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Figure 3-25: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up

O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API’ recommends using pure N2 when calibration

the zero point of your O2 sensor option.

O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API’ recommends using 21% O2 in N2 when

calibration the span point of your O2 sensor option.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

3.7.2.2. O2 Calibration Method

STEP 1 – Set O2 span gas concentration :

Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.

This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected

reporting range (default factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient

air).

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:O2

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL O2 SPAN CONC:20.8%

02 0.80 ENTREXIT

The O2span concentration value automatically defaults to

20.8 %.

If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being

used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration

of the O2calibration gases.

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to

the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to

the previous menu.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

STEP 2 – Activate O2 sensor stability function

To change the stability test function from NOx concentration to the O2 sensor output,

press:

SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:O2

NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

Press ENTR to keep

changes, then press

EXIT 3 times to return

to SAMPLE menu

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX

<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:NOX

NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

Note Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to NOx when the O2

calibration procedure is complete.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started

STEP 4 – O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION :

To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

The Model T200H/M analyzer is now ready for operation.

07270B DCN6512

Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in

Appendix A of this manual.

Note The flow charts appearing in this section contain typical representations

of the analyzer’s display during the various operations being described.

These representations may differ slightly from the actual display of your

instrument.

The ENTR button may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or

out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-

hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value,

the ENTR button will re-appear.

4.1. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES

The T200H/M software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer

will be operating in SAMPLE mode. In this mode, a continuous read-out of the NO,

NO2 and NOx concentrations are displayed on the front panel and are available to be

output as analog signals from the analyzer’s rear panel terminals. Also, calibrations can

be performed, and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined.

The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for

performing certain configuration operations, such as for the DAS system, configuring

the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS-232/RS-485/Ethernet) communication channels.

The SET UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during

troubleshooting.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display with “SAMPLE” Indicated in the Mode Field

The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the

unit is currently running.

In addition to SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

Table 4-1: Analyzer Operating modes

MODE EXPLANATION

SAMPLE Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.

M-P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated

by pressing the CAL key.

SETUP X.#2 SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas

measurement will continue during this process.

SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is

activated.

ZERO CAL M1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by

the user.

ZERO CAL A1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically

by the AUTOCAL feature.

ZERO CAL R1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely

through the COM ports or digital control inputs.

LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated

automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.

LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely

through the COM ports or digital control inputs.

SPAN CAL M1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.

SPAN CAL A1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the

analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.

SPAN CAL R1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the

COM ports or digital control inputs.

DIAG One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (Section 4.13).

1 Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.

2 The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP

F.0.

The very important CAL mode, which allows calibration of the analyzer in various

ways, is described in detail in Section 7.

4.2. SAMPLE MODE

This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode, the instrument is

analyzing NO and NOX and calculating NO2 concentrations.

4.2.1. TEST FUNCTIONS

A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE

mode. These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the

instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (Section 7). They can also be recorded

in one of the DAS channels (Section 4.7) for data analysis or output on one of the

configurable analog outputs.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined

DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION

Analog output

range

configuration

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM

A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM

A4:NXCNC2=100%

These functions show the default settings for the enabled analog

output channels. See section 4.13.4 for more information.

NOX STB STABILITY PPM, MGM

The stability is a standard deviation of the NOX concentration over 25

samples, each recorded every 10 seconds. A low NOX STB value

indicates low variability in NOX.

SAMP FLW SAMPLE FLOW cm³/min (cc/m) The flow rate of the sample gas through the reaction cell. This value is

not measured but calculated from the sample pressure.

OZONE FL OZONE cm³/min (cc/m) Flow rate of the O3 gas stream as measured with a flow meter

PMT PMT Signal MV The raw output voltage of the PMT.

NORM PMT NORMALIZED PMT

Signal MV The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto-zero offset and

temperature/pressure compensation (if activated).

AZERO AUTO-ZERO MV

The PMT signal with zero NOX, which is usually slightly different from 0 V.

This offset is subtracted from the PMT signal and adjusts for variations in

the zero signal.

HVPS HVPS V The PMT high voltage power supply.

RCELL TEMP REACTION CELL TEMP C The current temperature of the reaction cell.

BOX TEMP BOX TEMPERATURE C The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case.

PMT TEMP PMT TEMPERATURE C The current temperature of the PMT.

CONV TEMP CONVERTER

TEMPERATURE C The current temperature of the NO2 converter.

RCEL REACTION CELL

PRESSURE in-Hg-A The current gas pressure of the reaction cell as measured at the vacuum

manifold. This is the vacuum pressure created by the external pump.

SAMP SAMPLE PRESSURE in-Hg-A The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the reaction cell,

measured between the NO/NOx and Auto-Zero valves.

NOX SLOPE NOx SLOPE - - The slope of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit

during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NOX OFFS NOx OFFSET MV The offset of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit

during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NO SLOPE NO SLOPE - - The slope of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit

during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NO OFFS NO OFFSET MV The offset of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit

during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NO2 NO2 concentration PPM, MGM The current NO2 concentration in the chosen unit.

NOX NOx concentration PPM, MGM The current NOx concentration in the chosen unit.

NO NO concentration PPM, MGM The current NO concentration in the chosen unit.

TEST TEST SIGNAL2 MV Signal of a user-defined test function on output channel A4.

TIME CLOCK TIME hh:mm:ss The current day time for DAS records and calibration events.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

A2:NOCNC1=100 PPM1

A3 :N2 CNC1= 2 5 PP M1

A4:NXCNC2=100%1

RANGE

NOX STB

SAMP FLW

OZONE FL

PMT

NORM PMT

AZE RO

HVPS

RCELL TEMP

BOX TEMP

PMT TEMP

CONV TEMP

O2 CELL TEMP2

RCEL

SAMP

NOX SLOPE

NOX OFFS

NO SLOPE

NO OFFS

O2 SLOPE2

O2 OFFS2

TIME

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

NOX = XXX

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Default settings for user

selectable reporting range

settings.

2 Only appears if O2 sensor

tion is installed.

Toggle <TST TST> to scroll

through list of functions

Figure 4-2: Viewing T200H/M TEST Functions

Note A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an

out-of-range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All pressure

measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute,

atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1

in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air

conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute

atmospheric pressure.

4.2.2. WARNING MESSAGES

The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s

front panel and through the COM ports. Appendix A provides the recommended action

and explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems. 7.1.1 shows how to

view and clear warning messages.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 4-3: List of Warning Messages

MESSAGE DEFINITION

ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument’s analog-to-digital converter (A/D) circuitry or one of the analog

outputs are not calibrated.

AZERO WRN XXX.X MV

The reading taken during the Auto-zero cycle is outside the specified limits. The

value shown here as “XXX.X” indicates the actual auto-zero reading at the time of

the warning.

BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the T200H/M chassis is outside the specified limits.

CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON.

CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON.

CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or was erased.

CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.

DATA INITIALIZED DAS data storage was erased.

HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.

OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.

OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically

clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on.

PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.

RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.

RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.

REAR BOARD NOT DET The firmware is unable to communicate with the motherboard.

RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.

SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

SYSTEM RESET The computer rebooted or was powered up.

To view and clear warning messages

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

Make sure warning messages are

not due to real problems.

Press CLR to clear the current

message.

If more than one warning is active, the

next message will take its place

Once the last warning has been

cleared, the analyzer returns to

SAMPLE mode

SAMPLE

1:NXCNC1=100PPM NO=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP

SAMPLE HVPS W

RNING NO2=XXX.X

TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

TEST deactivates warning

messages MSG activates warning

messages.

<TST TST> keys replaced with

TEST key

All Warning messages are hidden,

but MSG button appears

NOTE:

If the warning message persists

after several attempts to clear it,

the message may indicate a

real problem and not an artifact

of the warm-up period

Figure 4-3: Viewing and Clearing T200H/M WARNING Messages

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.3. CALIBRATION MODE

4.3.1. CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS

Pressing the CAL key switches the T200H/M into calibration mode. In this mode, the

user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.

If the instrument includes the zero/span valve option, the display will also include

CALZ and CALS buttons. Pressing either of these buttons also puts the instrument into

multipoint calibration mode.

 The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.

 The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is

recommended that this span calibration is performed at 90% of full scale of the

analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.

Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described

in detail in Section 5.

4.4. SETUP MODE

The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s

hardware and software features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on

the instruments performance and configure or access data from the internal data

acquisition system (DAS). The areas access under the Setup mode are:

Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions

MODE OR FEATURE MENU

BUTTON DESCRIPTION

Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists key hardware and software configuration information

Auto Cal Feature ACAL Used to set up an operate the AutoCal feature. Only appears if

the analyzer has one of the internal valve options installed

Internal Data Acquisition

(DAS) DAS Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data

Analog Output Reporting

Range Configuration RNGE Used to set the units of measure for the display and set the

dilution ratio on instruments with that option active.

Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the password feature ON/OFF

Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock

Advanced SETUP features MORE This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions

MODE OR FEATURE KEYPAD

LABEL DESCRIPTION MANUAL

SECTION

External Communication

Channel Configuration COMM

Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O

channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication

and/or Ethernet access.

6.11 &

6.15

System Status Variables VARS Used to view various variables related to the instruments current

operational status 6.12

System Diagnostic Features

and

Analog Output Configuration

DIAG

Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,

test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic

systems.

Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals

generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here.

6.13

Alarm Limit Configuration1 ALRM Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as

set the trigger limits for each. 6.14

1 Only present if the optional alarm relay outputs (Option 61) are installed.

Note Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is

not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If

the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will beep,

alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted.

4.5. SETUP  CFG: VIEWING THE ANALYZER’S

CONFIGURATION INFORMATION

Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display

lists the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision,

CPU type and other information. Use this information to identify the software and

hardware when contacting Technical Support. Special instrument or software features

or installed options may also be listed here.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SAMPLE PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE T200 NOX ANALYZER

NEXT PREV EXIT

Press EXIT at

any time to

return to

SETUP menu

Press EXIT

any time to

return to the

AMPLE

Press NEXT of PREV to move back

and forth through the following list

of Configuration information:

 MODEL NAME

 SERIAL NUMBER

 SOFTWARE REVISION

 LIBRARY REVISION

 iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1

 HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION1

 ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE

OPTIONS1

 CPU TYPE

 DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION

SAVED

Only appears if rel evant option of Feature is active.

4.6. SETUP  ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically

run calibration procedures and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are

programmed using the submenus and functions found under the ACAL menu.

A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1

of this manual.

Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 7.7 of this manual

along with all other information related to calibrating the T200H/M analyzer.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7. SETUP  DAS - USING THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM

(DAS)

The T200H/M analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition

system (DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as

well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The data points can cover days, weeks or

months of valuable measurements, depending on how the DAS is configured. The data

are stored in non-volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument is powered

off. Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data

analysis programs (such as spreadsheet-type programs).

Note Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk-

on-module, CPU board or configuration is replaced/reset.

The DAS is designed to be flexible. Users have full control over the type, length and

reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the

instrument’s front panel or its communication ports. Teledyne API also offers

APICOM, a program that provides a visual interface for configuration and data retrieval

of the DAS or using a remote computer. Additionally, the analyzer’s four analog output

channels can be programmed to carry data related to any of the available DAS

parameters.

The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive

diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the

functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and

archival in electronic format.

DAS STATUS

The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer

status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status:

Table 4-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS

LED STATE DAS STATUS

Off

System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode.

Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data

are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.

Blinking

Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS

channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically

disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected.

On Sampling normally.

The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.7.1. DAS STRUCTURE

The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”, an automatically stored single

data point. (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.). Records are organized into data

channels which are defined by properties that characterize the:

 Type of date recorded (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.);

 Trigger event that causes the record to be made (e.g. every minute, upon exiting

calibration mode, etc.);

 How many records to be stored, as well as;

 How the information is to be stored (e.g. average over 1 hour, individual points,

minimum value over last 5 minutes, etc.).

The configuration of each DAS channel is stored in the analyzer’s memory as a script,

which can be edited from the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the

instrument in form of a string of plain-text lines through the communication ports.

4.7.1.1. DAS Channels

The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of

combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels.

Users may create up to 20 data channels. For each channel one triggering event is

selected and one or all of the T200H/M’s 25 data parameters are allowed. The number

of parameters and channels is limited by available memory.

The properties that define the structure of an DAS data channel are:

Table 4-7: DAS Data Channel Properties

PROPERTY DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SETTING RANGE

NAME The name of the data channel. “NONE” Up to 6 letters or digits1.

TRIGGERING

EVENT

The event that triggers the data channel to

measure and store the datum ATIMER Any available event

(see Appendix A-5).

NUMBER AND

LIST OF

PARAMETERS

A User-configurable list of data types to be

recorded in any given channel. 1 - PMTDET Any available parameter

(see Appendix A-5).

REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data

point. 000:01:00

000:00:01 to

366:23:59

(Days:Hours:Minutes)

NUMBER OF

RECORDS

The number of reports that will be stored in the

data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest

data is over-written.

100 1 to 1 million, limited by

available storage space.

RS-232 REPORT Enables the analyzer to automatically report

channel values to the RS-232 ports. OFF OFF or ON

CHANNEL

ENABLED

Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel

to be temporarily turned off without deleting it. ON OFF or ON

CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while

instrument is in calibration mode2. OFF OFF or ON

1 More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel).

2 When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF set in

the VARS menu (see Section 4.12.)

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.1.2. DAS Parameters

Data parameters are types of data that may be measured by the analyzers instrumentality

concentrations of measured gases, temperatures of heated zones,, pressures and flows of

the pneumatic subsystem as well as calibration data such as slope and offset for each

gas. For each Teledyne API analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is

different, fully defined and not customizable (see Appendix A for a list of T200H/M

parameters).

Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppm, cm³/min,

etc., although some parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are

those of the concentration readings according to the SETUP-RANGE settings.

Note The DAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and

DAS data files may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was

changed during data acquisition.

Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are

recorded.

Table 4-8: DAS Data Parameter Functions

FUNCTION EFFECT

PARAMETER Instrument-specific parameter name.

SAMPLE MODE INST: Records instantaneous reading.

AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.

MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.

MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.

SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting

interval.

PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value(0-4).

STORE NUM.

SAMPLES

OFF: stores only the average (default).

ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter.

This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the

number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be

specified only for one of the parameters.

4.7.1.3. DAS Triggering Events

Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given

data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5.

The most common triggering events are:

 ATIMER: Sampling occurs at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer.

Trending information is often stored via such intervals, as either individual datum or

averaged.

 EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the

end of an irregularly occurring event such as calibration or when the slope changes.

These events create individual data points. Zero and slope values can be used to

monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

 WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning

messages appears. This is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a

particular warning occurred.

4.7.2. DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS

The T200H/M is configured with a basic DAS configuration, which is enabled by

default. New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned

off for later or occasional use. Note that DAS operation is suspended while its

configuration is edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is

recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes.

A set of default data channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging

nitrogen oxides concentrations, calibration and predictive diagnostic data. They are:

 CONC: Samples NOX, NO and NO2 concentration at one minute intervals and

stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp along with the number of

(1-minute) samples within each average(for statistical evaluation). Readings during

calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data. By default, the last

800 hourly averages are stored.

 CALDAT: Every time a zero or span calibration is performed CALDAT logs

concentration, slope and offset values for NOX and NO with a time and date stamp.

The NOX stability (to evaluate calibration stability) as well as the converter

efficiency (for reference) are also stored. This data channel will store data from the

last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration. The slope

and offset data can be used to detect trends in (instrument response.

 CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or

span check (not calibration) is finished. This allows the user to track the quality of

zero and span responses over time and assist in evaluating the quality of zero and

span gases and the analyzer’s noise specifications. The last 200 data points are

retained.

 DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as

some other diagnostic parameters (HVPS, AZERO). These data are useful for

predictive diagnostics and maintenance of the T200H/M. The last 1100 daily

averages are stored to cover more than four years of analyzer performance.

 HIRES: Records one minute, instantaneous data of all active parameters in the

T200H/M. Short-term trends as well as signal noise levels can be detected and

documented. Readings during calibration and the calibration hold off period are

included in the averages. The last 1500 data points are stored, which covers a little

more than one day of continuous data acquisition. This data channel is disabled by

default but may be turned on when needed such as for trouble-shooting problems

with the analyzer.

The default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the

front panel or through APICOM to fit a specific application. The Teledyne API website

contains this default and other sample DAS scripts for free download. We recommend

that the user backs up any DAS configuration and its data before altering it.

Note Teledyne-API recommends downloading and storing existing data and the

DAS configurations regularly for permanent documentation and future

data analysis. Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its

COM ports will replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored

data.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

Table 4-9: T200H/M Default DAS Configuration

PARAMETERS

CHANNELS with PROPERTIES NAME MODE EVENT PRECISION

NUM

SAMPLES

NOXCNC1 AVG - - 4 ON

NOCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF

N2CNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF

Name: CONC

Event: ATIMER

Sample Period: 000:00:01

Report Period: 000:01:00

Number of Records: 800

RS-232 report: OFF

Channel enabled: ON

DAS HOLDOFF: ON STABIL AVG - - 4 OM

NXZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NOXSLP1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NOXOFFS1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NOZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NOSLP1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NOOFFS1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

N2ZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

CNVEF1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

Name: CALDAT

Event: SLPCHG

Number of Records: 200

RS-232 report: OFF

Channel enabled: ON

DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

STABIL - - SLPCHG 4 OFF

NXZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF

NOZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF

N2ZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF

Name: CALCHECK

Event: EXITMP

Number of Records: 200

RS-232 report: OFF

Channel enabled: ON

DAS HOLDOFF: OFF STABIL - - EXITMP 4 OFF

SMPFLW AVG - - 2 OFF

O3FLOW AVG - - 2 OFF

RCPRESS AVG - - 2 OFF

SMPPRES AVG - - 2 OFF

RCTEMP AVG - - 2 OFF

PMTTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

CNVTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

BOXTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

HVPS AVG - - 2 OFF

Name: CALCHECK

Event: EXITMP

Number of Records: 200

RS-232 report: OFF

Channel enabled: ON

DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

AZERO AVG - - 2 OFF

NOXCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF

NOCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF

N2CNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF

STABIL AVG - - 4 OFF

SMPFLW AVG - - 2 OFF

O3FLOW AVG - - 2 OFF

RCPRESS AVG - - 2 OFF

SMPPRES AVG - - 2 OFF

RCTEMP AVG - - 2 OFF

PMTTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

CNVTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

BOXTMP AVG - - 2 OFF

HVPS AVG - - 1 OFF

AZERO AVG - - 2 OFF

REFGND AVG 1 OFF

Name: HIRES

Event: ATIMER

Sample Period: 000:00:01

Report Period: 000:00:01

Number of Records: 1500

RS-232 report: OFF

Channel enabled: OFF

DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

REF4096 AVG 1 OFF

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.7.2.1. Viewing DAS Data and Settings

DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke

sequence.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X CONC : DATA AVAILABLE

NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X CALDAT: DATA

VAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X CALCHE: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X 285: 00:00 SMPFLW= X.XXX cc/

PV10 PREV <PRM PRM> EXIT

SE TUP X.X 287: 10:00 NXCNC1: XXX.X PPM

PV 10 PREV NEXT NX10 <P RM PRM > EXIT

SE TUP X.X 281:15:10 NXZCS1: X.XXX PPM

PV 10 PREV NEXT NX10 <P RM PRM > EXIT

SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW

EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

FRONT PANEL CONTROL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

BUTTON FUNCTION

<PRM Moves to the next Parameter

PRM> Moves to the previous

Parameter

NX10 Moves the view forwar d 10

data points/channels

NEXT Moves to the next data

point/channel

PREV Moves to the previous data

point/channel

PV10 Moves the view back 10 data

points/channels

Buttons only appear if applicable

EXIT will return to the

main SAMPLE Display.

SETUP X.X DIAG: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X 00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m

PV10 PREV <PRM PRM> EXIT

SETUP X.X HIRE

: NO DATA AVAILABLE

PREV EXIT

Default

setting for

HIRES is

DISABLED.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.2.2. Editing DAS Data Channels

DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control

program. The following sequence of touchscreen button presses shows how to edit

using the front panel.

Edit Data Channel Menu

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW

EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

EXIT will return to the

previous SAMPLE

display.

SETUP X.

ENTER DAS PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Moves the

display up &

down the list of

Data Channels

Inserts a new Data

Channel into the list

BEFORE the Channel

currently being displayed Deletes The Data

Channel currently

being displayed

Exports the

configuration of all

data channels to

RS-232 interface.

Exits to the Main

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRNT EXIT

Moves the display

between the

PROPERTIES for this

data channel.

Reports the configuration of current

data channels to the RS-232 ports.

EXITS returns to

the previous

Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence.

When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the

configuration parameters. For example, the display line:

0) CONC : ATIMER, 4, 800

Translates to the following configuration:

Channel No.: 0

NAME: CONC

TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER

PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel

EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press:

FROM THE PREVIOUS BUTTON SEQUENCE …

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

C O N C - - ENTR EXIT

ENT

accepts the new

string and returns to the

previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new

string and returns to the

revious menu.

Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character

set:

0-9,

-Z, s

ace ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & *

(

)

= +

[

]

{

}

< >

; : , . / ?

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

4.7.2.3. Trigger Events

To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press:

ENTR accepts the new string

and returns to the previous

menu.

EXIT ignores the new string

and returns to the previous

menu.

SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER

<PREV NEXT> ENTR EXIT

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

EXITS to the Main

Data Acquisition

Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the

list of available trigger events.

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

See Appendix A for list of DAS trigger events available on the T200H/M.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.2.4. Editing DAS Parameters

Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other

data channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or

editing parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the DAS can

store only data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for any given channel.

In addition, an DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of

channels. Hence, remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and

stored data.

To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2

then press:

Edit Data Parameter Menu

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

Exits to the main

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: 8

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=DETREP, MODE=INST

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)

YES NO

NO returns to

the previous

menu and

retains all data.

Moves the

display between

availabl e

ete

Inserts a new Parameter

before the currently

displayed Parameter

Deletes the Parameter

currently displayed.

Use to configure

the functions for

this Parameter.

Exits to the main

Data Acquisition

YES will delete

all data in that

entire channel.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, press:

FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU

(see previous section)

SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=NXCNC1, MODE=AV

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: NOCNC1

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PARAMETER: NXCNC1

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Cycle thr ough list of available

Param eter s.

ENTR accepts the

new setti ng and

returns to the previous

menu.

EXIT ignor es the new

setting and returns to

the pr evious menu.

SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST

INST AVG MIN MAX EXIT

Press the key for the desired mode

SETUP X.X PRECISION:4

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PR ECISION:

1 EXIT

Set for 0-4

SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF

<SET EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

Turn ON o r OFF

<SET Returns to

Functions

See Appendix A-5 for list of DAS parameters available on the T200H/M.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period

The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and

permanently recorded:

 SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample

reading of the parameter in volatile memory. The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one

minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front

panel menu, but is available via the instruments communication ports by using

APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.

SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the DAS parameter’s sample mode is set for

AVG, MIN or MAX.

 REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory

are processed, (e.g. average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results

stored permanently in the instrument’s Disk-on-Module as well as transmitted via

the analyzer’s communication ports. The REPORT PERIOD may be set from the

front panel.

If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous

reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD

In AVG, MIN or MAX sample modes, the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the

REPORT PERIOD determine the number of data points used each time the average,

minimum or maximum is calculated, stored and reported to the com ports. The actual

sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen REPORT PERIOD.

Also, the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to

the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.

 If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the

beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.

 If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur

at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.

EXAMPLE: Given the above settings, if DAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample

would occur at 7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data

points for 7:58. 7:59 and 8:00.

During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00) the instrument will take a sample reading every

minute and include 60 sample readings.

When the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will also store

how many sample readings were used for the AVG, MIN or MAX calculation but not

the readings themselves.

4.7.2.6. Report Periods in Progress when Instrument Is Powered Off

If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples

accumulated so far during that period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on,

the DAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them in volatile memory as part of the

REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this REPORT

PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will

be included in any AVG, MIN or MAX calculation. Also, the STORE NUM.

SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument

was restarted.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in Section 4.7.2.2 then

press:

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 8500

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

Exits to the mai n

Data Acquisition

menu.

SETUP X.X NAME: CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EX IT

Press SET> until you reach REPORT PERIOD (OR SAMPLE PERIOD) …

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:

0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

ENT

accepts the new stri ng and

returns to the previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new string and

returns to the previous menu.

Press buttons to set hours

between reports in the format :

HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a

24 hour clock . PM hours are 13

thru 23, midnight is 00:00.

Example 2:15 PM = 14:15

Set the number of days

between reports (0-366).

IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)

the ENTR button will disappear from the display.

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01

0 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT

Use the PREV and NEXT

buttons to scroll to the

data channel to be edited.

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

SETUP X.X ENTER DAS PASS: 818

9 2 9 ENTR EXIT

Changing the SAMPLE

PERIOD or REPORT

PERIOD Requires a

special password

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.2.7. Number of Records

The DAS is capable of capturing several months worth of data, depending on the

configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter, number of samples setting etc.

will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In general, however, the

maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max:

50 per channel).

The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from

specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space

can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR key will disappear when trying to

specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also make

an upload of an DAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the

combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either

try from the front panel what the maximum number of records can be or use trial-and-

error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or

APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel,

follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2 then press.

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 80

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

Exits to the main

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:000

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:

0 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the

previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new setting

and returns to the previous

menu.

Toggle buttons to set

number of records

(1-99999)

SETUP X.X EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA)

YES NO

NO returns to the

previous menu.

YES will delete all data

in this channel.

Press SET> key until…

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.7.2.8. RS-232 Report Function

The T200H/M DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where

they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.

To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2

then press:

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

Exits to the mai n

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the

previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new setting

and returns to the previous

menu.

SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

Toggle button to turn

reporting ON or OFF

Press SET> key until…

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

4.7.2.9. Compact Report

When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead

of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are

reported in one line, instead. For example, channel DIAG would report its record in two

lines (10 parameters) instead of 10 lines. Individual lines carry the same time stamp and

are labeled in sequence.

4.7.2.10. Starting Date

This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants

to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the

past, the DAS ignores this setting.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.2.11. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels

Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the

disk-on-chip. The HIRES channel of the T200H/M, for example, is disabled by default.

To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2 then press:

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

Exits to the mai n

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the

previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new setting

and returns to the previous

menu.

SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON

OFF ENTR EXIT

To ggl e butto n to tu rn

channel ON or OFF

Press SET> key until…

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.7.2.12. HOLDOFF Feature

The DAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and

during the DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 4.12).

To enable or disable the HOLDOFF for any one DAS channel, follow the instruction

shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Exits to the mai n

Data Acquisition

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON

SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the

previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new setting

and returns to the previous

menu.

SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON

ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle button to turn

HOLDOFF ON or OFF

Press SET> key until…

From the DATA ACQUISITION menu

(see Section 6.7.2.2 )

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.7.3. REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION

Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in 6.7 is much more

conveniently done in one step through the APICOM remote control program using the

graphical interface shown in Figure 4-4. Refer to Section 4.15 for details on remote

access to the T200H/M analyzer.

Figure 4-4: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the DAS

Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting

DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on

a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the

APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual is

included in the APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at

http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

Note Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and

parameters of one channel through the front-panel touch screen can be

done without affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS configuration

script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data,

parameters and channels by replacing them with the new DAS

configuration. It is advised to download and backup all data and the

original DAS configuration before attempting any DAS changes.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.8. SETUP  RNGE: RANGE UNITS AND DILUTION

CONFIGURATION

This Menu is used to set the units of measure to be associated with the analyzer’s

reporting ranges (see Section 4.13.4.2. for more information on reporting ranges vs.

physical ranges) and for instruments with the sample gas dilution option operating, to set

the dilution ratio.

4.8.1. RANGE UNITS

The T200H/M can display concentrations in parts per million (106 mols per mol, PPM)

or milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3, MGM). Changing units affects all of the

display, COM port and DAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer’s

range mode. To change the concentration units:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1= 100.0 PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X. RANGE CONTROL MENU

UNIT DIL EXIT

SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: PPM

PPM MGM ENTER EXIT

Select the preferred

concentration unit.

SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: MGM

PPM MGM ENTER EXIT

EXIT returns

to the main

menu.

ENTR accepts

the new unit,

EXIT returns

to the SETUP

menu.

Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the T200H/M:

NO: ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3

NO2: ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3

Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0° C and 760 Torr as standard

temperature and pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by

your agency. EPA protocol applications, for example, use 25° C as the reference

temperature. Changing the units may cause a bias in the measurements if standard

temperature and pressure other than 0C and 760 Torr are used. This problem can be

avoided by recalibrating the analyzer after any change from a volumetric to a mass unit

or vice versa.

Note In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be

recalibrated after every change in reporting units.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

4.8.2. DILUTION RATIO

The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution

of the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet.

1. The SPAN value entered during calibration is the maximum expected concentration

of the undiluted calibration gas

2. The span gas should be either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as

the sample gas or be supplied at an appropriately lower actual concentration.

For example, with a dilution set to 100, a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100

ppm sample gas if the span gas is not routed through the dilution system.

On the other hand, if a 100 ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the

same dilution steps as the sample gas.

3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1

part of sample gas):

The analyzer will multiply the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor

and displays the result.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP C.3 PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU

UNIT DIL EXIT

DIL only appears

i f the diluti on rati o

option has been

activateded

SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN

0 0 0 1 .0 ENTR EXIT

T oggle each as needed

to set the dilution

factor.

This is the number by

which the analyzer will

multiply the NO, NO2

and NOx concentrations

of the gas passing

through the reaction

cel

SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN

0 0 2 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the

new setting.

ENTR accepts the

new setting.

The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and

displays the result.

Calibrate the analyzer. Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs

to be recalibrated using one of the methods discussed in Section 5.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

4.9. SETUP  PASS: PASSWORD FEATURE

The T200H/M provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to

prevent unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS

menu item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password-

protected functio n (e.g., SETUP) is selected. This allows normal operation of the

instrument, but requires the password (101) to access to the menus under SETUP. When

PASSWORD is disabled (SETUP>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup

(SETUP) and Secondary Setup (SETUP>MORE) menus. Whether PASSWORD is

enabled or disabled, a password (default 818) is required to enter the VARS or DIAG

menus in the SETUP>MORE menu.

There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator,

maintenance, and configuration functions. Each level allows access to all of the

functions in the previous level.

Table 4-10: Password Levels

Password Level Menu Access Allowed

Null (000) Operation

ll functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR

101 Configuration/Maintenance

ccess to Primary Setup and Secondary SETUP Menus when

PASSWORD is enabled.

818 Configuration/Maintenance

ccess to Seconda

y SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether

PASSWORD is enabled or disabled.

To enable or disable passwords, press the following menu button sequence:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

Toggle this

button to

enable, disable

password

feature

SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

100

Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following menu button sequence would be

required to enter the SETUP menu:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0

0 0 0

ENTR EXIT

prompts for

password

number

Example: this

password enables the

SETUP mode

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0

8 1 8

ENT

EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

Press individual

buttons to set

numbers

Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and

DIAG menus, even if passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818)

upon entering these menus. The user only has to press ENTR to access the password-

protected menus but does not have to enter the required number code.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

101

4.10. SETUP  CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY

CLOCK

The T200H/M has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST function, and time

stamps on COM port messages and DAS data entries.

To set the time-of-day, press:

SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

EXIT returns

to the main

SAMPLE display

Enter Current

Date-of-Year

SETUP X.

DATE: 01-JAN-02

0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.

DATE: 01-JAN-02

0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE EXIT

Enter Current

Time-of-Day

SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00

1 2 : 0 0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00

1 2 : 0 0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CL

MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

102

In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow, there is a variable to

speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day.

To change this variable, press:

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

3x EXIT returns

to the main SAMPLE dis

Enter sign and number of seconds per

day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).

SETUPX.X 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETU P X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Da

PREV JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETU P X.X CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Da

+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT

SETU P X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Da y

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

Continue to press NEXT until …

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

103

4.11. SETUP  MORE  COMM: SETTING UP THE ANALYSER’S

COMMUNICATION PORTS

The T200H/M is equipped with an Ethernet port, a USB port and two serial

communication (COMM) ports located on the rear panel (see Figure 3-2). Both com

ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue

commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system

or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the RS-232 protocol.

The RS232 port (used as COM1) can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232

multidrop mode (option 62; See Section 5.9.2 and 4.11.8).

The COM2 port, can be configured for standard RS-232 operation or for half-duplex

RS-485 communication (RS485 configuration disables the USB communication port).

A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically

between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers,

analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne

API sales for more information on CAS systems.

4.11.1. DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION

RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment

(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the

DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference

between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.

 DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.

 DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.

To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers

(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows

the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one of these two modes. This switch

exchanges the receive and transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross-over or null-

modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.

4.11.2. COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS

As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with

Pin 3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for

sending data.

 RS232: (used as COM 1) RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.

o Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud).

o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.

o Parity: None.

 COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector.

o Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).

o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.

o Parity: None.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

104

4.11.3. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING

Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on

instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for

communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection.

4.11.3.1. COM Port Communication Modes

Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different

modes, which are listed in the following table. Each COM port needs to be configured

independently.

Table 4-11: COM Port Communication modes

MODE1 ID DESCRIPTION

QUIET

Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (DAS reports, and warning

messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating

with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a

command must be issued to receive them.

COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is

communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.

SECURITY 4 When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only

command that is active is the help screen (? CR).

HESSEN

PROTOCOL 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne

API part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.

E, 7, 1

2048

When turned on this mode switches the com port settings

from

No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit

Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit

RS-485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence

over multidrop mode if both are enabled. When the COM2 port is configured for RS-485

communication, the rear panel USB port is disabled.

MULTIDROP

PROTOCOL 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications

channel. Multidrop is an option requiring a special PCA and the use of instrument IDs.

ENABLE

MODEM 64 Enables sending a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the

RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.

ERROR

CHECKING2 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.

XON/XOFF

HANDSHAKE2 256 Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.

HARDWARE

HANDSHAKE 8 Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data

transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation

protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.

HARDWARE

FIFO2 512 Improves data transfer rate when on of the com ports.

COMMAND

PROMPT 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.

1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the

SETUP  MORE  com  COM[1 OR 2]  MODE menu

2 The default sting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API Technical Support

personnel.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

105

Press the following buttons to select a communication mode for a one of the com ports,

such as the following example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled:

Continue pr essing next until …

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON

PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF

PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

Continue pressi ng NEXT and/or PREV to select any other modes

you which to enable or disable

Use PREV and NEX

move between availabl e

modes.

A mode is enabled by

toggling the ON/OFF

button.

Se lect which COM

port to configure

EXIT returns

to the

ENTR accepts the new

settings

EXIT ignores the new

settings

The sum of the mode

IDs of the selected

modes is displayed

here

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

106

4.11.3.2. COM Port Baud Rate

To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press:

EXAMPLE

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:115200

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:9600

NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:115200

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Select which COM port

to configure.

EXIT returns

to the

Use PREV and NEXT

keys to move

between available

baud rates.

300

1200

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

Press SET> until you

reach

COM1 BAUD RATE

ENTR

accepts

the new

setting

EXIT

ignores the

new

setting

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

107

4.11.3.3. COM Port Testing

The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the com menu. This

test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is

running, the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker.

To initiate the test press the following key sequence.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CL K MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

Select which

COM port to

test.

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SE TUP X.X COM1 : TEST PORT

<SET TEST EXIT

SE TUP X.X TRANSMITTING TO COM1

<SET TEST EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

EXIT returns to

COMM menu

Test runs

automatically

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

108

4.11.4. ANALYZER ID

Each type of Teledyne API analyzer is configured with a default ID code. The default

ID code for all T200H/M analyzers is either 0 or 200. The ID number is only important

if more than one analyzer is connected to the same communications channel such as

when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN (see Section 4.11.7); in a RS-232

multidrop chain (see Section 4.11.9) or operating over a RS-485 network (see Section

4.11.6). If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel, the ID codes

of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed so that they are unique to the

instruments. To edit the instrument’s ID code, press:

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNG

PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X. MACHINE ID: 200 ID

0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons

to cycle through the

available character set:

0-9

ENTR button accepts the

new settings

EXIT key ignores the new

settings

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any

number of ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

109

4.11.5. RS-232 COM PORT CABLE CONNECTIONS

In its default configuration, the T200H/M analyzer has two available RS-232 com ports

accessible via 2 DB-9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument. The COM1

connector, labeled RS232, is a male DB-9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9

connector.

Figure 4-5: Default Pin Assignments for Rear Panel com Port Connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE)

The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring

harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 (COM1) and J12 (COM2).

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

110

Figure 4-6: CPU COM1 & COM2 Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode

Teledyne API offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.

 Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows

connection of COM1 with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available

as Option 60 (see Section 5.9.1).

 Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to

the most common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated

switches.

Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional

adapters.

Note Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may

incorporate internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables

acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin assignments

before using.

To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there

are activity indicators LEDs labeled RX and TX) just above the rear panel RS-232 port.

Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red

and green LEDs should be on. If the RX TX LEDs for RS232 are not lit, change

position of rear panel DCE DTE mode switch (see 4.11.1). If both LEDs are still not

illuminated, check the cable for proper wiring.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

111

4.11.6. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2

Opting to use RS-485 communications for the COM2 port will disable the USB port. To

configure your instrument for RS-485 communications, please consult the factory.

4.11.7. ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard

10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers.

The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote

computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal

emulators or other programs.

The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet’s

current operating status.

Table 4-12 Ethernet Status Indicators

LED FUNCTION

amber (link) On when connection to the LAN is valid.

green (activity Flickers during any activity on the LAN.

The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be

connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically

be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section Configuring Ethernet

Communication Using DHCP). This configuration is useful for quickly getting an

instrument up and running on a network. However, for permanent Ethernet connections,

a static IP address should be used. Section 4.11.7.2 below details how to configure the

instrument with a static IP address.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

112

4.11.7.1. Configuring Ethernet Communication Using DHCP

1. Consult with your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running

DHCP.

2. Access the Ethernet Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM>INET).

3. After pressing ENTR at the password menu, press SET> to view the DHCP

settings:

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X INST IP: 0.0.0.0

<SET SET> EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 0.0.0.0

<SET SET> EXIT

SETUP X.X TCP PORT2: 502

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

THE EDIT button is disabled. Each string of octets

should be assigned numbers by the DHCP; if all 0’s,

DHCP failed. Consult your network administrator.

From this point on,

EXIT returns to

COMMUNICATIONS

Do not alter unless

directed to by Teledyne

Instruments Customer

Service personnel

SETUP X.X HOSTNAME:

<SET EDIT EXIT

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0

<SET SET> EXIT

SETUP X.X TCP PORT: 3000

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X DHCP: ON

SET> EDIT EXIT

DHCP: ON is

default setting.

If it has been

set to OFF,

press EDIT

and set to ON.

SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X DHCP: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

113

Table 4-13: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties

PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION

DHCP STATUS On Editable

This displays whether the DHCP is

turned ON or OFF.

INSTRUMENT

IP ADDRESS

Configured by

DHCP

EDIT key

disabled when

DHCP is ON

This string of four packets of 1 to 3

numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.) is

the address of the analyzer itself.

GATEWAY IP

ADDRESS

Configured by

DHCP

EDIT key

disabled when

DHCP is ON

A string of numbers very similar to the

Instrument IP address (e.g.

192.168.76.1.)that is the address of

the computer used by your LAN to

access the Internet.

SUBNET MASK Configured by

DHCP

EDIT key

disabled when

DHCP is ON

Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3

numbers each (e.g. 255.255.252.0)

that defines that identifies the LAN the

device is connected to.

All addressable devices and

computers on a LAN must have the

same subnet mask. Any transmissions

sent devices with different assumed to

be outside of the LAN and are routed

through gateway computer onto the

Internet.

TCP PORT1 3000 Editable

This number defines the terminal

control port by which the instrument is

addressed by terminal emulation

software, such as Internet or Teledyne

API’ APICOM.

HOST NAME [initially blank] Editable

The name by which your analyzer will

appear when addressed from other

computers on the LAN or via the

Internet. While the default setting for

all Teledyne API analyzers is the

model number, the host name may be

changed to fit customer needs.

1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API Technical

Support personnel.

Note It is recommended that you check these settings the first time you power

up your analyzer after it has been physically connected to the

LAN/Internet to confirm that the DHCP server has successfully

downloaded the appropriate information from you network. If the gateway

IP, instrument IP and subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”), the

DHCP was not successful. It may be necessary to manually configure the

analyzer’s Ethernet properties. Consult your network administrator.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

114

4.11.7.2. Configuring Ethernet Communication Manually (Static IP Address)

1. Connect a cable from the analyzer’s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network (LAN) or

Internet port.

2. From the analyzer’s front panel touch screen, access the Ethernet Menu:

(SETUP>MORE>COMM>INET).

3. Follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 4-7, and edit the Instrument and

Gateway IP addresses and the Subnet Mask to the desired settings.

4. From the computer, enter the same information through an application such as

HyperTerminal.

5. Table 4-13 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

115

Internet Configuration Button Functions

BUTTON FUNCTION

[0] Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of

numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)

<CH CH> Moves the cursor one character left or right.

DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.

ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous

menu.

EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous

menu.

Some buttons appear only when relevant.

SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000

<CH CH> DEL [0] ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0

<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000

<SET EDIT EXIT

The PORT number must remain at 3000.

Do not change this setting unless instructed to by

Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000

<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT

Cursor

location is

indicated by

brackets

SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%

…

INITIALIZING INET 100%

SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED

SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 EXIT

Pressing EXIT from

any of the above

display menus

causes the Ethernet

option to reinitialize

its internal interface

firmware

Contact your IT

Network Administrator

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 EXIT

DHCP: ON is

default setting.

Skip this step

if it has been

set to OFF.

SETUP X.X DHCP: ON

SET> EDIT EXIT

ENTR

accepts

the new

assigned

numbers;

EXIT

nores

Figure 4-7: COM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

116

4.11.7.3. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME

The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The

default name for all Teledyne API Model T200H/M analyzers is initially blank. To

create or later change this name (particularly if you have more than one analyzer on

your network), press.

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 EXIT

SAMPLE EN TER SETUP PASS : 8 18

8 1 8 EN TR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X DHCP: ON

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X

HOSTNAME:

<SET EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: T200

<CH CH> INS DEL [?] ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X

HOSTNAME: T200X STATION 1

<SET EDIT EXIT

Co ntinue pressin g SET> UNTIL …

SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%

…

INITIALIZING INET 100%

SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED

SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 EXIT

Contact your IT Network

Administrator

Press to edit HOSTNAME

Table 4-14: Internet Configuration Menu Button Functions

BUTTON FUNCTION

<CH Moves the cursor one character to the left.

CH> Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion.

0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

117

4.11.8. USB PORT SETUP

The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI

USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports.

1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the

Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyne-

api.com/software).

2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe”

3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your

analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a

USB printer cable.

4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to

the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device

Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software,

such as APIcom or Hyperterminal.

Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom

Manual, PN 07463.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

118

5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings:

Baud Rate: 115200

COM2 Mode Settings:

Quiet Mode ON

Computer Mode ON

MODBUS RTU OFF

MODBUS ASCII OFF

E,8,1 MODE OFF

E,7,1 MODE OFF

RS-485 MODE OFF

SECURITY MODE OFF

MULTIDROP MODE OFF

ENABLE MODEM OFF

ERROR CHECKING ON

XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF

HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF

HARDWARE FIFO ON

COMMAND PROMPT OFF

6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port

determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how

these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in

APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463)

for more details.

Note USB configuration requires that instrument and PC baud rates match; check the

PC baud rate and change if needed. Using the USB port disallows use of the rear

panel COM2 port except for multidrop communication.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

119

4.11.9. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP

When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and

configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions

for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with

instructions for menu-driven configuration.

Note that because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2 DB9

connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments, COM2 port

is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation.

CAUTION – Risk of Instrument Damage and Warranty Invalidation

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by

the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working

with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static

Discharge section in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage.

In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the

serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 4-8.

This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the

multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening

each instrument and making the following adjustments:

1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open

for access to the multidrop PCA, which is seated on the CPU.

2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins

21  22 as indicated in Figure 4-8. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the

chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21  22).

3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer

to Figure 4-8).

 J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector

(Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)

 J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard

 J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

120

Figure 4-8: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode

Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain,

remove the shunt between Pins 21  22 of the Multidrop PCA in the instrument that

was previously the last instrument in the chain.

4. Close the instrument.

5. Referring to Figure 4-9, use straight-through DB9 male-DB9 female cables to

interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the

first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second

analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this

fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232

standard.

6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green

and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit.

(Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables that are internally wired specifically

for RS232 communication).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

121

Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer

Female DB9

Male DB9

RS-232

COM2

RS-232

COM2

RS-232

COM2

RS-232

COM2

Host

RS-232 port

Ensure jumper is

installed between

JP2 pins 21



22 in

last instrument of

multidrop chain.

Figure 4-9: RS-232-Multidrop Host-to-Analyzer Interconnect Diagram

7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that

the Machine ID (Section 4.11.1) is unique for each. On the front panel menu, use

SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is typically the model number or “0”; to

change the 4-digit identification number, press the button below the digit to be

changed; once changed, press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that

instrument.

8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for

multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set

only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not

change any other settings.

9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE

now shows 35.

10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the

same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same

baud rate).

NOTES:

 The (communication) Host instrument can address only one instrument at a time,

each by its unique ID (see Step 7 above).

 Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the first

analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

122

4.11.10. MODBUS SETUP

The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS

communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional

instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to

www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols.

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

 Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed.

 MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see

www.modbustools.com)

 Personal computer

 Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232)

 Possibly a null modem adapter or cable

ACTIONS

Set Com Mode parameters

Comm

Slave ID

Ethernet: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – INET; scroll through the INET

submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is 502), then continue to TCP

PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting

to ON, then press ENTR. (Change Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”).

USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – COM2 – EDIT; scroll

through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU: OFF

(press OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and

ensure it is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings. (If RTU is not available with

your communications equipment, set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and

ensure that COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings).

If your analyzer is connected to a network with at least one other analyzer of the same model, a unique

Slave ID must be assigned to each. Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – ID.

The MACHINE ID default is the same as the model number. Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID.

Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect, power down the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power up the analyzer.

Make appropriate cable

connections

Connect your analyzer either:

 via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC; if so, also

install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the computer if required), or

 via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable).

Specify MODBUS software

settings

(examples used here are for

MODBUS Poll software)

1. Click Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /.

a. In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what you wish

to read from the analyzer).

b. Input Quantity (based on your firmware’s register map).

c. In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float Inverse).

d. Click OK.

2. Next, click Connection/Connect.

a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on your

computer.

b. Press OK.

Read the Modbus Poll Register Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example that follows

If desired, assign an alias for each.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

123

Example Read/Write Definition window:

Example Connection Setup window:

Example MODBUS Poll window:

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

124

4.12. SETUP  MORE  VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS)

The T200H/M has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain

operational parameters. Usually, these variables are automatically set by the

instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using the VARS menu. Table

4-15 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See

Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the T200H/M variables that are accessible

through the remote interface.

Table 4-15: Variable Names (VARS)

NO. VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED VALUES

0 DAS_HOLD_OFF

Duration of no data storage in the DAS. This is the time when

the analyzer returns from one of its calibration modes to the

SAMPLE mode. The DAS_HOLD_OFF can be disabled in each

DAS channel.

Can be between 0.5

and 20 minutes

Default=15 min.

1 MEASURE_MODE

Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument is to

operate. NOx only, NO only or dual gas measurement of NOx

and NO simultaneously. Dual gas mode requires that a special

switching optional be installed.

NO; NOx;

NOx–NO

2 STABIL_GAS Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL

test function is selected.

NO; NOx;

NO2; O21

3 TPC_ENABLE Enables or disables the temperature and pressure

compensation (TPC) feature (Section 8.8.3).

ON/OFF

Default=ON

4 DYN_ZERO

Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the NO

and NOX response when performing a zero point calibration

during an AutoCal (Section 7.7).

ON/OFF

Default=OFF

5 DYN_SPAN

Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of

the NO and NOx response when performing a zero point

calibration during an AutoCal (Section 7.7).

Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not

allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.

ON/OFF

Default=OFF

6 CONC_PRECISION Allows to set the number of decimal points of the concentration

and stability parameters displayed on the front panel.

AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4

Default=AUTO

7 CLOCK_ADJ Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + sign if

the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is too fast.

-60 to +60 s/day

Default=0

8 SERVICE_CLEAR

Resets the service interval timer . (Changing the setting to ON

resets the timer and then returns the setting back to default

OFF).

ON/OFF

Default=OFF

9 TIME_SINCE_SVC Tracks the time since last service (restarts the time when the

service interval timer, SERVICE_CLEAR, is reset).

0-500000

Default=0

10 SVC_INTERVAL Sets the interval between service reminders. 0-100000

Default=0

1 Only available in analyzers with O2 sensor options installed.

Note There is a 2-second latency period between the time a VARS value is

changed and the time the new value is stored into the analyzer’s memory.

DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be

lost.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

125

To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following touchscreen button sequence:

SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 3

AUTO 0 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 1

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

Toggle these keys to change setting

SETUP X.X 2 ) STABIL GAS =NOX

NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.

2 ) STABIL_GAS=NOX

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

Choose Gas

SETUP X.

1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO

NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TS T TS T > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.

ENTER VARS PASS: 81

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minut es

1 5 .0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ

0 Sec/Day

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

EXIT ignor es the new setting.

ENTR acce

ts the new settin

SETUP X.X 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.

4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting

SETUP X.X 5) DYN_SP

N=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.

5 ) DYN_SPAN=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting

Toggle to change setti ng

See Section 6.12.1. for

information on setting the

MEASRUE MODE

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

126

4.12.1. SETTING THE GAS MEASUREMENT MODE

In its standard operating mode the T200H/M measures NO, NO2 and NOx. It can also

be set to measure only NO or only NOX. To select one of these three measurement

modes, press:

SETUP X.X 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX- NO

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

EXIT i gnores the new

setting.

ENTR accepts the

new setting.

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 81

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NO

-NO

PREV ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NOX

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NO

NEXT ENTR EXIT

-NO mode is the

default mode for the

200EH/M

Press the PREV

and NEXT buttons

to move back and

forth between gas

modes

SETU P X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETU P X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15 minutes

NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

127

4.13. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS MENU

A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP-MORE-DIAG menu.

These parameters are dependent on firmware revision. These tools can be used in a

variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places

of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections.

An overview of the entire DIAG menu can be found in menu tree A-6 of Appendix A.1.

Table 4-16: T200H/M Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions

DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING

FRONT PANEL

MODE

INDICATOR

SECTION

SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the

instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be

toggled ON and OFF.

DIAG I/O 4.13.2

ANALOG OUTPUT: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output

step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog

output accuracy.

DIAG AOUT 4.13.3

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: This submenu allows the user to configure

the analyzer’s four analog output channels, including choosing what parameter

will be output on each channel. Instructions that appear here allow adjustment

and calibration the voltage signals associated with each output as well as

calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard.

DIAG AIO

6.13.4,

through

6.13.6

DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION: Allows the user to program which

concentration values are displayed in the . DIAG DISP 6.13.7.1

OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test, which turns

on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT (Fig. 10-15). This

diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to supply span gas.

DIAG OPTIC 6.13.7.2

ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an electric test,

which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to verify the

signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board.

DIAG ELEC 6.13.7.3

OZONE GEN OVERRIDE: Allows the user to manually turn the O3 generator on

or off. This setting is retained when exiting DIAG. During initial power up TMR

(timer) is displayed while the Ozone brick remains off for the first 30 minutes.

DIAG OZONE 6.13.7.4

FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output

signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings are retained when

exiting DIAG.

DIAG FCAL 6.13.7.5

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

128

4.13.1. ACCESSING THE DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES

To access the DIAG functions press the following keys:

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PAS S C LK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIA

EXIT

From this point

forward, EXIT returns

to the

SECOND ARY

SETUP MENU

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIA

ANALOG OUTPUT

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG

NALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

EXIT returns

to the mai n

SAMPLE

display

DIAG OPTIC TEST

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

At this point EXIT

returns

to the PRIMARY

SETUP MENU

4.13.2. SIGNAL I/O

The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog

input/output functions of the analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the

parameters available for review under this menu.

Note Changes to signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O

menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow

sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

129

To enter the signal I/O test mode, press:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

EXAMPLE

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG I / O Test Signals Displayed Here

PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT

Press JUMP to go

directly to a specific

si gnal

See Appendix A-4 for

a complete list of

available SIGNALS

DIAG I / O JUMP TO: 5

0 5 ENTR EXIT

Enter 05 to Jump

to Signal 5:

(CAL_LED)

DIAG I / O CAL_LED = ON

PREV N EXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT

Exit to return

to the

DIAG menu

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Use the NEXT & PREV

keys to move between

signal types.

Pressing the PRNT key will send a form atted printout to the serial port and can be

captured with a computer or other output device.

EXIT

returns

to the main

SAMPLE

display

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

130

4.13.3. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST

This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs.

The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to

100% of the full scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful to verify the

operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.

To begin the Analog Output Step Test press:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

Exit-Exit

returns to the

DIAG menu

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

DIAG AN AL OG OUTPUT

PREV N EXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT

0% EXIT

Performs

analog output

step test.

0% - 100%

DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT

[0%] EXIT

Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will

pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around

the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again

will resume the test.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

131

4.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS AND REPORTING RANGES

4.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the T200H/M

The analyzer has four analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear

panel.

ANALOG OUT

+ - + - + - + -

0-20 mA current loop

output available for these

channels only

Figure 4-10: Analog Output Connector Key

The signal levels of each output can be independently configured as follows. An over-

range feature is available that allows each range to be usable from -5% to + 5% of its

nominal scale:

Table 4-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active

RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT

0-0.1 V -5 mV +105 mV

0-1 V -0.05 V +1.05 V

0-5 V -0.25 V +5.25 V

0-10 V -0.5 V +10.5 V

The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.

Pin assignments for the ANALOG output connector at the rear panel of the instrument:

Table 4-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments

PIN ANALOG

OUTPUT

VOLTAGE

SIGNAL

CURRENT

SIGNAL

1 V Out I Out +

2 A1 Ground I Out -

3 V Out I Out +

4 A2 Ground I Out -

5 V Out I Out +

6 A3 Ground I Out -

7 V Out Not Available

8 A4 Ground Not Available

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

132

Additionally A1, A2 andA3 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mA current loop

drivers. A4 is not available for the current loop option.

Table 4-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range

RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT

0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA

These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the

lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. The default offset for all

ranges is 0 mA.

All of these outputs can be configured output signals representing any of the DAS

parameters available on this model (See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5 for a complete list).

The ability to select any one of the T200H/M’s 40+ DAS data types coupled with the

ability to select from a variety of signal ranges and scales makes the analog outputs of

the T200H/M extremely flexible.

Table 4-20: Example of Analog Output Configuration for T200H/M

4.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges

The entire measurement range of the analyzer is quite large, 0 – 5,000 ppm for the

T200H and 0-200 PPM for the T200M, but many applications use only a small part of

the analyzer’s full measurement range. This creates two performance challenges:

1. The width of the analyzer’s physical range can create data resolution problems for

most analog recording devices. For example, in an application where a T200H is

being used to measure an expected concentration of typically less than 200 ppm

NOx, the full scale of expected values is only 4% of the instrument’s full 5000 ppm

measurement range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal would also be

recorded across only 4% of the range of the recording device.

The T200H/M solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting

range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range

relevant to the specific application. Only the reporting range of the analog outputs

is scaled, the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front

panel remain unaltered.

2. Applications where low concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are measured require

greater sensitivity and resolution than typically necessary for measurements of

higher concentrations.

The T200H/M solves this issue by using two hardware physical ranges that cover

the instruments entire measurement range The analyzer’s software automatically

OUTPUT

DAS

PARAMETER

ASSIGNED

SIGNAL

SCALE

A1 NXCNC1 0-5 V

A2 N2CNC2 4-20 mA1

A3 PMTDET 0 - 1 V

A4 O2CONC 0-10 V

1 With current loop option installed

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

133

selects which physical range is in effect based on the analog output reporting range

selected by the user:

FOR THE T200M:

Low range spans 0 to 20 ppm NOX (20 ppm = 5 V);

High range spans 0-200 ppm NOX (200 ppm = 5 V).

If the high end of the selected reporting range is  20 ppm. The low physical

range is selected. If the high end of the selected reporting range is > 20 ppm.

The high physical range is selected.

FOR THE T200H:

Low range spans 0 to 500 ppm NOX (500 ppm = 5 V);

High range spans 0-5000 ppm NOX (5000 ppm = 5 V).

If the high end of the selected reporting range is  500 ppm. The low physical

range is selected. If the high end of the selected reporting range is > 500 ppm.

The high physical range is selected.

Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations

along the entire span of its 0 and 200 ppm or 5,000 ppm physical range regardless of

which reporting range has been selected for the analog outputs and which physical range

is being used by the instruments software.

Both reporting ranges need to be calibrated independently to the same span gas

concentrations in order to allow switching back and forth between high and low ranges.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

134

4.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

4.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu.

Table 4-21 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T200H/M.

Table 4-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions

SUB MENU FUNCTION

AOUTS

CALIBRATED:

Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration

of all analog output channels.

DATA_OUT_1: Configures the A1 analog output:

RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale value of the

output.

OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.

REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.

AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration

CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this

one channel only.

OUTOUT: Turns the output channel ON/OFF. A signal. Equal to the low end of the

output scale (zero point) is still output by the analyzer, but no data is sent.

DATA: Allows the user to select which DAS parameter to be output.

SCALE: Sets the top end of the reporting range scale for this channel. The analyzer

automatically chooses the units of measure appropriate for the DAS parameter chosen

(e.g. ppm for concentration parameters; in-Hg-A for pressure measurements, etc.)

UPDATE: Sets the time interval at which the analyzer updates the data being output

on the channel.

DATA_OUT_2 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (NO)

DATA_OUT_3 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)

DATA_OUT_4 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (O2)

AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital

converter circuit on the motherboard.

XIN1

XIN8

For each of 8 external analog input channels, shows the gain, offset, engineering units,

and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function.

1Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.

To configure the analyzer’s four analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each

channel and calibrate the outputs. This consists of:

1. Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has

been installed) and the signal level that matches the input requirements of the

recording device attached to the channel.

2. Determine if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly.

3. If a Voltage scale is in use, a bipolar recorder offset may be added to the signal if

required (Section 4.13.5).

4. Choose an DAS parameter to be output on the channel.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

135

5. Set the reporting range scale for the data type chosen.

6. Set the update rate for the channel.

7. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for

each channel (see Sections 4.13.6).

To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:

AIO Configuration Submenu

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_1: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_4: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

136

4.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection

To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel

press:

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: RANGE: 5V

0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT

These keys set

the signal level

and type of the

selected

channel

Pressing ENTR records

the new setting and

returns to the previous

menu.

Pressing EXIT ignores the

new setting and returns to

the previous menu.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

137

4.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF

In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T200H/M’s

analog output channels. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is

sensitive to excess voltage or current.

Note Instruments with current range options installed on one or more of the

outputs often are delivered from the factory with the over-range feature

turned OFF on those channels.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

138

To Turn the over-range feature on or off, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button

to turn the Over-

Range feature ON

or OFF

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

4.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output

Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from

the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

139

around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T200H/M by defining a zero offset, a

small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).

To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:

EXAMPLE

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

+ 0000 ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle these

buttons to set

ther value of

the desired

offset.

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV

–0010ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

140

4.13.5.5. Assigning a DAS Parameter to an Analog Output Channel

The T200H/M analog output channels can be assigned to output data from any of the

40+ available DAS parameters (see Table A-6 of Appendix A.5). The default settings

for the four output channels are:

Table 4-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings

CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING

PARAMETER A1 A2 A3 A43

DATA TYPE1 NXCNC1 NOCNC1 N2CNC1 NXCNC2

RANGE 0 - 5 VDC2

REC OFS 0 mVDC

AUTO CAL. ON

CALIBRATED NO

OUTPUT ON

SCALE 100 ppm

UPDATE 5 sec

1 See Table A-6 of T200H/M Appendix A for definitions of these DAS data types

2 Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3.

3 On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, DAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4.

4.13.5.6. DAS Configuration Limits

The number of DAS objects are limited by the instrument’s finite storage capacity. For

information regarding the maximum number of channels, parameters, and records and

how to calculate the file size for each data channel, refer to the DAS manual

downloadable from the T-API website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/ under

Special Manuals.

4.13.5.7. Reporting Gas Concentrations via the T200H/M Analog Output Channels

While the DAS parameters available for output over via the analog channels A1 thru A4

include a vide variety internal temperatures, gas flows and pressures as well as certain

key internal voltage levels, most of the DAS parameters are related to gas concentration

levels.

Two parameters exist for each gas type measured by the T200H/M. They are generally

referred to as range 1 and range 2 (e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2; NOCNC1 and

NOCNC2; etc.). These take the place of the high and low concentration ranges of

previous versions of the analyzer software. Concentrations for each range are computed

using separate slopes and offsets which are also stored via separate DAS parameters.

Note If an analog output channel is set to report a gas concentration (e.g.

NXCNC1; NOx concentration; Range 1) it is generally a good idea to use

80% of the reporting range for that channel for the span point calibration.

If both available parameters for a specific gas type are being reported

(e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2) separate calibrations should be carried out

for each parameter.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

141

The available gas concentration DAS parameters for output via the T200H/M analog

output channels are:

Table 4-23: Analog Output DAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data

REPORTING

RANGE

PARAMETER

NAME1 DESCRIPTION

NXCNC1 Concentration

NXSLP1 Slope

NXOFS1 Offset

NOx Range 1

(LOW)

NXZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NXCNC2 Concentration

NXSLP2 Slope

NXOFS2 Offset

NOx RANGE 2

(HIGH)

NXZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NOCNC1 Concentration

NOSLP1 Slope

NOOFS1 Offset

NO Range 1

(LOW)

NOZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NOCNC2 Concentration

NOSLP2 Slope

NOOFS2 Offset

NO RANGE 2

(HIGH)

NOZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

N2CNC1 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 1 and NO Range 1

NO2 Range 12

(LOW) N2ZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

N2CNC2 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 2 and NO Range 2

NO2 RANGE 22

(HIGH) N2ZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

O2CONC3 Concentration

O2OFST3 Slope

O2SLPE3 Offset

O2 Range3

O2ZSCN 3 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

1 Parameters are not listed in the order they appear on the DAS list (see Table A-6 or Appendix A.5 for the proper order of the full list of

parameters)

2 Since NO2 values are computed rather than measured directly, no separate slope or offset exist.

3 Only available on instruments with O2 sensor options installed.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

142

To assign a DAS parameter to a specific analog output channel, press,

EXAMPLE

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Use these buttons to move

up and down the list if

available DAS parameters

(See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5)

Continue pressing SET> until ...

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL

<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

143

4.13.5.8. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output

Once the DAS parameter has been set, the top end of the scale must be selected. For

concentration values this should be equal to the expected maximum value for the

application. The analog channel will scale its output accordingly.

EXAMPLE:

DAS parameter being output: NXCNC1

Maximum value expected: 800 ppm

Output range; 10 V

Output:...0 ppm 0.000 V

100 ppm 1.250 V

200 ppm 2.500 V

400 ppm 5.000 V

750 ppm 9.375 V

Note Regardless of how the reporting range for an analog output channel is

set, the instrument will continue to measure NO, NO2 and NOx accurately

for the entire physical range of the instrument (See Section 4.13.4.2 for

information on Physical range versus reporting range).

Each output channel can be programmed for a separate gas with independent reporting

range.

EXAMPLE:

A1  NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1000 ppm NOX.

A1  NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1250 ppm NOX.

A3  NOCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-500 ppm NO.

A4  N2CNC1 (NO2 Range 1) 0-750 ppm NO2.

Note While Range 1 for each gas type is often referred to as the LOW range and

Range 2 as the HIGH range, this is simply a naming convention. The

upper limit for each range can be set to any value.

EXAMPLE: A1  NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1500 ppm NOX

A2  NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1000 ppm NOX

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

144

To set the reporting range for an analog output, press:

EXAMPLE

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 100.00 PPM

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 1250.00 PPM

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Use these

buttons to

change the

range scale.

Continue pressing SET> until ...

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: [1]00.00 PPM

<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 12[5]0. PPM

<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT

RANGE SELECTION TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

BUTTON FUNCTION

<CH Moves the cursor one character to the left.

CH> Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion:

0-9; as well as “+” & “-“.

ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

145

4.13.5.9. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output

The data update rate for the T200H/M analog outputs can be adjusted to match the

requirements of the specific DAS parameter chosen for each channel. For instance, if

the parameter NXCNC1 (NOx concentration; Range 1) is chosen for channel A1 on an

instrument set for dual gas measurement mode, it would be meaningless to have an

update rate of less than 30 seconds, since the NOx-No measurement cycle takes that long

to complete. On the other hand, if the channel were set to output the PMTDET voltage

or the temperature of the moly converter, it might be useful to have output updated more

frequently.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

146

To change the update rate for an individual analog output channel, press:

EXAMPLE

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle these

buttons to set

the data update

rate for this

channel.

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC

030 ENTREXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC

005 ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

147

4.13.5.10. Turning an Analog Output On or Off

Each output can be temporarily turned off. When off, no data is sent to the output.

Electronically, it is still active, but there is simply no data being output, so the signal

level at the rear of the instrument will fall to zero.

To turn an individual analog output channel ON/OFF, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle this

button to turn

the channel

ON/OFF

Continue pressing SET> until ...

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

148

4.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION

Analog calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in

the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration is required.

The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically, either as a group or individually

(Section 4.13.6.1), or adjusted manually (see Section 4.13.6). (Manual calibration should

be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the

characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration requires the AUTOCAL

feature to be disabled).During automatic calibration the analyzer tells the output

circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale point signal (usually about 90% of

chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any error at zero

or high-scale is corrected with a slope and offset.

To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for one output channel, press.

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON

ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button

to turn AUTO CAL

ON or OFF

(OFF = manual

calibration mode).

ENTR accepts

the new setting.

EXIT ignores the

new setting

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

Note Channels with current loop output options cannot be calibrated

automatically. Outputs Configured for 0.1V full scale should always be

calibrated manually.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

149

4.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration

To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

Analyzer

automatically

calibrates all

channels for which

AUTO-CAL is turned

If any of the channels

have not been calibrated

ot if at least one channel

has AUTO-CAL turned

OFF, this message will

read NO.

DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_1

DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2

DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL. DATA_OUT_3

DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_4

This message

appears when

AUTO-CAL is

Turned OFF for

a channel

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES

SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Note Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where

the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the

recording device.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

150

To initiate an automatic calibration for an individual output channel, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

151

4.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output Configured for Voltage Ranges

For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.

Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only

appear if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being

adjusted.

Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See

Figure 6-14) and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in

100, 10 or 1 count increments.

+DC Gnd

V OUT +

V OUT -

IN +

V IN -

Recording

Device

ANALYZER

See the Electrical

Connections

section for pin

assignments of

Analog Out

connector on the

rear panel

Figure 4-11: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs

Table 4-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration

FULL

SCALE

ZERO

TOLERANCE SPAN VOLTAGE SPAN

TOLERANCE

MINIMUM

ADJUSTMENT

(1 count)

0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V 0.02 mV

1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V 0.24 mV

5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V 1.22 mV

10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V 2.44 mV

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

152

To manually adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-Z: 0 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-S: 4500 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

These menus

only appear if

AUTO-CAL is

turned OFF

These buttons increase /

decrease the analog output

signal level (not the value on the

display)

by 100, 10 or 1 counts.

Continue adjustments until the

voltage measured at the output

of the analyzer and/or the input

of the recording device matches

the value in the upper right hand

corner of the display (within the

tolerances

listed in Table 6-24).

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

153

4.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs Configured for Current Loop Ranges

The current loop output option (see Section 5.4) uses a small converter assembly to

change the DC voltage output by the standard voltage output to a current signal ranging

between 0-20 mA. Since the exact current increment per voltage count varies from

converter to converter and from instrument to instrument, analog outputs with this

option installed cannot be calibrated automatically and must be adjusted manually.

Adjusting the signal zero and full scale values of the current loop output is done in a

similar manner as manually adjusting analog outputs configured for voltage output

except that:

 In this case calibration is performed with a current meter connected in series with

the output circuitry (See Figure 4-12).

 Adjustments to the output are made using the front panel touchscreen, also in 100,

10 or 1 count increments, but the change in the voltage driving the converter

assembly is displayed on the front panel.

 As before, adjustment of the output is performed until the current reading of the

meter reaches the desired point (e.g. 2 mA, 4 mA, 20 mA, etc.)

IN OUT

I OUT +

I OUT -

I IN +

I IN -

Recording

Device

Analyzer

See Table 3-2 for

pin assignments of

the Analog Out

connector on the

rear panel.

Current

Meter

Figure 4-12: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs

Note Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

154

If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop

outputs is to connect a 250  1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a

voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the procedure above but adjust the

output to the following values:

+DC Gnd

Recording

Device

V IN +

V IN -

ANALYZER

V OUT +

V OUT -

250 O

Volt

Meter

Figure 4-13: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs

Table 4-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor

FULL SCALE VOLTAGE FOR 2-20 MA

(measured across 250Ω resistor)

VOLTAGE FOR 4-20 MA

(measured across 250Ω resistor)

0% 0.5 V 1.0 V

100% 5.0 V 5.0 V

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

155

To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, press:

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 13 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 4866 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2: CURR, NXCNC1, NOCAL

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 0 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 5000 mV

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT

DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

<SET SET> CAL EXIT

Increase or decrease

the current output by

100, 10 or 1 counts.

The resulting change in

output voltage is

displayed in the upper

line.

Continue adjustments

until the correct current

is measured with the

current meter.

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

156

4.13.6.4. AIN Calibration

This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This

calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU,

motherboard or power supplies.

To perform a AIN CALIBRATION, press:

From the

AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ….

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO

<SET CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D ZERO

DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D SPAN

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: YES

<SET CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET> CAL EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

157

4.13.6.5. Configuring External Analog Inputs (Option) Channels

To configure the analyzer’s external analog inputs option, define for each channel:

 gain (number of units represented by 1 volt)

 offset (volts)

 engineering units to be represented in volts (each press of the touch screen button

scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A-Z and 0-9)

 whether to display the channel in the Test functions

To access and adjust settings for the external Analog Inputs option channels press:

DIAG AIO

IN1 GAIN:1.00V/V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

< SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO

IN1 GAIN:1.00V/V

+ 0 0 1 .0 0 ENTR EXIT

Press to change

Gain value

DIAG AIO XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Press SET> to scroll to the first

channel. Continue pressing SET>

to view each of 8 channels.

Pressing ENT

records the new setting

and returns to the previous menu.

Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and

returns to the previous menu.

Press EDIT at any channel

to to change Gain, Offset,

Units and whether to display

the channel in the Test

functions (OFF/ON).

DIAG AIO XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO XIN1 UNITS:V

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF

< SET EDIT EXIT

Figure 4-14. DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

158

4.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS

4.13.7.1. Display Sequence Configuration

The model T200H/M analyzer allows the user to choose which gas concentration

measurement and reporting range is to be displayed in the concentration field on the

instrument’s front panel display as well as what order and how long each will appear

before analyzer cycle to the next item on the display list.

Note This T200H/M is constantly monitoring all of the gas measurements it is

configured to make regardless of which range is being displayed. This

feature merely changes how that display sequence occurs, not how the

instrument makes measurements.

The software permits the user to choose from the following list of display values:

Table 4-26: T200H/M Available Concentration Display Values

DISPLAY

VALUE DESCRIPTION ASSOCIATED DAS

PARAMETER

NOX NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for the currently selected

NOx range.1 --

NXL NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range

1 (Low) NXCNC1

NXH NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range

2 (High) NXCNC2

NO NO value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently

selected NO range 1 --

NOL NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 1

(Low) NOCNC1

NOH NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 2

(High) NOCNC2

N2 NO2 value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently

selected NO2 range 1 --

N2L NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting

range 1 (Low) & N0 reporting range 1 (Low) N2CNC1

N2H NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting

range 2 (High) & N0 reporting range 2 (High) N2CNC2

O2 O2 concentration value. O2CONC2

1 With the following exceptions this will be reporting range 1 (Low) for the appropriate gas type:

 If the analyzer is in calibration mode, this will be the concentration value computed with the slope and offset for which ever range

is being calibrated.

 If the instrument is in either E-Test or O-Test mode, this will be the value computed with the slope and offset values used by

those tests.

2 Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

159

The default settings for this feature are:

Table 4-27: T200H/M Concentration Display Default Values

DISPLAY VALUE DISPLAY DURATION

NOX 4 sec.

NO 4 sec.

NO2 4 sec.

O2 4 sec.

1 Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed.

To change these settings, press:

INSERT adds a new entry on the display list

before the currently selected value.

Toggle PREV and NEXT keys until desired

display value appears.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISP 1) NOX, 4 SEC

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT

Moves back and forth

along existing list of

display values

DIAG DISP DISPLAY DATA: NOX

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISP DISPLAY DATA: N2H

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISP DISPLAY DURATION: 4 SEC

0 4 ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to set desired

display duration in seconds

ENTR Accepts the

new setting.

EXIT discards the

new setting.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

160

To delete an entry in the display value list, press:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISP 1) NOX, 4 SEC

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT

Moves back and forth

along existing list of

display values DIAG DISP DELETE?

YES NO

DIAG DISP DELETED

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

161

4.13.7.2. Optic Test

The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED

located in the cooling block of the PMT (Fig. 10-15). The analyzer uses the light

emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT and the

current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board. To make sure that the analyzer

measures only the light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero

air. The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV. To activate

the electrical test press the following touchscreen button sequence.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EX IT

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EX IT

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG OPTIC A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Press NEX

until…

DIAG OPTIC TEST

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Press TST until…

DIAG ELEC PMT = 2751 MV NOX=X.X

<TST TST> EXIT

While the optic test is

activated, PMT should be

2000 mV ± 1000 mV

Note This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool.

The resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also

changes with low-level calibration.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

162

4.13.7.3. Electrical Test

The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and

feeds it into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-

amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly

along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. The

electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.

To activate the electrical test press the following buttons:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIA

SIGNAL I / O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG ELEC A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> EXIT

Press NEXT until…

DIAG ELECTRIC AL TEST

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Press TST until…

DIAG ELEC PMT = 1732 MV NOX=X.X

<TST TST> EXIT

Whi le the electrical test is

activated, PMT shoul d equal:

2000 mV ± 1000 mV

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

163

4.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override

This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This can

be done before disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or after a

system restart if the user does not want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up time.

Note that this is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that is retained after you exit

the menu. (During initial power up TMR (timer) is displayed while the Ozone brick

remains off for the first 30 minutes). Also note that the ozone generator does not turn on

if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if there is no flow through the

system or the pump is broken).

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

164

To access this feature press the following menu sequence:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 81

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

DIAG OZONE OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

OFF EXIT

Press NEXT until…

DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button to turn the O3

gener ator ON/OFF.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

165

4.13.7.5. Flow Calibration

The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they

are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual

flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement

of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values.

To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the

sample inlet. Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press:

Adj ust these val ues

until the displayed

flow rate equals the

flow rate being

measured by the

independent fl ow

meter.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

Exit at

any time

to return

to m ain

the

SETUP

DIAG SIGNAL I /

NEXT ENTR EXIT

Exit returns

to the

previ ous menu

Repeat Pressing NE

T until . . .

DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG FCAL

CTUAL FLOW: 480 CC / M

0 4 8 0 ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the

new value and

returns to the

previous menu

EXIT ignores the

new value and

returns to the

previous menu

DIAG FLOW SENSOR TO CAL: SAMPLE

SAMPLE OZONE ENTR EXIT

Choose between

sampl e and ozone

flow sensors.

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

166

4.14. SETUP – ALRM: USING THE OPTIONAL GAS

CONCENTRATION ALARMS (OPT 67)

The optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed includes two concentration

alarms. Each alarm has a user settable limit, and is associated with an opto-isolated TTL

relay accessible via the status output connector on the instrument’s back panel. If the

concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit, the alarm‘s status

output relay is closed NO2.

The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are:

Table 4-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings

ALARM STATUS LIMIT SET POINT1 OUTPUT RELAY

DESIGNATION

ALM1 Disabled 100 ppm 133.9 mg/m3 AL2

ALM2 Disabled 300 ppm 401.6 mg/m3 AL3

1 Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed the analyzer will automatically

scale the set points to match the new range unit setting.

Note To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span

calibration operations make sure to press CAL or CALS button prior to

introducing span gas into the analyzer.

To enable either of the concentration alarms and set the Limit points, press:

ENTR accepts the new

settings

EXIT ignores the new

settings

SETUP X.

LARM 1 LIMIT: 200 PPM

0 1 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X

LARM MENU

ALM1 ALM2 EXIT

SETUP X.

LARM 1 LIMIT: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECOND ARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Toggle these buttons

to cycle through the

available character set:

0-9

SETUP X.

LARM 1 LIMIT: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

167

4.15. Remote Operation

4.15.1. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O

4.15.1.1. Status Outputs

The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors,

which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with

devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controllers

(PLCs). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC.

All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.

Note Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input

will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does

not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit

the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA,

the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.

The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel

labeled STATUS (see Figure 6-17). The function of each pin is defined in Table 6–29

COMMON

EMITTERS

STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +

SYSTEM OK

HIGH RANGE

CONC VALID

ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

DIAG MODE

LOW SPAN

GROUND

Figure 4-15: Status Output Connector

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

168

Table 4-29: Status Output Pin Assignments

CONNECTOR

PIN STATUS CONDITION (ON=CONDUCTING)

1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.

2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid.

3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode.

4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode.

5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode.

6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.

7 LOW RANGE ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode.

8 Unused.

D EMITTER BUS

The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. For

most applications, this pin should be connected to the circuit ground

of the receiving device.

+ DC POWER + 5 VDC, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control Inputs).

DIGITAL

GROUND The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5 VDC power supply.

4.15.1.2. Control Inputs

Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes

are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear

panel. These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal

from the “U” pin is connected to the respective input pin.

Table 4-30: Control Input Pin Assignments

INPUT STATUS CONDITION WHEN ENABLED

A EXTERNAL ZERO

CAL

Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display

will read ZERO CAL R.

B EXTERNAL SPAN

CAL

Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display

will read SPAN CAL R.

C EXTERNAL LOW

SPAN CAL

Low span (mid-point) calibration mode is activated. The mode field

of the display will read LO CAL R.

D, E & F Unused

DIGITAL GROUND Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).

U DC power for Input

pull ups

Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can

be taken from an external source or from the “+” pin.

+ Internal +5V Supply Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when

connected to pin U.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

169

There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the

“+” pin is the most convenient method (see Figure 6-18). However, to ensure that these

inputs are truly isolated, a separate, external 5 VDC power supply should be used (see

Figure 6-19).

CONTROL IN

A B C D E F U +

LOW SPAN

ZERO

SPAN

Figure 4-16: Control Inputs with Local 5 V Power Supply

LOW SPAN

SPAN

CONTROL IN

5 VDC Power

Supply

ZERO

A B C D E F U +

Figure 4-17: Control Inputs with External 5 V Power Supply

4.15.2. REMOTE OPERATION

4.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes

The Model T200H/M can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data

through the serial ports. As terminals and computers use different communication

schemes, the analyzer supports two communicate modes specifically designed to

interface with these two types of devices.

 Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a

dedicated interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding

APICOM can be found in later in this section or on the Teledyne API website at

http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

 Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as

HyperTerminal or a “dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to

operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 6-31 and in Appendix A-6.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

170

4.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode

Table 4-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands

COMMAND FUNCTION

Control-T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface

can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.

Control-C Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).

(carriage return)

A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The

command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal

computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key.

(backspace) Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.

ESC

(escape) Erases the entire command line.

? [ID] CR

This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their

functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of

the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such

as the multi-drop setup.

Control-C Pauses the listing of commands.

Control-P Restarts the listing of commands.

4.15.2.3. Command Syntax

Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID

numbers, keywords, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.

All Commands follow the syntax:

X [ID] COMMAND <CR>

Where

X is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command.

Allowed designators are listed in Table 4-32 and Appendix A.

[ID] is the analyzer identification number (see Section 4.11.4.). Example: the

Command “? 200” followed by a carriage return would print the list of

available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the

instrument assigned ID Number 200.

COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being

issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have

additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed.

Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A for a list of available command

designators.

<CR> is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage

return (usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).

Table 4-32: Command Types

COMMAND COMMAND TYPE

C Calibration

D Diagnostic

L Logon

T Test measurement

V Variable

W Warning

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

171

4.15.2.4. Data Types

Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean

expressions and text strings.

 Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a

filter length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or

more digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.

 Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They

consist of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9,

A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or minus sign

is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal

integers.

 Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as

temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of

an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal

point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear before or after the

decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -

0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.

 Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that

may assume only two values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.

 Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other

data types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers.

They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters,

including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. For

example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible to

include a quotation mark character within a text string.

 Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such

as DAS data channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the

entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any names.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

172

4.15.2.5. Status Reporting

Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the

RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the

instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable

the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Communication Mode).

Status reports include DAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages,

calibration and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the

possible messages, and this section for information on controlling the instrument

through the RS-232 interface.

GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT

All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line

request) are in the format:

X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>

Where

X is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message

type, as shown in the Table 6-31.

DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It

consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of

the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a

number from 00 to 59.

[ID] is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.

MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages, test

measurements, DAS reports, variable values, etc.

<CRLF> is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.

The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse

them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any

information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages

for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as

HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

173

4.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem

The T200H/M can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable

between the analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable

(available from Teledyne API with part number WR0000024).

Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct

position. Also make sure the T200H/M COM port is set for a baud rate that is

compatible with the modem, which needs to operate with an 8-bit word length with one

stop bit.

The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64).

Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be

entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is

AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0

This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100

characters long.

Note If Hessen Protocol Mode is active for a com port, operation via a modem

is not available on that port.

To change this setting press:

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EX IT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y &D &H

<CH CH> INS DEL [A] ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

ENT

accepts the

new string and returns

to the previous menu.

EXIT ignores the new

string and returns to

the previous m enu.

The <C H and CH> buttons

move the [ ] cursor l eft and

right al ong th e text string

inserts a

character before

the cur sor location.

Press the [?]

key repeatedly to cycle through the

available character set:

0-9

A-Z

space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =

+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

DEL deletes a

character at the

cursor location.

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

Select which

COM Port is

tested

EXIT returns

to the

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

174

To initialize the modem press:

Select which

COM Port is

tested

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID COM1 COM2 EXIT

EXI

returns

to the

SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y



<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

ETUP X.X COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM

<SET SET> INIT EXIT

SET UP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

EXIT returns to the

Com munications Menu.

ETUP X.X INITIALIZING MODEM

<SET SET> INIT EXIT

4.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security

In order to provide security for remote access of the T200H/M, a LOGON feature can be

enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done

by turning on the SECURITY MODE (see Section 4.9). Once the SECURITY

MODE is enabled, the following items apply.

 A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.

 If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be

achieved with the LOGOFF command.

 Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause

subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.

 If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.

 The following messages will be returned at logon:

o LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given

o LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect

o LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully

To log on to the T200H/M analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:

LOGON 940331

940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable

RS232_PASS issued as follows:

V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN

Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

175

4.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program

APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows to access and

control any of Teledyne API’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a

remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user

can:

 Establish a link from a remote location to the T200H/M through direct cable

connection via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.

 View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be

accessed when standing in front of the instrument.

 Remotely edit system parameters and set points.

 Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.

 Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations.

 Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.

APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-

shooting. Figure 6-20 shows examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates

the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel

Figure 4-18: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface

APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be

downloaded for free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

176

4.15.3. ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTATION

Table 4-33: Serial Interface Documents

Interface / Tool Document Title Part Number Available Online*

APICOM APICOM User Manual 039450000 YES

Multi-drop RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation 021790000 YES

DAS Manual Detailed description of the DAS. 028370000 YES

* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/

4.15.4. USING THE T200H/M WITH A HESSEN PROTOCOL NETWORK

4.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol

The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are

connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote

instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are

unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate messages. They

only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a

command containing their own unique ID number.

The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote

instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote

instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. API’s implementation

supports both of these principal features.

The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely

compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other

companies.

The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate

over a Hessen Protocol network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host

computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax,

download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API’ web site:

http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

177

4.15.4.2. Hessen Com Port Configuration

Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T200H/M’s com ports to

be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below.

Table 4-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol

Parameter Standard Hessen

Data Bits 8 7

Stop Bits 1 2

Parity None Even

Duplex Full Half

Note Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are

properly set

Be aware that the instrument software has a 200 ms latency response to

commands issued by the host computer.

Operation via modem is not available over any com port on which

HESSEN protocol is active.

The first step in configuring the T200H/M to operate over a Hessen protocol network is

to activate the Hessen mode for com ports and configure the communication parameters

for the port(s) appropriately. Press:

SETUP X.X PRIM ARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

Continue pressing next until …

Select which COMM

port to configure

SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON

PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF

PREV NE XT OFF ENTR EXIT

ENT

button accepts the

new settings

EXIT key ignores the new

settings

The sum of the mode

IDs of the selected

mo des is displayed

here

SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON

PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF

PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

Toggle OFF/ON

buttons to change

activate/deactivate

selected mode.

Repeat the

entire process to

set up the

COM2 port

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

178

4.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type

Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation,

referred to as TYPE 1, and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more

flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas.

For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and TYPE 2

download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API’ web site:

http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .

To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID HESN COM1 COM2

EXIT

SETUP X. HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

TYPE1 TYPE 2

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2

PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

Press to change

protocol type.

ENT

accepts the new

settings

EXIT ignores the new

settings

Note While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1

and COM2, the TYPE selection affects both ports.

4.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode

The Teledyne API’ implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of

several different modes of response for the analyzer.

Table 6-28: T200H/M Hessen Protocol Response Modes

MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION

CMD This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format.

Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command.

BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <STX> (at the beginning of the response, <ETX>

(at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command

encoding.

TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <CR> at the beginning and the end of the string,

regardless of the command encoding.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

179

To Select a Hessen response mode, press:

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EX IT

SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS :

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.000 PPB SO2 =XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETU P X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETU P X.

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETU P X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD

BCC TEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT

Press to

change

response

mode.

ENTR accepts the new

settings

EXIT ignores the new

settings

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

180

4.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID

Since the T200H/M measures NOx, NO2, NO and O2 (if the optional sensor is installed),

all of these gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list. In its default state the

Hessen protocol firmware assigns each of these gases a Hessen ID number and actively

reports all of them even if the instrument is only measuring one (see

MEASURE_MODE, Section 4.12) .

To change or edit these settings press:

BUTTON FUNCTION

<PREV Moves t o nex t gas entry in list

NEXT> Moves the cursor previous gas entry in list

INS Inse rts a new gas entry into the list.

DEL Deletes the >>>>>.

ENTR Accepts the new setting and re turns to the prev ious menu.

EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

SETUP X.X SECOND ARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXI

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

ENTR accepts the

new setti ngs

EXIT ignores the

new setti ngs

SETUP X.X NOX, 211, REPORTED

<PREV NEXT> INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X GAS TYPE NOX

<PREV NEXT> ENTR EXIT

Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle

through availabl e gases

SETUP X.X GAS ID: 211

0 0 0 EN TR EXIT

Toggle to change the gas ID number for the

chosen gas.

SETUP X.X REPORTED : ON

ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle to switch reporting Between ON and

OFF

Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle

existing entr ies in He ssen gas l ist

Table 4-35: T200H/M Hessen GAS ID List

GAS DEFAULT HESSEN GAS ID

NOx 211

NO 212

NO2 213

O2 214

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions

181

4.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags

Teledyne API’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that are

included in responses to inform the host computer of the T200H/M’s condition. The

default settings for these bit/flags are:

Table 4-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments

Note It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit.

This allows the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature

warnings, under the same status bit. Be careful not to assign conflicting

flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the

assigned flags is active.

STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT

WARNING FLAGS

SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001

OZONE FLOW WARNING 0002

RCELL PRESS WARN 0004

BOX TEMP WARNING 0008

RCELL TEMP WARNING 0010

PMT TEMP WARNING 0040

CONVERTER TEMP WARNING 0080

WARMUP MODE 1000

INVALID CONC 8000

OPERATIONAL FLAGS

In Manual Calibration Mode 0200

In O2 Calibration Mode 0400

In Zero Calibration Mode 0400

In Low Span Calibration Mode 0800

In Span Calibration Mode 0800

UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS

MGM 2000

PPM 6000

SPARE/UNUSED BITS 0020, 0100

UNASSIGNED FLAGS

Box Temp Warning Analog Cal Warning

System Reset Cannot Dyn Zero

Rear Board Not Detected Cannot Dyn Span

Relay Board Warning O2 Cell Temp Warn

Manifold Temp Warn AutoZero Warning

Ozone Gen Off Conc Alarm 2

Conc Alarm 1 In MP Calibration Mode

HVPS Warning

07270B DCN6512

Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

182

To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X. HESSEN STATUS FLAGS

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X. PMT DET WARNIN

: 0002

PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT

Repeat pressing SET> until …

SETUP X. SYSTEM RESET: 0000

PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT

move the [ ]

cursor left and

right along the

bi t string.

Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired

message flag is displayed. See Table 6-29.

For exam ple …

ENT

key accepts the

new settings

EXIT key ignores the new

settings

SETUP X. SYSTEM RESET: [0]000

<CH CH> [0] ENTR EXIT

Press the [?] key r epeatedly to cycle through the available character set:

-9

Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless.

4.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code

Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code. The

T200H/M has a default ID of either 0 or 200. To change this code see Section 4.11.1

07270B DCN6512

183

5. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

This section describes calibration procedures for the T200H/M. All of the methods

described here can be initiated and controlled through the front panel or the COM ports.

Interferents should be considered prior to calibration.

5.1.1. INTERFERENTS FOR NOX MEASUREMENTS

The chemiluminescence method for detecting NOX is subject to interference from a

number of sources including water vapor (H2O), ammonia (NH3), sulfur dioxide (SO2)

and carbon dioxide (CO2) but the Model T200H/M has been designed to reject most of

these interferents. Section 8.2.4 contains more detailed information on interferents.

Ammonia is the most common interferent, which is converted to NO in the analyzer’s

NO2 converter and creates a NOX signal artifact. If the Model T200H/M is installed in

an environment with high ammonia, steps should be taken to remove the interferent

from the sample gas before it enters the reaction cell. Teledyne API offers a sample gas

conditioning option to remove ammonia and water vapor (contact Sales).

Carbon dioxide diminishes the NOX signal when present in high concentrations. If the

analyzer is used in an application with excess CO2, contact Teledyne API Technical

Support for possible solutions. Excess water vapor can be removed with one of the

dryer options described in Section 1.4. In ambient air applications, SO2 interference is

usually negligible.

5.1.1.1. Conditioners for High Moisture Sample Gas

Several permeation devices using Nafion® permeation gas exchange tubes are available

for applications with high moisture and/or moderate levels of NH3 in the sample gas.

This type of sample conditioner is part of the standard T200H/M equipment to remove

H2O and NH3 from the ozone generator supply gas stream but can be purchased for the

sample gas stream as well. All gas conditioners remove water vapor to a dew point of

about –20° C (~600 ppm H2O) and effectively remove concentrations of ammonia up to

about 1 ppm. More information about these dryers and their performance is available at

http://www.permapure.com/.

It is MANDATORY that for calibrations and operation to be valid, the analyzer be

calibrated using the same background gas (or dilutent) for zero and span, as the

background gas in the sample stream. Any other combinations will lead to calibration or

operational errors since the efficiency of the analyzer’s chemluminescent reaction varies

with the background gas, since the background gas acts as a quencher.

Note CALIBRATION vs. CALIBRATION CHECK:

DO NOT press the ENTR button during the following procedures if you are

performing only a calibration check. ENTR recalculates the stored values

for OFFSET and SLOPE, altering the instrument’s calibration.

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

184

5.2. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS

5.2.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES

Calibration of the Model T200H/M analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and

supplies. These include, but are not limited to, the following:

 Zero-air source (defined in Section 3.5.1.1).

 Span gas source (defined in Section 3.5.1.2).

 Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or

FEP). High concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require

stainless steel to avoid oxidation of NO with O2 diffusing into the tubing.

 A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional). For

electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system can be used.

5.2.2. ZERO AIR

Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all

components that might affect the analyzer’s readings. For NOX measuring devices, zero

air should be devoid of NOX and large amounts of CO2, NH3 and water vapor. Water

vapor and moderate amounts of NH3 can be removed using a sample gas conditioner

(Section 5.10).

Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by

drying and removal of pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for

generating zero air. Please contact our sales department for more information on this.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

185

5.2.3. SPAN CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS & TRACEABILITY

Note We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with NO span

gas, although it is possible to use NO2. Quick span checks may be done

with either NO, NO2 or a mixture of NO and NO2.

Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being

measured at about 80% of the desired full measurement range. For example, if the

measurement range is 120 ppm, the span gas should have an NO concentration of about

96 ppm.

Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the

analyzer. Typical gas accuracy for NOX gases is 1 or 2%. NO standards should be

mixed in nitrogen (to prevent oxidation of NO to NO2 over time).

For oxygen measurements, we recommend s reference gas of 21% O2 in N2. the user

can either utilize the NOX standards (if mixed in air). For quick checks. ambient air can

be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%. Generally, O2 concentration in dry,

ambient air varies by less than 1%.

5.2.3.1. Traceability

All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of

the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST

traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be

traceable to NIST standard reference materials (SRM). These are available from a variety

of commercial sources.

Table 5-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases

NIST-SRM4 TYPE NOMINAL

CONCENTRATION

2627a

2628a

2629a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

5 ppm

10 ppm

20 ppm

1683b

1684b

1685b

1686b

1687b

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

50 ppm

100 ppm

250 ppm

5000 ppm

1000 ppm

2630

2631a

2635

2636a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

1500 ppm

3000 ppm

800 ppm

2000 ppm

2656

2660a

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air

2500 ppm

100 ppm

2659a Oxygen in Nitrogen (O2) 21 mol %

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

186

5.2.4. DATA RECORDING DEVICES

A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should

be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T200H/M. If analog

readings are used, the response of the recording system should be checked against a

NIST traceable voltage source or meter. Data recording devices should be capable of bi-

polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording,

the T200H/M provides an internal data acquisition system (DAS), which is described in

detail in Section 4.7. APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a

convenient and powerful tool for data handling, download, storage, quick check and

plotting.

5.2.5. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY (CE)

To ensure accurate operation of the T200H/M, it is important to check the NO2

conversion efficiency (CE) periodically and to update this value as necessary.

The default setting for the NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. For the analyzer to

function correctly, the converter efficiency must be between 0.9600 and 1.0200 (96-

102% conversion efficiency) as per US-EPA requirements. If the converter’s efficiency

is outside these limits, the NO2 converter should be replaced.

Note The currently programmed CE is recorded along with the calibration data

in the DAS for documentation and performance analysis.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

187

5.2.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency

The following procedure will cause the Model T200H/M to automatically calculate the

current NO2 conversion efficiency.

STEP ONE:

Connect a source of calibrated NO2 span gas as shown below.

Source of

SAMPLE GAS

Removed during

calibration

Instrument

Chassis

SAMPLE

EXHAUST

PUMP

MODEL T700

Gas Dilution

Calibrator

VENT if not vented

at calibrator

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

NO2 Gas

(High Concentration)

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Figure 5-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

188

STEP TWO:

Set the expected NO2 span gas concentration:

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL NO2 CE CONC:80.0 Conc

0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOX & NO span concentration

values automatically default to

80.0 Conc.

If this is not the the concentration of

the span gas being used, toggle

these buttons to set the correct

concentration of the NOX and NO

calibration gases.

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to

the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to

the

CONVERTER

EFFICIENCY

MENU.

If using NO span gas

in addition to NOX

repeat last step.

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

189

STEP THREE

Activate NO2 measurement stability function.

SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:NO2

NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

Press ENTR first,

then press EXIT 3

times to return to

SAMPLE menu

SAMPLE RANGE = 50.000 PPM CO =X.XXX

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX

<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:NOX

NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

190

STEP FOUR:

Perform the converter efficiency calculation procedure:

SAMPLE NO2 STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL STB = XXX.X PPM OX =X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL CE FACTOR:1.000 Gain

1.0000 ENTREXIT

Press EXIT 3 times

top return to the

SAMPLE display

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

SAM PLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Set the Display to show

the NO2 STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the

measurement

Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow NO2 to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NO2 STB

falls below 0.5 ppm

and the ENTR button

appears.

This may take several

minutes.

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX =XXX.X

< TST TST > ENTR SETUP

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

M-P CAL CE FACTOR:1.012 Gain

1.0012 ENTR EXIT

When ENTR is

pressed, the ratio of

observed NO2

concentration to

expected NO2

concentration is

calculated and

stored.

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

191

5.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION

The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model

T200H/M NOX analyzer.

If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the

instruments analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should

be carried out for each parameter.

 Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1

 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Section 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges

STEP ONE:

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below.

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Source of

SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

Instrument

Chassis

Sample

Exhaust

Span Point

Zero Air

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span

Concentration

Filter

External Zero

Air Scrubber

VENT if not

vented at

calibrator

MODEL T700

Gas Dilution

Calibrator

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

Figure 5-2: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A)

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

192

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Source of

SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

VENT

Instrument

Chassis

Sample

Exhaust

High Span Point

Low Span Point

Zero Air

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span

Concentration

Calibrated NO

at LOW Span

Concentration

Filter

External Zero

Air Scrubber

VENT

On/Off

Valves

Figure 5-3: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

193

STEP TWO:

Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations.

These should be 80% of range of concentration values likely to be encountered in this

application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog

outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set

for that output (see Section 4.13.4)

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc

0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOX & NO span concentration

values automatically default to

80.0 Conc.

If this is not the the concentration of

the span gas being used, toggle

these buttons to set the correct

concentration of the NOX and NO

calibration gases.

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to

the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to

the

CONCENTRATION

MENU.

If using NO span gas

in addition to NOX

repeat last step.

Note The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the

same value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not

entered properly in the conversion efficiency setting. When setting

expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas

source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

194

STEP THREE:

Perform Zero/Span Calibration:

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

EXIT at this point

returns to the

SAMPLE menu.

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the NO/NOx

measurement

Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

The SPAN key now appears

during the transition from

zero to span.

You may see both keys.

If either the ZERO or SPAN

buttons fail to appear see

Section 11 for

troubleshooting tips.

Analyzer continues to

cycle through NOx,

NO, and NO2

measurements

throughout this

procedure.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

195

5.4. CALIBRATION CHECKS

Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response

curve, are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the

analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration,

follow these steps.

STEP ONE:

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7.2 or 7.3.

STEP TWO:

Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure:

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

The ZERO and/or SPAN

keys will appear at various

points of this process.

It is not necessary to press

them.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the NO/NOx

measurement

Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

Allow span gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

Analyzer display

continues to cycle

through all of the

available gas

measurements

throughout this

procedure.

Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point

readings

Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point

readings

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

196

5.5. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES

Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero/Span Valve option are similar to that

described in Section 7.2, except that:

 Zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span

gas inlets rather than through the sample inlet.

 The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated

keys (CALZ & CALS)

If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the

instruments analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should

be carried out for each parameter.

 Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1

 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Section 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges

STEP ONE:

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel as

shown below.

VENT here if input

is pressurized

Source of

SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

Instrument

Chassis

Sample

Exhaust

Span Point

Zero Air

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span

Concentration

Filter

External Zero

Air Scrubber

VENT if not

vented at

calibrator

MODEL T700

Gas Dilution

Calibrator

MODEL 701

Zero Gas

Generator

Figure 5-4: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

197

STEP TWO:

Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations.

Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of

concentration values likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory

setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog outputs is to be set to transmit

concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc

0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOX & NO span concentration

values automatically default to

80.0 Conc.

If this is not the the concentration of

the span gas being used, toggle

these buttons to set the correct

concentration of the NOX and NO

calibration gases.

EXIT ignores the new

setting and returns to

the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to

the

CONCENTRATION

MENU.

If using NO span gas

in addition to NOX

repeat last step.

Note The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the

same value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not

entered properly in the conversion efficiency setting. When setting

expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas

source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

198

STEP THREE:

Perform Zero/Span Calibration:

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

EXIT at this point

returns to the

SAMPLE menu.

Press ENTR to changes

the OFFSET & SLOPE

values for both the NO

and NOx measurements.

Press EXIT to leave the

calibration unchanged and

return to the previous

menu.

Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the NO/NOx

measurement

Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT

Analyzers enters SPAN cal

mode and the SPAN key

appears.

You may see both

keysduring the transition

from ZERO to SPAN modes.

If either the ZERO or SPAN

buttons fail to appear see

Section 11 for

troubleshooting tips.

Analyzer continues to

cycle through NOx,

NO, and NO2

measurements

throughout this

procedure.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

Analyzers enters

ZERO cal

mode.

SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

199

5.6. CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES

Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve option are similar to that described in

Section 7.4, except that zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the

zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources.

Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response

curve, are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the

analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration,

follow these steps.

To perform a manual calibration check with zero/span valve:

STEP ONE:

Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown in section 7-4.

STEP TWO:

Perform the zero/span check.

The ZERO and/or SPAN

keys will appear at various

points of this process.

It is not necessary to press

them.

Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test

function.

This function calculates

the stability of the NO/NOx

measurement Toggle TST> button until ...

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

Allow span gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB

falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several

minutes.

Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point

readings Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point

readings

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

Analyzers enters

ZERO cal

mode.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX

NOX O2 ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT Analyzers enters

SPAN cal

mode.

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX

<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT

ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT Return to

SAMPLE

Display

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT Return to

SAMPLE

Display

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

200

5.7. CALIBRATION WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURES

Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear

panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be

found in Section 4.15.1.2.

When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches

into zero, low span or high span mode and internal zero/span valves (if installed) will be

automatically switched to the appropriate configuration. The remote calibration contact

closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain

closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in

the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed.

If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (Section 5.8)

feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the T200H/M will not re-

calibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point, the new calibration

values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode. If the AutoCal

attribute CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode,

leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

201

5.8. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (AUTOCAL)

The AutoCal feature allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve

options by using the analyzer’s internal time of day clock. The AutoCal feature is only

available on the front panel menu (ACAL) if either the zero/span valve or the IZS

option is installed.

AutoCal operates by executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration

modes of the analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to

program and run up to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each

sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled:

Table 5-2: AutoCal Modes

MODE BEHAVIOR

DISABLED Disables the sequence

ZERO Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check

ZERO-LO1 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span

concentration calibration or check

ZERO-LO-HI1 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span

concentration calibration or check and finally a high-span point calibration or check.

ZERO-HI Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a high-span

point calibration or check.

LO1 Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check

LO-HI1 Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check

followed by a high-span point calibration or check

HI Causes the sequence to perform a high-span point calibration or check.

O2 –ZERO2 Causes the sequence to do a zero-point calibration for the O2 sensor.

O2 ZERO-SP2 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration of the or check O2 sensor followed

by a mid-span concentration calibration or check of the O2 sensor.

O2 SPAN2 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check of the O2 sensor.

1 Only applicable if analyzer is equipped with the second span point valve option (52)

2 Only applicable if instrument is equipped wit the O2 sensor option (65(.

Each mode has seven parameters to control operational details of the sequence:

Table 5-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters

PARAMETER BEHAVIOR

TIMER

ENABLED

Turns on the sequence timer

STARTING DATE Sequence will operate on Starting Date

STARTING TIME Sequence will operate at Starting Time

DELTA DAYS Number of days between each sequence trigger. If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature

will be enabled once every week on the same day.

DELTA TIME Incremental delay on each delta day that the sequence starts. If set to 0, the sequence will start

at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between

cycles.

This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each

calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration.

DURATION Duration of the each sequence step in minutes. This parameter needs to be set such that there

is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. The STABIL parameter shows if the

analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration. This parameter is logged with

calibration values in the DAS.

CALIBRATE Enable to do a true, dynamic zero or span calibration; disable to do a calibration check only.

RANGE TO CAL LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and remote

range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range modes.

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

202

The following example sets sequence #2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other

day starting at 14:00 on 01 January, 2003, lasting 30 minutes (15 for zero and 15 for

span). This sequence will start 30 minutes later each day.

Table 5-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence

MODE AND ATTRIBUTE VALUE COMMENT

SEQUENCE 2

Define sequence #2

MODE ZERO-HI

Select zero and span mode

TIMER ENABLE ON Enable the timer

STARTING DATE 01-JAN-03 Start on or after 01 January 2003

STARTING TIME 14:00 First sequence starts at 14:00 (24-hour clock format)

DELTA DAYS 2 Repeat this sequence every 2 days

DELTA TIME 00:30 Repeat sequence 30 minutes later each time

(every 2 days and 30 minutes)

DURATION 15.0

Each sequence step will last 15 minutes (total of 30 minutes when

using zero-span mode)

CALIBRATE ON

The instrument will recalculate the slope and offset values for the

NO and NOX channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence.

Please the following suggestions for programming the AutoCal feature.

 The programmed Starting Time must be 5 minutes later than the real time clock.

 Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new

sequence which is initiated from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closures will

override any sequence in progress. that two sequences with different daily

increments may eventually overlap.

 If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR

button will disappear from the display.

 With CALIBRATE turned on, the state of the internal setup variables

DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope

and offset values for the NO and NOX response each time the AutoCal program

runs. This continuous re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask

subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is

enabled, the analyzer’s test functions, slope and offset values be checked

frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures

203

To program the sample sequence shown above, follow this flow chart:

SETUP C.4 SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30

PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PP B NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG AC AL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED

NEXT MODE EXIT

SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED

PREV NEXT MODE EX IT

SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLE

NEXT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO–HI

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–HI, 1:00:00

PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT

SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02

0 4 SEP 0 3 ENTR EXIT

Toggle to

set day,

month &

year: DD-

MON-YY

SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04

–

SEP

–

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Default

value

is ON

SETUP C.4 STARTING DATE: 04

–

SEP

–

<SET SET> EDIT EX IT

Toggle to set

time: HH:MM.

This is a 24 hr

clock. PM

hours are 13

Toggle

numbers to

set

number of

days

between

procedures

367)

Togg le keys

to set

delay time for

each iteration

of the

sequence:

HH:MM

(0 – 24:00)

SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1

0 0 2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS:2

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME00:00

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME: 00:00

0 0 :3 0 ENTR EX IT

SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME:00:30

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:14:15

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

EXIT re turns

to the SETUP

SETUP C.4 DURATION:15.0 MINUTES

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 DURATION 15.0MINUTES

3 0 .0 ENTR EX IT

SETUP C.4 DURATION:30.0 MINUTES

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggle keys

to set

duration for

each

iteration of

the

sequence:

Set in

Decimal

minutes

from

0.1 – 60.0

SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF

ON ENTR EX IT

SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: ON

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggle key

between

Off and

SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 STA

TING TIME:00:00

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggle NEXT button until ...

07270B DCN6512

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

204

5.9. CALIBRATION QUALITY ANALYSIS

After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to

evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values

describe the linear response curve of the analyzer, separately for NO and NOX. The

values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality

of the calibration. To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values

of the following test functions (Section 4.2.1 or Appendix A-3), all of which are

automatically stored in the DAS channel CALDAT for data analysis, documentation

and archival.

 NO OFFS

 NO SLOPE

 NOX OFFS

 NOX SLOPE

Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 5-5 and frequently

compare them to those values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached

to your manual, which should not be significantly different. If they are, refer to the

troubleshooting Section 7.

Table 5-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation

FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE

NOX SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300

NO SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300

NOX OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV

NO OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV

The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as

well as all calibration check (zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200

data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime

history of monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero and span responses

change over time. These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of

NOX concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during

the calibration procedure. Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter

efficiency for review and documentation.

07270B DCN6512

205

6. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE

Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and

test functions built into the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are

necessary without performing unnecessary, preventative maintenance procedures. There

is, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that, when performed regularly,

will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its

lifetime. Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Section 7 of this manual.

Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or

maintenance of the analyzer or its parts.

A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the

maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Section 5.

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any

operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.

CAUTION

The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by

qualified maintenance personnel only.

6.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Table 9-1 shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the T200H/M. Please that

in certain environments with high levels of dust, humidity or pollutant levels some

maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.

07270B DCN6512

206

Table 6-1: T200H/M Preventive Maintenance Schedule

ITEM ACTION FREQUENCY

CAL

CHECK

MANUAL

SECTION DATE PERFORMED

1Particulate Filter Change filter Weekly No 9.3.1

Verify Test Functions Review and

evaluate Weekly No

9.2; Appendix

Zero/Span Check Evaluate offset and

slope Weekly -- 7.3, 7.5, 7.7

1Zero/Span

Calibration

Zero and span

calibration Every 3 months -- 7.2, 7.4, 7.6,

7.7, 7,8

NO2 Converter Replace converter

& check efficiency

Every 3 years or if

conversion efficiency

< 96%

Yes if CE

factor is

used

1External Zero Air

Scrubber (Optional) Exchange chemical Every 3 months No 3.5.3.2

1Reaction Cell

Window

Clean optics,

Change O-rings

Annually or as

necessary Yes 6.3.5

1Air Inlet Filter Of

Perma Pure Dryer

Change particle

filter Annually No 6.3.2

Pneumatic Sub-

System

Check for leaks in

gas flow paths

Annually or after

repairs involving

pneumatics

Yes on

leaks, else

7.5.1, 7.5.2

1All Critical Flow

Orifice O-Rings &

Sintered Filters

Replace Annually Yes 6.3.6

1, 2 Pump Rebuild head Annually Yes 9.3.4

Inline Exhaust

Scrubber Replace Annually No

Pmt Sensor

Hardware Calibration

Low-level hardware

calibration

On PMT/ preamp

changes & if

0.7< SLOPE >1.3

Yes 11.6.5

1 These Items are required to maintain full warranty, all other items are strongly recommended.

2 A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne API Technical Support including all instructions and required parts (the pump part number is on the label of the pump itself).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance

207

6.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS

The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their

values. Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these test functions to the

values measured on your instrument at the factory and recorded on the T200H/M Final

Test and Validation Data Form (Teledyne API part number 04490, attached to the

manual). Table 6-2 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with

time. The internal data acquisition system (DAS) is a convenient way to record and

track these changes. APICOM control software can be used to download and review

these data even from remote locations (Section 4.15.2.8 describes APICOM).

Table 6-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions

FUNCTION EXPECTED ACTUAL INTERPRETATION & ACTION

Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks

RCEL

pressure

Constant to

within ± 0.5 Slowly increasing Pump performance is degrading. Replace pump head

when pressure is above 10 in-Hg-A

Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks

Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters

SAMPLE

pressure

Constant within

atmospheric

changes Slowly increasing Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum

(developing valve failure). Check for leaks

Ozone Flow Constant to

within ± 15 Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters

Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve

PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and power

supplies

Developing light leak. Leak check.

AZERO

Constant within

±20 of check-out

value

Significantly

increasing

O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change chemical

NO2 CONC

Constant for

constant

concentrations

Slowly decreasing

signal for same

concentration

Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace

converter.

NO CONC

Constant for

constant

concentration

Decreasing over time Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL window,

change O3 air filter chemical.

6.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard

maintenance of the Model T200H/M.

6.3.1. CHANGING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER

The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It

should be replaced according to the service interval in Table 9-1 even without obvious

signs of dirt. Filters with 1 µm pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look. We

recommend to handle the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with gloves

and tweezers. We recommend not to touch any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE

07270B DCN6512

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

208

retaining ring, glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands as this may cause the pores to

clog quicker and surfaces to become dirty due to possible oils from your hands.

Figure 6-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly

To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1, follow this procedure:

1. Turn OFF the pump to prevent drawing debris into the sample line.

2. Remove the CE Mark locking screw in the center of the front panel and open the

hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly.

3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element.

We recommend to clean the glass and O-rings at least once monthly, weekly in very

polluted areas.

4. Install a new filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder.

5. Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up (important!), the glass cover,

then screw on the hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the

(visible) seal between the edge of the glass window and the O-ring to assure proper

gas tightness.

6. To fulfill CE Mark safety requirements, the front panel locking screw must be

installed at all times during operation of the analyzer.

7. Re-start the analyzer.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance

209

6.3.2. CHANGING THE O3 DRYER PARTICULATE FILTER

The air for the O3 generator passes through a Perma Pure© dryer, which is equipped with

a small particulate filter at its inlet. This filter prevents dust from entering the Perma

Pure© dryer and degrading the dryer’s performance over time. To change the filter

according to the service interval in Table 6-1:

1. Check and write down the average RCEL pressure and the OZONE flow values.

2. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.

3. Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using 5/8” and 9/16” wrenches and by

holding the actual fitting body steady with a 7/16” wrench.

Note RISK OF SIGNIFICANT LEAK

Make sure to use proper wrenches and to not turn the fitting against the

Perma Pure© dryer. This may loosen the inner tubing and cause large

leaks.

4. Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent

(TAPI part# FL-3).

Figure 6-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer

5. Holding the fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench, tighten the nut with your hands. If

necessary use a second wrench but do not over-tighten the nut.

6. Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer.

7. Check the O3 flow rate, it should be around 250 cm³/min ± 15. Check the RCEL

pressure, it should be the same value as before.

07270B DCN6512

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

210

6.3.3. MAINTAINING THE EXTERNAL SAMPLE PUMP

6.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump

The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL

pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated

locations). A pump rebuild kit is available from the factory. The part number of the

pump rebuild kit is located on the label of the pump itself. Instructions and diagrams are

included in the kit.

A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended. A span check

and re-calibration after this procedure is necessary as the response of the analyzer

changes with the RCEL pressure.

6.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber

1. Through the SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu turn OFF the OZONE

GEN OVERRIDE. Wait 10 minutes to allow pump to pull room air

through scrubber before proceeding to step 2.

2. Disconnect exhaust line from analyzer.

3. Turn off (unplug) analyzer sample pump.

4. Disconnect tubing from (NOx or charcoal) scrubber cartridge.

5. Remove scrubber from system.

6. Dispose of according to local laws.

7. Install new scrubber into system.

8. Reconnect tubing to scrubber and analyzer.

9. Turn on pump.

10. Through the SETUP menu (per Step 1 above) turn ON the OZONE

GEN OVERRIDE.

Note The inline exhaust scrubber is strictly intended for Nitric Acid and NO2

only.

CAUTION!

Do NOT attempt to change the contents of the inline exhaust scrubber

cartridge; change the entire cartridge.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance

211

6.3.4. CHANGING THE NO2 CONVERTER

The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, see Figure 3-5 for location,

and Figure 6-3 for the assembly. The converter is designed for replacement of the

cartridge only, the heater with built-in thermocouple can be reused.

1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the cover and allow the converter to cool.

2. Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until

the converter cartridge can be seen.

CAUTION

THE CONVERTER OPERATES AT 315º C. SEVERE BURNS CAN RESULT IF THE

ASSEMBLY IS NOT ALLOWED TO COOL. DO NOT HANDLE THE ASSEMBLY UNTIL

IT IS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. THIS MAY TAKE SEVERAL HOURS.

3. Remove the tube fittings from the converter.

4. Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter. Unscrew the

grounding clamp of the power leads with a Phillips-head screw driver.

5. Remove the converter assembly (cartridge and band heater) from the can. Make a

of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge.

6. Unscrew the band heater and loosen it, take out the old converter cartridge.

Figure 6-3: NO2 Converter Assembly

7. Wrap the band heater around the new replacement cartridge and tighten the screws

using a high-temperature anti-seize agent such as copper paste. Make sure to use

proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter tubes.

8. Replace the converter assembly, route the cables through the holes in the can and

reconnect them properly. Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads

for safe operation.

9. Re-attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover.

07270B DCN6512

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

212

10. Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer.

11. Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, then re-calibrate the instrument.

6.3.5. CLEANING THE REACTION CELL

The reaction cell should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests. A dirty reaction

cell will cause excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low response or a

combination of all. To clean the reaction cell, remove it from the sensor housing: refer

to Section 7.6.5. for an overview of the entire sensor assembly. Use the following guide

to clean the reaction cell:

1. Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to Figure 6-4 for the

following procedure.

2. Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes

from the reaction cell. Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable.

3. Remove four screws holding the reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell

and manifold out as shown in the inset of Figure 6-4.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance

213

Figure 6-4: Reaction Cell Assembly

1. The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly

and the black plastic reaction cell with window, stainless steel cylinder and O-rings.

2. The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder) and optical glass

filter should be cleaned with methanol and a clean tissue and dried thereafter.

3. Usually it is not necessary to clean the ozone flow orifice since it is protected by a

sintered filter. If tests show that cleaning is necessary, refer to Section 6.3.6 on

how to perform maintenance on the critical flow orifice.

4. Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and

require a special tool for reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles

attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath.

5. Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing.

Reconnect pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic

sensor assembly and the cleaning procedure is complete.

6. After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone

supply air filter chemical.

7. After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days

as the reaction cell window conditions. This is normal and does not require another

cleaning.

07270B DCN6512

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

214

6.3.6. CHANGING CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES

There are several critical flow orifices installed in the T200H/M, Figure 6-4 shows one

of the two most important orifice assemblies, located on the reaction cell. Refer to

Section 8.3.3 for a detailed description on functionality and locations. Despite the fact

that these flow restrictors are protected by sintered stainless steel filters, they can, on

occasion, clog up, particularly if the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an

environment with very fine, sub-micron particle-size dust.

The T200H/M introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy. In

fact, it is recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize

downtime and swap orifices in a matter of a few minutes. Appendix B lists several

complete spare part kits for this purpose.

To replace a critical flow orifice, do the following:

1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump. Remove the analyzer cover

and locate the reaction cell (Figure 3-7 for location in chassis, and Figure 6-4 for

exploded view of assembly).

2. Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell

3. For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 6-4): Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9/16”

wrench. This part holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in

Figure 6-5. Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers.

4. For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in

Figure 6-5, but without the orifice holder, part number 04090, and bottom O-ring

OR34 and with an NPT fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting. After taking off the

connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting.

Figure 6-5: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly

5. Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings

and the orifice. For the vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or

pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance

215

6. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and the critical flow orifice.

7. Re-assemble the flow control assembly with new the parts (see Appendix B for part

number or replacement kit) as shown in Figure 6-5 and re-connect them to the

reaction cell manifold or the vacuum manifold.

8. Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump and - after a warm-up period

of 30 minutes, carry out a leak test as described in Section 7.5.

6.3.7. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS

When re-assembled or operated improperly, the T200H/M can develop small leaks

around the PMT, which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT

housing. To find such light leaks, follow the below procedures. CAUTION: this

procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed. This

procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel.

1. Scroll the TEST functions to PMT.

2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer.

3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra

care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not

drop screws or tools into a running analyzer!

4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet

fitting and at all of the joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing.

The PMT value should not respond to the light, the PMT signal should remain

steady within its usually noise.

5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction

cell mounting screws or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE

tubing (this tubing will fade with time and become transparent). Often, light leaks

are also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.

6. Carefully replace the analyzer cover.

7. If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (Section 7.5).

07270B DCN6512

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

216

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

217

7. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance

problems with the analyzer.

CAUTION

The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by qualified

maintenance personnel only.

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with

the analyzer open and running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical

shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not

drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. Do

not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while

operating inside the analyzer. Use common sense when operating

inside a running analyzer.

7.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and

repaired. During operation, the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and

provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing

monitoring operations.

A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five

steps:

 any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.

 Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. any

major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.

 Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the electronic

communication channels are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies

are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board. that

the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of

the corresponding test points on the relay board.

 Suspect a leak first! Technical Support data indicate that the majority of all problems

are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer (including the

external pump), the source of zero air or span gases or the sample gas delivery

system. Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external

gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm, etc.

 Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.6.3. to confirm that the analyzer’s vital

functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay board, PMT cooler, etc.). See

Figure 3-5 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer.

See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

218

7.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES

The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message

being displayed on the front panel. Table 4-3 lists warning messages, along with their

meaning and recommended corrective action.

It should be d that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it

is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay

board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures

referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be

performed.

The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the red

FAULT LED, displaying the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR

button (press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than

one warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the

message. The following display/touch screen examples provide an illustration of each:

The analyzer also issues an alert via the serial port(s).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

219

To view or clear a warning messages press:

SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX = XXX.X

TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

If warning messages reappear,

perform a combined error analysis

until the problem is resolved. Do

not repeatedly clear warnings

without corrective action.

Press CLR to clear the current

warning message. If more than

one warning is active, the next

message will take its place.

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP

SAMPLE SYS

EM RESET NOX = XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP

<TST TST> buttonss replaced

with TEST button. Pressing TEST

suppresss warning messages.

MSG indicates that warning

messages are active.

Figure 7-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages

7.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS

Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from

the front panel, can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when

combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s theory of operation (Section

8). We recommend using the APICOM remote control program to download, graph and

archive TEST data for analysis and long-term monitoring of diagnostic data ( Section

4.15.2.8).

The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Appendix A-3. The actual

values for these test functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final

Test and Validation Data Sheet, which was shipped with the instrument. Values outside

the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems.

Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly

changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a

failure or a maintenance item. A problem report worksheet has been provided in

Appendix C (Teledyne API part number 04503) to assist in recording the value of these

test functions. The following table contains some of the more common causes for these

values to be out of range.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

220

Table 7-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values

TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S)

NOX STB Unstable concentrations; leaks

SAMPLE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice

OZONE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice

PMT Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks)

NORM PMT AutoZero too high

AZERO Leaks; malfunctioning NO/NOx or AutoZero valve; O3 air filter cartridge exhausted

HVPS HVPS broken; calibration off; preamp board circuit problems

RCELL TEMP Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out

BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor

PMT TEMP TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power supply

IZS TEMP (OPTION) Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out

MOLY TEMP Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board communication

(I2C bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration

RCEL (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices

SAMP (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet

overpressure;

NOX SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span gas

concentration incorrect; leaks

NOX OFF Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off

NO SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks

NO OFFS Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off

TIME OF DAY Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time?

7.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION

The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a

thorough understanding of the instrument’s theory of operation (Section 8) are useful for

troubleshooting in three ways:

 The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical

inputs and outputs.

 All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can

be manually changed.

 Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled.

This allows to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of

the analyzer. Figure 7-2 shows an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view

the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control

signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

221

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF

NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O JUMP TO:0

0 0 ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O JUMP TO:7

0 7 ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO 7) CAL LED=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT

Enter 07 to Jump

to Signal 7:

(CAL_LED)

Toggle to turn the

CAL LED ON/OFF

Figure 7-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

222

7.1.4. STATUS LED’S

Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LED) are located inside the instrument to

determine if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C communications bus and the relay board are

functioning properly.

7.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog)

A red LED labeled DS5 in the upper portion of the motherboard (Figure 11-3), just to

the right of the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After

power-up, DS5 should flash on and off about once per second. If characters are visible

on the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become

corrupted. Contact Technical Support because it may be possible to recover operation of

the analyzer. If 30 - 60 seconds after a restart neither DS5 is flashing nor any characters

are visible on the front panel display, the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be

defective. If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on, the CPU board is likely locked

up and the analyzer should not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel).

Motherboard

CPU Status LED

Figure 7-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator

7.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator

The CPU board has two red LEDs, the lower of which is the watchdog timer (the device

that pulses the motherboard watchdog). This LED is labeled LED2 and blinks about

twice per second (twice as fast as the motherboard LED) when operating normally.

LED1 above LED2 should always be on. However, both CPU LEDs only indicate if the

CPU is powered up properly and generally working. The lower LED can continue to

blink even if the CPU or firmware are locked up.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

223

7.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs

The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED,

labeled D1, which indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This LED is the

left-most in LED row 1 in the center of the relay board when looking at the electronic

components. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with the

DIAG menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by manually switching devices

on and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off.

Figure 7-4 illustrates the relay board layout including the two rows of LEDs,

Table 11-2 lists the individual LED functions and the menu tree below shows how to

access the manual control of the I/O functions. that only some or the LEDs may be

functional in your analyzer model; the relay board layout is conceptualized for spare,

future functionality and is also common to many of the E-series analyzers.

Power

Connection

for DC

Heaters

Status LED’s

(D2 through D16)

DC Power Supply

Test Points

Watchdog

Status LED (D1)

(JP5)

Thermocouple

Configuration

Jumpers

Thermocouple

Signal Output

I2C Connector

Shutter Control

Connector

(T100 Series Only)

alve Control

Drivers

Pump Power

Output

(JP7)

Pump AC

Configuration

Jumper

AC Power

AC Heater

Power Output

C Power Output for

Optional O2 sensors

(JP6)

Main AC Heater

Configuration Jumpers

(JP2)

AC Configuration Jumpers

for Optional IZS Valve

Heaters & O2Sensors

Solid State AC

Power Relays

(Not Present on

P/N 45230100)

DC Power

Distribution

Connectors

alve Option

Control

Connector

(J15)

TC1 Input

(J16)

TC2 Input

Figure 7-4: Relay Board PCA

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

224

Table 7-2: Relay Board Status LEDs

LED COLOR FUNCTION FAULT

STATUS INDICATED FAILURE(S)

LED ROW 1

D1 Red

Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus

operation.

Continuously

ON or OFF

Failed or halted CPU; faulty motherboard,

keyboard, relay board; wiring between

motherboard, keyboard or relay board; +5

V power supply

D2 Yellow Relay 0 - reaction cell heater Continuously

ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken

D3 Yellow Relay 1 - NO2 converter heater Continuously

ON or OFF Heater broken, thermocouple broken

D4 Yellow Relay 2 - manifold heater Continuously

ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken

D7 1 Green Valve 0 - zero/span valve status Continuously

ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip

broken

D8 1 Green Valve 1 - sample/cal valve status Continuously

ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip

broken

D9 Green Valve 2 - auto-zero valve status Continuously

ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip

broken

D10 Green Valve 3 - NO/NOx valve status Continuously

ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip

broken

LED ROW 2

D6 Yellow

Relay 4 – (O2 sensor heater

T200H/M) N/A N/A

D11- 16 Green Spare N/A N/A

1 Only active for instruments with Z/S valve options installed

To enter the signal I/O test mode to manually control I/O functions such as valves and

heaters, press the following touchscreen button sequence while observing the relay

board LEDs:

SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818

8 1 8 ENTREXIT

DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF

NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O JUMP TO:0

0 0 ENTR EXIT

DIAG I/O JUMP TO:25

0 7 ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO 07) CAL_LED=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT

Enter 07 to Jump

to Signal 7:

(CAL_LED)

Toggle to turn the

CAL LED ON/OFF

See Menu Tree

A-6 in Appendix

A.1 for a list of

I/O Signals

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

225

7.2. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS

The T200H/M has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone

supply air. With zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth

(span gas) flow path, but either one of those is only controlled by critical flow orifices

and not displayed on the front panel or stored to the DAS. The full flow diagrams of the

standard configuration and with options installed (Appendix D, document 04574) help in

trouble-shooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into three

categories:

 Flow is too high

 Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable

 Flow is zero (no flow)

When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate

without relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow

meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 4.13.7.5 is essential.

The flow diagrams found in a variety locations within this manual depicting the T200H

and T200M in their standard configuration and with options installed can help in

trouble-shooting flow problems. For your convenience they are collected here in

Sections 11.2.1 (T200H) and 11.2.2 (T200M)

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

226

7.2.1. T200H INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Figure 7-5: T200H – Basic Internal Gas Flow

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

227

Figure 7-6: T200H – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

228

Figure 7-7: T200H – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

229

7.2.2. T200M INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS

VACUUM

PRESSURE

SENSOR

SAMPLE

PRESSURE

SENSOR

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

PERMAPURE

DRYER

NO/NOX

VALVE

AUTOZERO

VALVE

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

REACTION

CELL

PMT

COM

Figure 7-8: T200M – Basic Internal Gas Flow

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

230

Figure 7-9: T200M – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

231

VACUUM

PRESSURE

SENSOR

SAMPLE

PRESSURE

SENSOR

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

PERMAPURE

DRYER

NO/NOX

VALVE

AUTOZERO

VALVE

REACTION

CELL

PMT

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

COMNO

COM

Figure 7-10: T200M – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A

7.2.3. ZERO OR LOW FLOW PROBLEMS

7.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low

The T200H/M does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a

differential pressure between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit

will display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on the front panel display and the

respective test function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message applies to

both a flow rate of zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (200-600

cm³/min; 300-700 cm³/min with O2 option installed).

If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample

pump is operating and configured for the proper AC voltage. Whereas the T200H/M

can be internally configured for two different power regimes (100-120 V and 220-240

V, either 50 or 60 Hz), the external pump is physically different for each of three power

regimes (100 V / 50 Hz, 115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V / 50 Hz). If the pump is not running,

use an AC Voltmeter to make sure that the pump is supplied with the proper AC power.

If AC power is supplied properly, but the pump is not running, replace the pump.

Note Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this Section refer to

operation of the analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be

adjusted for elevated locations, as the ambient pressure decreases by

about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

232

If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following:

 Check for actual sample flow. To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the

sample tube from the sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument. Make sure

that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode. Place a finger over the inlet and see if it

gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a flow meter to measure the

actual flow. If there is proper flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), contact Technical

Support. If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step.

 Check pressures. Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea

level (adjust as necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about

1” below ambient atmospheric pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 in-

Hg-A. The T200H/M will calculate a sample flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL

pressure but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in.

 If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump does

not operate properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does not get any

vacuum.

 If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or ~20”

on sample and 15” on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow path and

vacuum, most likely through the Perma Pure dryer flow paths. See troubleshooting

the Perma Pure dryer later in this Section.

 If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and

<10 in-Hg-A, respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak check

as described in Section 7.5.

 If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is low

when it is connected to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal to the

analyzer but likely caused by the gas source such as calibrators/generators, empty

gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas lines.

 If an Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS.

If the sample flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve.

 If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as

described in Section 7.5.2.

7.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low

If there is zero or a low (<200 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE

FLOW WARNING message on the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 200

cm³/min for the actual ozone flow as measured by the internal mass flow meter. In this

case, carry out the following steps:

 Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by using an external flow meter

to the inlet port of the dryer. This inlet port is inside the analyzer at the end of the

plastic particle filter (Section 6.3.2 for illustration). If there is nominal flow (see

Table 10-3 for flow rates), consult Technical Support as there is a problem with the

firmware or electronics.

 If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL

pressure should be below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level. If it is above 10”, rebuild the

pump (Section 6.3.3). Check the spare parts list in Appendix B on how to order

pump rebuild kits.

 Check if the particle filter is clogged. Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this

improves the flow. Be very cautious about handling the Perma Pure dryer fittings -

refer to Section 6.3.2 on proper handling instructions. If the filter is clogged, replace

it with a new unit. If taking off this filter does not solve the problem, continue to the

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

233

next step. Do not leave the Perma Pure dryer without filter for more than a few

seconds, as you may draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer.

 A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining

critical orifice is located) may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air

through a leak after the flow meter). Check for leaks as described in Section 7.5.

Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.

 The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or

sintered filter within the orifice assembly. The orifice that sets the ozone flow is

located on the reaction cell. Check the actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube

from the reaction cell and measuring the flow going into the cell. If this flow is

correct (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), the orifice works properly. If this flow is low,

replace or clean the orifice. The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy

replacement of the orifice, refer to Section 6.3.6 on how to do this. Appendix B lists

a spare part kit with a complete orifice assembly that allows a quick replacement

with minimum instrument down-time. The clogged orifice can then be cleaned while

the instrument is running with the replacement.

7.2.4. HIGH FLOW

Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11%

of the nominal flow) should not occur in the T200H/M unless a pressurized sample, zero

or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports. Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just

before the analyzer inlet ports.

When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would

indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very

unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were replaced with an orifice of

wrong specifications. If the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend to

re-calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 4.13.7.5, followed by

a regular review of these flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly.

7.2.5. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW BUT ANALYZER REPORTS

CORRECT FLOW

that the T200H/M analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low

actual sample flow through the reaction cell. The sample flow on the T200H/M is only

calculated from the sample pressure and critical flow condition is verified from the

difference between sample pressure and vacuum pressure. If the critical flow orifice is

partially or completely clogged, both the sample and vacuum pressures are still within

their nominal ranges (the pump keeps pumping, the sample port is open to the

atmosphere), but there is no flow possible through the reaction cell.

Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also

be diagnosed by evaluating the two pressure values. Since there is no longer any flow,

the sample pressure should be equal to ambient pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A

higher than the sample pressure under normal operation. The reaction cell pressure, on

the other hand, is significantly lower than under normal operation, because the pump no

longer has to remove the sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better. Those

two indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a clogged sample

orifice.

The T200H/M features a orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow

orifices very easy, refer to Section 6.3.6 on how to change the sample orifices and

Appendix B for part numbers of these assemblies. Again, monitoring the pressures and

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

234

flows regularly will reveal such problems, because the pressures would slowly or

suddenly change from their nominal, mean values. Teledyne API recommends to

review all test data once per week and to do an exhaustive data analysis for test and

concentration values once per month, paying particular attention to sudden or gradual

changes in all parameters that are supposed to remain constant, such as the flow rates.

7.3. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS

7.3.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS

Negative concentration values can be caused by any of several reasons:

 A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas

and the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the

analyzer’s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a

few seconds at a time down to -0.2 ppm, but should randomly alternate with

similarly high, positive values. The T200H/M has a built-in Auto-zero function,

which should take care of most of these deviations from zero, but may yield a small,

residual, negative value. If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the

Auto-zero function was accidentally turned off using the remote variables in

Appendix A-2. In this case, the sensitivity of the analyzer may be drifting negative.

 A corruption of the Auto-zero filter may also cause negative concentrations. If a

short, high noise value was detected during the AutoZero cycle, that higher reading

will alter the Auto-zero filter value. As the value of the Auto-zero filter is subtracted

from the current PMT response, it will produce a negative concentration reading.

High AutoZero readings can be caused by:

 a leaking or stuck AutoZero valve (replace the valve),

 by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the PMT

output pin during the AutoZero cycle (replace the preamplifier),

 by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT

readings (clean the reaction cell),

 by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset (repair the

faulty PMT cooler). After fixing the cause of a high Auto-zero filter reading, the

T200H/M will take 15 minutes for the filter to clear itself, or

 by an exhausted chemical in the ozone scrubber cartridge (Section 6.3.4).

 Miscalibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If the

zero air contained some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero

air scrubber) and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the

analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no

NOx. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero gas

that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in

supply tubing or user not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems).

 If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are

greater than 150 mV, a reaction cell contamination is indicated. Clean the reaction

cell according to Section 6.3.5.

7.3.2. NO RESPONSE

If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas

is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

235

 Check if the ozone generator is turned on. Usually, the analyzer issues a warning

whenever the ozone generator is turned off. Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR,

then scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE and see if it shows ON. If it shows

OFF, turn it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu. If this is done and the ozone flow is

correct, the analyzer should be properly supplied with ozone unless the generator

itself is broken. A more detailed description of the ozone generator subsystem

checks are in Section 11.5.17.

 Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the

range value to the analyzer.

 Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values.

 Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.

 Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the

diagnostics menu, see Section 4.13.7.3. If this test produces a concentration

reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal path is correct.

 Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu,

see Section 4.13.7.2. If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT

sensor and the electronic signal path are operating properly. If the T200H/M

passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable of detecting light and

processing the signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the

pneumatics or the ozone generator.

 If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOX valve and the

NO2 converter for proper operation.

7.3.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN

Leaks in the T200H/M or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most

common source of unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.

 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5. Consider

pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T200H/M such as a

change in zero air source (ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero

air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient

air leaking into the span gas line.

 Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this Section) to make

sure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air.

 Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are

correct and steady.

 Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.

7.3.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN BUTTON

In general, the T200H/M will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual

value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the

calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when carrying out a span calibration, the

actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration,

which can have several reasons.

 Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas

concentration in the CONC sub-menu.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

236

 Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate. This can be done by comparing

the source with another calibrated analyzer, or by having the NOx source verified by

an independent traceable photometer.

 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5. Leaks can

dilute the span gas and, hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may

fall short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC sub-menu.

 If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was

accidentally altered by the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the

analyzer back into its proper range of expected values. One possible indicator of

this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range (0.7-1.3 for

slope, -20 mV to 150 mV for offsets). See Section 13 on how to carry out a low-

level hardware calibration.

7.3.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO BUTTON

In general, the T200H/M will not display certain touchscreen buttons whenever the

actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the

calibration menu does not show a ZERO button when carrying out a zero calibration, the

actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point (as per

last calibration), which can have several reasons.

 Confirm that there is a good source of zero air.

 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for

leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5.

7.3.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE

The T200H/M was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to

within 1% of full scale. Common causes for non-linearity are:

 Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air

or span gas to the current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentra-

tions as the linearity test is performed. Check for leaks as described in Section 7.5.

 The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly

when using low concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less

than 10% of the full scale flow on either flow controller, you may need to purchase

lower concentration standards.

 The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. Labeled

concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance.

 The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample

lines or reaction cell.

 Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common).

 Dilution air contains sample or span gas.

 Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator. Generator system

needs to be cleaned and dried with dry supply air. Check the Perma Pure dryer for

leaks. This mostly affects linearity at the low end.

 Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOX exhaust from this or other analyzers.

Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust.

 Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the

sample inlet port. Also, if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

237

enough sample gas, the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line. Make sure to

create and properly vent excess span gas.

 Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances. PTFE or related

materials can act as permeation devices. In fact, the permeable membrane of NO2

permeation tubes is made of PTFE. When using very long supply lines (> 1 m)

between high concentrations span gases and the dilution system, oxygen from

ambient air can diffuse into the line and react with NO to form NO2. This reaction is

dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO concentration,

hence, affects linearity only at high NO levels. Using stainless steel for long span

gas supply lines avoids this problem.

7.3.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY

If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value

reported on the front panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This

becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range.

Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually. See

Section 4.13.6.2 for a detailed description of this procedure.

7.3.8. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN NO AND NOX SLOPES

If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more

than 1%), consider the following two problems

 NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order

of 1-2% of the NO value. This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the

NO2 impurity in NO is known, it can easily be accounted for by setting the expected

values for NO and NO2 accordingly to different values, e.g., 0.448 ppm NO and 0.45

ppm NOX. This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with balance air

instead of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O). The

oxygen in the air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time.

 The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to

different values. If a gas with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias. See

Section 7.2 on how to set expected concentration values.

 The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even

though the conversion efficiency is 1.0. The actual conversion efficiency needs to

match the parameter set in the CAL menu. See Section 5.2.5 for more information

on this feature.

7.4. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS

Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is

monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and

resolve. The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic

problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

238

7.4.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE

Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample

supply or the analyzer itself. Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free

and carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this Section.

Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high

voltage power supply and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on trouble-

shooting these components.

7.4.2. SLOW RESPONSE

If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas,

check for the following:

 Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.

 Sample inlet line is too long.

 Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check.

 Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary,

change orifices (Section 6.3.6).

 Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon

materials only. Porous materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow

changes in response.

 Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell.

 Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until

stability is low.

 Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable.

Wait until stability is low.

 NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature.

7.4.3. AUTO ZERO WARNINGS

Auto-zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an auto-zero cycle is lower than

–20 mV or higher than 200 mV. The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the auto-

zero reading when the warning occurs.

 If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the auto-zero valve is operating

properly. To do so, use the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the

valve on and off. Listen if the valve is switching, see if the respective LED on the

relay board is indicating functionality. Scroll the TST functions until PMT is

displayed and observe the PMT value change between the two valve states.

 If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a

minute under normal operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL I/O

menu), the PMT value should drop from its nominal reading for span gas level

measurements to less than 150 mV and the LED on the relay board should light up

when the valve is activated. If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than

150 mV, the valve is probably leaking across its ports. In this case, replace the

valve. If the PMT value does not change at all, the valve is probably not switching

at all. Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to the valve should turn on and off

when measured with a voltmeter).

 that it takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive auto-

zero values when supplying high concentrations of span gas.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

239

 Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for AutoZero

could be the ozone air filter cartridge, if its contents has been exhausted and needs

to be replaced. This cartridge filters chemicals that can cause chemiluminescence

and, if saturated, these chemicals can break through to the reaction cell, causing an

erroneously high AutoZero value (background noise).

 A dirty reaction cell can cause high AutoZero values. Clean the reaction cell

according to Section 6.3.5.

 Finally,

a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high

AZERO value. The HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show

nominal values between 450 and 800 V. Check the low-level hardware calibration

of the preamplifier board and, if necessary, recalibrate exactly as described in

Section 13 in order to minimize the HVPS.

7.5. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT

The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying

possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases

this included a list of possible causes and, in some cases, quick solutions or at least a

pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes how to

determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being

investigated.

7.5.1. SIMPLE LEAK CHECK USING VACUUM AND PUMP

Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; This section presents a

simple leak check, whereas Section 7.5.2 details a more thorough procedure. The

method described here is easy, fast and detects, but does not locate, most leaks. It also

verifies the sample pump condition.

 Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize.

 Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight).

 After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, the SAMP (sample

pressure) and the RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings.

 If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the instrument is

free of large leaks. It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks.

 If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition. A new pump will

create a pressure reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level).

7.5.2. DETAILED LEAK CHECK USING PRESSURE

If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to

Teledyne API part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and

pressure gauge to create both over-pressure and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of

pressurized gas, with the two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and

pressure gauge may be used.

Note Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a

pressurized system, do not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause

soap solution to be sucked into the instrument, contaminating inside

surfaces. Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

240

 Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.

 Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as

described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.

 Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port. If

zero/span valves are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and span gas

ports and plug them (Figure 3-4). Cap the DFU particle filter on the Perma Pure

dryer (Figure 6-2).

 Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time

to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each tube

connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap bubble solution, looking for fine

bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply

vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not

exceed 15 psi pressure.

 If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on

each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the

normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution.

 Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated

pressure should be less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is

turned off.

 Clean surfaces from soap solution, re-connect the sample and pump lines and

replace the instrument cover. Restart the analyzer.

7.5.3. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK

Note Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between

0 and 1000 cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do

not use the built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the

instrument. This value is only calculated, not measured

Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the

front panel display shows only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow

may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most likely critical flow orifices or

sintered filters. To perform a sample flow check:

 Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in

Figure 3-4.

 Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel.

Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.

 The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be within  10% of

the nominal values shown in Table 10-3.

 Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

241

7.5.4. AC POWER CONFIGURATION

The T-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power

regimes. As long as instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either

50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display.

Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should

turn on as soon as the power is supplied.

On the other hand, some of the analyzer’s non-digital components, such as the pump and

the various AC powered heaters must be properly configured for the type of power being

supplied to the instrument. Figure 7-11 shows the location of the various sets of AC

Configuration jumpers.

JP2

Main AC Heater

Configuration

JP6

O2 Sensor

Connection.

(optional)

JP7

Pump

Configuration

Figure 7-11: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers

Functions of the Relay PCA include:

 handling all AC and DC power distribution including power to the pump.

 a set of jumpers that connect AC power to heaters included in several optional

items, such as the zero/span valve options and the O2 sensor option available on

the T200H/M analyzers.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

242

7.5.4.1. AC Configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)

AC power configuration for internal pumps is set using Jumper set JP7 (see Figure 7-4

for the location of JP7).

Table 7-3: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)

LINE

POWER

LINE

FREQUENCY

JUMPER

COLOR FUNCTION

JUMPER

BETWEEN

PINS

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8

60 HZ WHITE

Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8

110VAC

115 VAC

50 HZ1 BLACK

Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9

Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6

60 HZ BROWN Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8

Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6

220VAC

240 VAC 50 HZ1 BLUE Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8

1 A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but has no function on the T200H/M

analyzers.

110 VAC /115 VAC 220 VAC /240 VAC

May be present on 50 Hz version of jumper

set, but not functional

200H/M

Figure 7-12: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

243

7.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2)

Power configuration for the AC the standard heaters is set using Jumper set JP2 (see

Figure 7-4 for the location of JP2).

Table 7-4: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)

LINE VOLTAGE JUMPER

COLOR HEATER(S)

JUMPER

BETWEEN

PINS

FUNCTION

1 to 8 Common

Reaction Cell / Sample

Chamber Heaters

2 to 7 Neutral to Load

3 to 10 Common

Mini Hi-Con

Converter 4 to 9 Neutral to Load

3 to 10 Common

Moly Converter 4 to 9 Neutral to Load

5 to 12 Common

110 VAC / 115 VAC

50Hz & 60 Hz WHITE

Bypass Manifold 1 6 to 11 Neutral to Load

Reaction Cell / Sample

Chamber Heaters 1 to 7 Load

Hi Concentration

Converter 3 to 9 Load

Moly Converter 3 to 9 Load

220 VAC / 240 VAC

50Hz & 60 Hz BLUE

Bypass Manifold 1 5 to 11 Load

1 Bypass manifold is built into the reaction cell

Reaction Cell or

Sample Chamber

Heaters

Mini Hi-Con or

Mo ly Con verter

Heaters

T200M/H

Bypass Manifold

Heater

110 VAC /115 VAC

Reaction Cell or

Sample Chamber

Heaters

Mini Hi-Con or

Moly Converter

Heaters

T200H/M

Bypass Manifold

Heater

220 VAC / 240 VAC

Figure 7-13: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

244

7.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6)

An O2 sensor option includes AC heaters that maintain an optimum operating

temperature for key components of those options. Jumper set JP6 is used to connect the

heaters associated with those options to AC power. Since these heaters work with

either 110/155 VAC or 220/240 VAC, there is only one jumper configuration.

Table 7-5: Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6)

JUMPER

COLOR HEATER(S) MODEL’S

USED ON1

JUMPER

BETWEEN

PINS

FUNCTION

1 to 8 Common

IZS1 Permeation Tube

Heater

100s, 200s1 &

400s 2 to 7 Neutral to Load

3 to 10 Common

RED

O2 Sensor Heater 100s & 200s 4 to 9 Neutral to Load

1 IZS option not available on the T200H/M

6 5 4 3 2 1

IZS

(option not

available on the

T200H/M)

Permeation

Tube Heater

O2Sensor

Heater

10 9

12 11 8 7

Figure 7-14: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP6)

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

245

7.5.5. DC POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS

Table 7-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code

NAME TEST POINT# COLOR DEFINITION

DGND 1 Black Digital ground

+5V 2 Red

AGND 3 Green Analog ground

+15V 4 Blue

-15V 5 Yellow

+12R 6 Purple 12 V return (ground) line

+12V 7 Orange

Table 7-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels

CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS

FROM

Test Point

POWER

SUPPLY VOLTAGE

NAME # NAME #

MIN V MAX V

PS1 +5 DGND 1 +5 2 +4.80 +5.25

PS1 +15 AGND 3 +15 4 +13.5 +16.0

PS1 -15 AGND 3 -15V 5 -14.0 -16.0

PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05

PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 +0.05

PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 +11.8 +12.5

PS2 DGND +12V Ret 6 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05

The test points are located at the top, right-hand corner of the PCA (see Figure 7-4)

7.5.6. I2C BUS

Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay

PCA & D2 on the Valve Driver PCA . Assuming that the DC power supplies are

operating properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if: D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of

the Valve Driver PCA are flashing

There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve

Driver PCA are ON/OFF constantly.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

246

7.5.7. TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Verify the functioning of the touch screen by observing the display when pressing a

touch-screen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the

DC power supplies are operating properly, but pressing a control button on the touch

screen does not change the display, any of the following may be the problem:

 The touch-screen controller may be malfunctioning.

 The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning.

You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal

program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes

accordingly, the touch-screen interface may be faulty.

7.5.8. LCD DISPLAY MODULE

Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied

to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power

supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash

screen and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization

process.

7.5.9. GENERAL RELAY BOARD DIAGNOSTICS

The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its

status LEDs as described in Section 7.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on

and off through the SIGNAL I/O function in the DIAG menu, see Section 4.13.2.

If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not

flashing, then either the wiring between the keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the

relay board itself is bad.

If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question

(heater, valve, etc.) does not toggle properly using the Signal I/O function, then the

associated device (valve or heater) or its control device (valve driver, heater relay) is

malfunctioning. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced.

The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function:

Table 7-8: Relay Board Control Devices

Function Control Device Socketed

All valves U5 Yes

All heaters K1-K5 Yes

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

247

7.5.10. MOTHERBOARD

7.5.10.1. A/D functions

A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is

to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D

reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.

 Using the Signal I/O function (Section 4.13.2 Appendix D), view the value of

REF_4096_MV and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of their nominal values

(4096 and 0) and are stable to within ±0.5 mV, the basic A/D converter is function-

ing properly. If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than 3 mV, one or

more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty.

 Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE

(see previous section on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the

voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I/O function. If the wiring is intact but there

is a difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage,

the motherboard may be faulty.

7.5.10.2. Analog Output Voltages

To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output

in question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 4.13.3.

For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed

into the channel (Section 4.13.5.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value

listed in the table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 2-3 mV. If one

or more of the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A converters and

their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely.

Table 7-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values

FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE

100mV 1V 5V 10V

STEP % NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1 0 0 mV 0 0 0

2 20 20 mV 0.2 1 2

3 40 40 mV 0.4 2 4

4 60 60 mV 0.6 3 6

5 80 80 mV 0.8 4 8

6 100 100 mV 1.0 5 10

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

248

7.5.10.3. Status Outputs

The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs.

+DC Gnd

Figure 7-15: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test

1. Connect a cable between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output

connector.

2. Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that

is being tested.

3. Connect a voltmeter between the “D“ pin and the pin of the output being tested

(Table 7-10).

4. Under the DIAG / SIGNAL I/O menu (Section 4.13.2), scroll through the inputs and

outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn the output on and off.

The Voltmeter will read approximately 5 VDC when the output is OFF.

The Voltmeter will read approximately 0 VDC when the output is ON.

Table 7-10: Status Outputs Pin Assignments

PIN # STATUS

1 SYSTEM OK

2 CONC VALID

3 HIGH RANGE

4 ZERO CAL

5 SPAN CAL

6 DIAG MODE

7 LOW

8 SPARE

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

249

7.5.10.4. Control Inputs

The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:

 Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the +5 V on the

CONTROL IN connector.

 Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on

the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to

ZERO CAL R mode.

 Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on

the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to

SPAN CAL R mode.

In each case, the T200H/M should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is

removed.

7.5.11. CPU

There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure

associated with the Disk-On-Module (DOM). If either of these failures occur, contact

the factory.

For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the

wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on:

 There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port (labeled RS232) on the rear panel

even if “? <RETURN>” is pressed.

 In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the

motherboard, specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side

of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to

start up but the measurements will be incorrect.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

250

7.5.12. RS-232 COMMUNICATION

7.5.12.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting

Teledyne API analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial communications

protocol. RS-232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many years but, at

times, is difficult to configure. Teledyne API conforms to the standard pin assignments

in the implementation of RS-232. Problems with RS-232 connections usually center

around 4 general areas:

 Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. See Section

4.11.5 for connector and pin-out information.

 The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly

configured. See Section 4.11.3.2 on how to set the baud rate.

 The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly (Section 6.11.8).

 If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed.

See Section 6.15.2.6.

 Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE switch. Typically, the red LED is on as soon as

you power up the analyzer. If not, contact the factory, as this indicates a problem

with the motherboard. As the analyzer is connected to the computer with a cable,

the green LED should also illuminate. If not, set the DCE/DTE switch to the other

position. See also Section 6.11.5.

 that some laptops do not enable their RS-232 port when in power-saving mode. In

this case, connect the laptop and start either APICOM or a Hyperterminal window

and start communicating with the analyzer. This will enable the serial port on the

laptop and the green LED should illuminate. You may have to switch back and forth

while communicating to get the right setting.

7.5.12.2. Modem or Terminal Operation

These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a

Teledyne API analyzer.

 Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.

 Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE as described in Section 6.11.5.

 Check the correct setup command (Section 6.15.2.6).

 Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T200H/M sets pin 7

(RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.

 Make sure the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and

analyzer match, see Section 6.15.2.6 and 6.11.8.

 Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or

computer; See Section 6.11.10.

 Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding

down the space bar is one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as

the instrument is receiving data.

 Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly.

Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232

Manual”, Teledyne API part number 013500000, available online at

http://www.Teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

251

7.5.13. PMT SENSOR

The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It

has a gain of about 1: 500000 to 1:1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside

of the instrument in the field. The best way to determine if the PMT is working properly

is by using the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section 6.13.6.2. The basic

method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST,

OTEST and specific tests for other sub-assemblies.

7.5.14. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD

To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest to carry out the

optical and electrical tests described in Sections 6.13.6.2 and 4.13.7.3. If the ETEST

fails, the preamplifier board may be faulty. Refer to Section 13 on hardware calibration

through the preamplifier board.

7.5.15. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT

tube (Section 8.5.2). It requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 V, which powers the

supply. The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the preamplifier

board. Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in

Section 13. This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin

of the PMT. The following test procedure below allows you to test each step.

 Turn off the instrument.

 Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor

module.

 Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws).

 Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic

screws).

 Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the

instrument. Scroll the front panel display to the HVPS test parameter. Divide the

displayed HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs of connector points as shown in

Table 11-11.

 Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front

panel, for example 700 V) and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply

(should be 1/10th of the overall voltage, in this example 70 V):

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

252

Table 7-11: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs

If HVPS reading = 700 VDC

PIN PAIR NOMINAL READING

1  2 70 VDC

2  3 70 VDC

3  4 70 VDC

4  5 70 VDC

5  6 70 VDC

6  7 70 VDC

7  8 70 VDC

KEY

11 1

 Turn off the instrument power, and reconnect the PMT, then reassemble the sensor.

If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no user

serviceable parts inside the supply.

7.5.16. PNEUMATIC SENSOR ASSEMBLY

The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be

checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring

is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly.

Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0  0.25 V. If not, the board is

faulty. Measure the voltage across the leads of capacitor C2. It should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V,

if not, the board may be faulty.

7.5.16.1. Reaction Cell Pressure

Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP5. With the sample pump

disconnected or turned off, the voltage should be 4500  250 mV. With the pump

running, it should be 800-1700 mV depending on the performance of the vacuum pump.

The lower the reaction cell pressure, the lower the resulting voltage is. If this voltage is

significantly different, the pressure transducer S1 or the board may be faulty. If this

voltage is between 2 and 5 V, the pump may not be performing well, check that the

reaction cell pressure is less than 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level). Ensure that the tubing is

connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower port does

not measure pressure.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

253

7.5.16.2. Sample Pressure

Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump

disconnected or turned off, this voltage should be 4500  250 mV. With the pump

running, it should be about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in-Hg-A

below ambient pressure. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer

S2 or the board may be faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause

this voltage to be between about 0.6 and 4.5. Make sure that the front panel reading of

the sample pressure is at about 1 in-Hg-A less than ambient pressure. Ensure that the

tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower

port does not measure pressure.

Figure 7-16: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly

7.5.16.3. Ozone Flow

Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP3. With proper ozone flow (250 cm3/min), this

should be approximately 3.0 ± 0.3 V (this voltage will vary with altitude). With flow

stopped (pump turned off), the voltage should be approximately 0 V. If the voltage is

incorrect, the flow sensor or the board may be faulty. A cross-leak to vacuum inside the

Perma Pure dryer may also cause this flow to increase significantly, and the voltage will

increase accordingly. Also, make sure that the gas flows from P1 to P2 as labeled on the

flow sensor (“high” pressure P1 to “low” pressure P2 or “Port” 1 to “Port” 2).

7.5.17. NO2 CONVERTER

The NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways, an electrical failure of the band heater

and/or the thermocouple control circuit and a performance failure of the converter itself.

NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems:

 Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature. In

this case, the heater is either disconnected or broken or the power relay is broken.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

254

Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure the

resistance between any two of the three heater leads with a multi-meter. The

resistance between A and B should be about 1000 Ω and that between A and C

should be the same as between B and C, about 500 Ω each. If any of these

resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is broken.

 Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C). This indicates a disconnected

or failing thermocouple or a failure of the thermocouple circuit.

First, check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not

show signs of a broken or kinked pathway. If it appears to be properly connected,

disconnect the yellow thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay board and

measure the voltage (not resistance) between the two leads with a multi-meter

capable of measuring in the low mV range. The voltage should be about 12 mV

(ignore the sign) at 315° C and about 0 mV at room temperature.

Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter. It should read close to zero Ω. If the

thermocouple does not have continuity, it is broken. If it reads zero voltage at

elevated temperatures, it is broken. To test the thermocouple at room temperature,

heat up the converter can (e.g., with a heat gun) and see if the voltage across the

thermocouple leads changes. If the thermocouple is working properly, the

electronic circuit is broken. In both cases, consult the factory.

If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is outside

of allowed range of 96-102%), check the following:

 Conversion efficiency setting in the CAL menu. If this value is different from 1.000,

this correction needs to be considered. Section 5.2.5 describes this parameter in

detail.

 Accuracy of NO2 source (gas tank standard). NO2 gas standards are typically

certified to only ±2% and often change in concentrations over time. You should get

the standard re-certified every year. If you use GPT, check the accuracy of the

ozone source.

 Age of the converter. The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need

to be replaced every ~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continu-

ously high NO2 concentrations). We estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours

(a cumulative product of the NO2 concentration times the exposure time to that

concentration). However, this lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as

absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the converter is

possible), sample flow rate and pressure inside the converter, converter tempera-

ture, duty cycle etc. This lifetime is only an estimated reference and not a

guaranteed lifetime.

 In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal

chips inside the converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow

through the converter, in which case it needs to be replaced. To avoid this problem,

we recommend the use of a sample gas conditioner (Section 5.10). Section 6.3.4

describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge.

 With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading

is negative, while the NO2 reading remains around zero. The converter destroys

NO and needs to be replaced.

 With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading

is significantly higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration. The

converter produces NO2 and needs to be replaced.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

255

7.5.18. O3 GENERATOR

The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and

functionally (internal generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to

the generator, the generator should automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument

is powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See Section 10.3.6 for ozone generator

functionality. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined with an

ozone analyzer connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator

appears to be working properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is

reduced, suspect a leak in the ozone generator supply air.

A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air

to leak into the air stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator

will produce only about half of the nominal O3 concentration when run with moist,

ambient air instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce large amounts

of nitric acid in the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the

generator to deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the

reaction cell window, reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a

leak check as described earlier in this Section.

7.5.19. BOX TEMPERATURE

The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the

bottom edge of the CPU board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be

disconnected to check its resistance. Box temperature will vary with, but will usually

read about 5° C higher than, ambient (room) temperature because of the internal heating

zones from the NO2 converter, reaction cell and other devices.

 To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend to check the

BOX_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu

(Section 6.13.1). At about 30° C, the signal should be around 1500 mV.

 We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature

sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature by placing it inside the chassis,

next to the thermistor labeled XT1 (above connector J108) on the motherboard.

7.5.20. PMT TEMPERATURE

PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature

is maintained constant than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier,

thermo-electric cooler element supplied with 12 V DC power from the switching power

supply PS2. The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature controller

located on the preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1

to 12 VDC. The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary

by ±1C due to component tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to

within 0.1° C around that set point. On power-up of the analyzer, the front panel

enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature down to

its set point of 6-8° C. If the temperature fails to adjust after 30 minutes, there is a

problem in the cooler circuit. If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a

temperature of –1° C is reported.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

256

7.6. REPAIR PROCEDURES

This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major

component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement. that maintenance procedures

(e.g., replacement of regularly changed expendables) are discussed in Section 6

(Maintenance) are not listed here. Also that Teledyne API Technical Support may have

a more detailed service for some of the below procedures. Contact Technical Support.

7.6.1. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT

Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it also may

cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM

carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed

software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the

analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements.

After the memory is reset, the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information

collected in Step 1 below must be re-entered before the instrument will function

correctly. Also, zero and span calibration should be performed.

1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range,

auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM

2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the

mounting screws.

3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the

Disk-on-Module in the right most socket of the CPU board.

4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the

programmer.

5. Remove the nylon fastener that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift the

DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.

6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip

matches the notch in the socket.

7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket.

Press the DOM all the way in and reinsert the offset clip.

8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.

9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup

information.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

257

7.6.2. O3 GENERATOR REPLACEMENT

The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached

to its rear and two tubes extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer. To

replace the ozone generator:

1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.

2. Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the ozone scrubber cartridge and the ¼” clear

tube from the plastic extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone

generator.

3. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick.

4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis

and take out the entire assembly.

5. If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting

bracket attached, simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator.

6. Make sure to carry out a leak check and a recalibration after the analyzer warmed

up for about 30 minutes.

7.6.3. SAMPLE AND OZONE DRYER REPLACEMENT

The T200H/M standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air.

An optional dryer is available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas

streams can also be purchased. To change one or all of these options:

1. Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer

cover.

2. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2

converter.

They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing the two

mounting screws (if necessary).

3. Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly,

These are usually the purge tube connecting to the vacuum manifold, the tube from

the exit to the ozone flow meter (ozone dryer) or to the NO/NOx valve (sample

dryer) or two tubes to the ozone flow meter and the NO/NOX valve (combo-dryer).

Take extra care not to twist any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer, which

connect the inner drying tube to the outer purge tube.

4. the orientation of the dryer on the bracket.

5. Cut the tie wraps that hold the dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old

dryer.

If necessary, unscrew the two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the

entire assembly.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

258

6. Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the

old dryer.

7. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps.

8. Cut off excess length of the wraps.

9. Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws.

10. Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at

least two wrenches.

: Take extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings, as this will

result in large leaks that are difficult to trouble-shoot and fix.

11. Carry out a detailed leak check (Section 7.5.2),

12. Close the analyzer.

13. Power up pump and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes.

7.6.4. PMT SENSOR HARDWARE CALIBRATION

The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and

offset of the PMT output and to optimize the signal output and HVPS. If the

instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other

more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated, the hardware calibration

can be used to adjust the sensor as has been done in the factory. This procedure is also

recommended after replacing the PMT or the preamplifier board.

1. Perform a full zero calibration using zero air (Section 5.3, 7.4, or 7.6).

2. On the preamplifier board (located on the sensor housing, Figure 3-5) find the

following components shown in Figure 7-17:

HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).

HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).

Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns).

3. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting.

4. Feed NO to the analyzer:

For the T200H use 450 ppm NO.

For the T200M use 18 ppm NO.

5. Wait until the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppm

6. Scroll to the NORM PMT value on the analyzer’s front panel.

7. With the NO gas concentrations mentioned instep 5 above, the NORM PMT value

should be 3600 mV.

8. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0). Set the HVPS fine

adjustment switch to its maximum setting (F).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

259

9. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you just

above 3600 mV NORM PMT signal. The coarse adjustment typically increments

the NORM PMT signal in 100-300 mV steps.

Figure 7-17: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout

10. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is 3600-3700 mV.

The fine adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT value by about 30 mV.

It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the

proper value is at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting.

Note Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment

switches to their maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and

increment slowly. Wait 10 seconds between adjustments..

11. If the NORM PMT value set above is now between 3560-3640 mV, skip this step.

Otherwise, adjust the NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to

3600±10 mV.

This is the final very-fine adjustment.

12. that during adjustments, the NORM PMT value may be fluctuating, as the analyzer

continues to switch between NO and NOX streams as well as between measure and

AutoZero modes.

You may have to mentally average the values of NO and NOX response for this

adjustment.

13. Perform a software span calibration (Section 5.3, 7.4, or 7.6) to normalize the

sensor response to its new PMT sensitivity.

14. Review the slope and offset values, the slopes should be 1.000±0.300 and the

offset values should be 0.0±20 mV (-20 to +150 mV is allowed).

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

260

7.6.5. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC

The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However,

in some cases, the high voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler

(TEC) may fail. In case of PMT, HVPS or TEC failure, the sensor assembly needs to be

opened in order to change one of these components. Refer to Figure 7-18 for the

structure of the T200H/M sensor assembly and follow the steps below for replacement

of one of its components. We recommend to ensure that the PMT, HVPS or TEC

modules are, indeed, faulty to prevent unnecessary opening of the sensor.

CAUTION

Although it is possible for a skilled technician to change the PMT or HVPS

through the front panel with the sensor assembly mounted to the analyzer,

we recommend to remove the entire assembly and carry this procedure out

on a clean, anti-static table with the user wearing an anti-static wrist strap to

prevent static discharge damage to the assembly or its circuits.

1. Power down the analyzer, disconnect the power cord.

2. Remove the cover and disconnect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the

sensor assembly.

3. If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by

unscrewing two holding screws. This is necessary only if the PMT cold block is to

be removed.

This step is not necessary if the HVPS or the PMT only are exchanged.

Figure 7-18: T200H/M Sensor Assembly

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

261

Figure 7-19. 3-Port Reaction Cell Oriented to the Sensor Housing

4. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front

panel.

5. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers).

6. Remove the dryer packages inside the PMT housing.

7. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that

measures the PMT temperature.

8. Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.

9. Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure

(the threads get stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws).

a) Carefully remove the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT.

Both may be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste.

b) Do not contaminate the inside of the housing with this grease, as it may

contaminate the PMT glass tube on re-assembly.

10. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, anti-

static wipe and do not touch it after cleaning.

11. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed:

a) Disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board, remove the cooler

fan duct (4 screws on its side) including the driver board.

b) Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside.

12. Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold

block assembly, which contains the TEC.

13. Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new

unit.

14. Re-assemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order.

Make sure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between

TEC and cold block and that the side opening in the cold block will face the reaction

cell when assembled.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

262

15. Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.

Note The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If

there is any significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Make sure to

apply the thermal pads before mounting it and tighten the screws

evenly and cross-wise..

16. Re-insert the TEC subassembly in reverse order.

Make sure that the O-ring is placed properly and the assembly is tightened evenly.

17. Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order and don’t forget the gasket

between HVPS and PMT.

a) Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block.

b) Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to

condense on the inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS.

18. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws).

19. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and

washers.

20. Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections.

21. Leak check the system.

22. Power up the analyzer.

23. Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features or

zero and span gases, then carry out a hardware calibration of the analyzer

(Section 13) followed by a software calibration.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

263

7.7. REMOVING / REPLACING THE RELAY PCA FROM THE

INSTRUMENT

This is the most commonly used version of the Relay PCA. It includes a bank of solid

state AC relays. This version is installed in analyzers where components such as AC

powered heaters must be turned ON & OFF. A retainer plate is installed over the relay

to keep them securely seated in their sockets.

AC Relay

Retainer Plate

Retainer

Mounting

Screws

Figure 7-20: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place

The Relay retainer plate installed on the relay PCA covers the lower right mounting

screw of the relay PCA. Therefore, when removing the relay PCA, the retainer plate

must be removed first.

C Relay Retain Occludes

Mounting Screw on

P/N 045230200

Mounting

Screws

Figure 7-21: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

264

7.8. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the

Model T200H/M NOx Analyzer.

QUESTION ANSWER

Why does the instrument not

appear on the LAN or Internet?

Most problems related to Internet communications via the Ethernet card will

be due to problems external to the instrument (e.g. bad network wiring or

connections, failed routers, malfunctioning servers, etc.) However, there

are several symptoms that indicate the problem may be with the Ethernet

card itself. If neither of the Ethernet cable’s two status LED’s (located on the

back of the cable connector) is lit while the instrument is connected to a

network:

 Verify that the instrument is being connected to an active network jack.

 Check the internal cable connection between the Ethernet card and the

CPU board.

Why does the ENTR button

sometimes disappear on the front

panel display?

Sometimes the ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is

invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set

the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00 or a reporting range outside the specified

limits. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button

will re-appear.

Why is the ZERO or SPAN button

not displayed during calibration?

The T200H/M disables these buttons when the span or zero value entered

by the user is too different from the gas concentration actual measured

value at the time. This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the

analyzer to an out-of-range response curve.

EXAMPLE: The span set point is 80 ppm and the measurement response

is only 5 ppm. Section 7 describes this in detail.

Why does the analyzer not

respond to span gas?

There are several reasons why this can happen. Section 10.3.2 has some

possible answers to this question.

Can I automate the calibration of

my analyzer?

Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically

calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal feature.

What do I do if the concentration

on the instrument's front panel

display does not match the value

recorded or displayed on my data

logger even if both instruments

are properly calibrated?

This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: (1) a

difference in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a

wiring problem; (2) a scale problem with the input to the data logger. The

analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate

for either or both of these effects, see Section 6.13.4; analog outputs are

not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Section 6.13.5).

How do I measure the sample

flow?

Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample

inlet port when the instrument is operating.

 For the T200H in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be

290 cm³/min 10%.

 For the T200M in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be

250 cm³/min 10%.

See Table 9-3 for more detailed information about gas flow rates.

Section 7 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the

sample gas flow.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

265

QUESTION ANSWER

Can I use the DAS system in

place of a strip chart recorder or

data logger?

Yes. Section 4.7 describes the setup and operation of the DAS system in

detail.

How often do I need to change

the particulate filter?

Once per week or as needed. Table 6-1 contains a maintenance schedule

listing the most important, regular maintenance tasks. Highly polluted

sample air may require more frequent changes.

How long does the sample pump

last?

The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should

be replaced when necessary. Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front

panel to see if the pump needs replacement.

If this value goes above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs to

be rebuilt.

Why does my RS-232 serial

connection not work?

There are several possible reasons:

 The wrong cable, please use the provided or a generic “straight-

through” cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable),

 The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is not set properly;

make sure that both green and red lights are on,

 The baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does not match that of the

serial port of your computer/data logger. See Section 11.5.11 more

trouble-shooting information.

7.9. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems,

technical assistance may be obtained from:

Teledyne-API, Technical Support

9480 Carroll Park Drive, San Diego, CA 92121

Phone: +1 858 657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190

Fax: +1 858 657 9816

Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com.

Before you contact Technical Support, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C,

which is also available online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-

api.com/forms/.

07270B DCN6512

Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

266

This page intentionally left blank.

07270B DCN6512

267

8. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

The T200H/M Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that

determines the concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum

of NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the

instrument. It requires that sample and calibration gases are supplied at ambient

atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell

where the sample gas is exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives

off light (chemiluminescence). The instrument measures the amount of

chemiluminescence to determine the amount of NO in the sample gas. A catalytic-

reactive converter converts any NO2 in the sample gas to NO, which is then – including

the NO in the sample gas – is then reported as NOX. NO2 is calculated as the difference

between NOX and NO.

Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require

physical adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures

the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied

and stores these results in memory. The microprocessor uses these calibration values

along with the signal from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and

pressure of the gas to calculate a final NOX concentration.

The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are

stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system (DAS Section 4.7.2) and are reported

to the user through a vacuum fluorescence display or several output ports.

8.1. MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE

8.1.1. CHEMILUMINESCENCE

The principle of the T200H/M’s measurement method is the detection of chemilumi-

nescence, which occurs when nitrogen oxide (NO) reacts with ozone (O3). This reaction

is a two-step process. In the first step, one molecule of NO and one molecule of O3

collide and chemically react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2) and one molecule

of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). Some of the NO2 retains a certain amount of excess energy

from the collision and, hence, remains in an excited state, which means that one of the

electrons of the NO2 molecule resides in a higher energy state than is normal (ded by an

asterisk in Equation 8-1).

223 +→+ONOONO *

Equation 8-1

Thermodynamics requires that systems seek the lowest stable energy state, hence, the

NO2 molecule quickly returns to its ground state in a subsequent step, releasing the

excess energy in form of a quantum of light (h) with wavelengths between 600 and

3000 nm, with a peak at about 1200 nm (Equation 9-2, Figure 8-1).

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

268

νhNONO +

2→

(Equation 9-2)

All things being constant, the relationship between the amount of NO present in the

reaction cell and the amount of light emitted from the reaction is very linear. More NO

produces more light, which can be measured with a light-sensitive sensor in the near-

infrared spectrum (Figure 8-1). In order to maximize the yield of reaction (1), the

T200H/M supplies the reaction cell with a large, constant excess of ozone (about 3000-

5000 ppm) from the internal ozone generator.

Model 200E Instrument Response

0 a.u.

20 a.u.

40 a.u.

60 a.u.

80 a.u.

100 a.u.

120 a.u.

140 a.u.

0.5µm 0.7µm 0.9µm 1.1µm 1.3µm 1.5µm 1.7µm 1.9µm

Wavelength

Intensit

Optical Hi-Pass Filter Performance

NO + O3 Emission Spectrum

PMT

Response

M200EH/EM

Sensitivity Window

Figure 8-1: T200H/M Sensitivity Spectrum

However, only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed through reaction 10-1 is in the

excited state. In addition, the excited NO2 can collide with another collision partner M

in the reaction cell (mostly other molecules but also cell walls) and transfer its excess

energy to its collision partner without emitting any light at all (Equation 9-3). In fact, by

far the largest portion of the NO2* returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a

few percent yield of usable chemiluminescence.

MNOMNO ++ 2

2→

(Equation 9-3)

In order to enhance the light yield of the reaction, the reaction cell is maintained at

reduced pressure. The probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a

collision partner M increases proportionally with the reaction cell pressure. This non-

radiating collision with the NO2* molecules is usually referred to as quenching, an

unwanted process further described in Section 8.2.4.2.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

269

8.1.2. NOX AND NO2 DETERMINATION

The only gas that is truly measured in the T200H/M is NO. Any NO2 contained in the

gas is not detected in the above process since NO2 does not react with O3 to undergo

chemiluminescence.

In order to measure the concentration of NO or NOX (which is defined here as the sum

of NO and NO2 in the sample gas), the T200H/M periodically switches the sample gas

stream through a converter cartridge filled with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips heated

to a temperature of 315° C. The heated molybdenum reacts with NO2 in the sample gas

and produces a variety of molybdenum oxides and NO according to Equation 9-4.

)315(→

2CatOMxNOyMoxNO zoy 

(Equation 9-4)

Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction

cell where it undergoes the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equations 9-1 and

9-2.

Figure 8-2: NO2 Conversion Principle

By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total

NOX (NO+NO2) content of the sample gas. By switching the NO2 converter in and out

of the sample gas stream every 6 - 10 seconds, the T200H/M analyzer is able to quasi-

continuously measure both the NO and the total NOX content.

The NO2 concentration, finally, is not measured but calculated by simply subtracting the

known NO content of the sample gas from the known NOX content.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

270

8.2. CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION

8.2.1. THE PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE

The T200H/M uses a photo-multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of light created

by the NO and O3 reaction in the reaction cell.

A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.

Photons enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit

electrons. These electrons are accelerated by an applied high voltage and multiply

through a sequence of such acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable current signal is

generated. This current increases or decreases with the amount of detected light

(Section 10.4.3 for more details), is converted to a voltage and amplified by the

preamplifier board and then reported to the motherboard’s analog inputs.

Figure 8-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube

8.2.2. OPTICAL FILTER

Another critical component in the method by which your T200H/M detects

chemiluminescence is the optical filter that lies between the reaction cell and the PMT

(Figure: 10-3). This filter is a high pass filter that is only transparent to wavelengths of

light above 645 nm. In conjunction with the response characteristics of the PMT, this

filter creates a very narrow window of wavelengths of light to which the T200H/M will

respond (refer to Figure 8-1).

The narrow band of sensitivity allows the T200H/M to ignore extraneous light and

radiation that might interfere with the T200H/M’s measurement. For instance, some

oxides of sulfur can also undergo chemiluminescence when in contact with O3 but emit

light at shorter wavelengths (~ 260 nm to 480 nm).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

271

8.2.3. AUTO ZERO

Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a

variety of factors such as black body infrared radiation given off by the metal

components of the reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the PMT units and even the

constant universal background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to

reduce this amount of noise and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a

thermo-electric cooler (TEC).

While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is

not eradicated. To determine how much noise remains, the T200H/M diverts the sample

gas flow directly to the exhaust manifold without passing the reaction cell once every

minute for about 5 seconds (Figure 8-4). During this time, only O3 is present in the

reaction cell, effectively turning off the chemiluminescence reaction. Once the chamber

is completely dark, the T200H/M records the output of the PMT and keeps a running

average of these AZERO values. This average offset value is subtracted from the raw

PMT readings while the instrument is measuring NO and NOX to arrive at a auto-zero

corrected reading.

Figure 8-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

272

8.2.4. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES

It should be d that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a

number of sources. The T200H/M has been successfully tested for its ability to reject

interference from most of these sources. Table 8-1 lists the most important gases, which

may interfere with the detection of NO in the T200H/M.

8.2.4.1. Direct Interference

Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to

chemiluminescence in the reaction cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes

chemiluminescence by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a gas that reacts with

other compounds and produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell.

8.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching

As shown in Equation 9-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the

excited NO2

*, preventing the chemiluminescence of Equation 9-2, a process known as

quenching. CO2 and H2O are the most common quenching interferences, but N2 and O2

also contribute to this interference type.

Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the

properties of the collision partner. larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and

CO2 quench NO chemiluminescence more effectively than smaller, less polar and

electronically “harder” molecules such as N2 and O2.

The influence of water vapor on the T200H/M measurement can be eliminated with an

optional, internal sample gas dryer. The concentrations of N2 and O2 are virtually

constant in ambient air measurements, hence provide a constant amount of quenching

and the interference of varying CO2 amounts is negligible at low concentrations.

The T200H and T200M analyzers are typically used in high CO2 concentration

environments. The pneumatic setup of these two analyzer models minimizes the

interference from CO2 such that the analyzers conform to the standards set forth by the

US-EPA in Method 20 - NOx from Stationary Gas Turbines, available at

http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/promgate.html

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

273

Table 8-1: List of Interferents

GAS INTERFERENCE TYPE REJECTION METHOD

Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes them to

collect in aperture of Critical Flow Orifice altering flow

rate of NO.

CO2 3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide with

NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically

and preventing emission of photons.

If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected,

special calibration methods must be performed to

account for the affects of the CO2.

Contact Teledyne API Technical Support depart-

ment for details.

Some SOX variants can also initiate a

chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to O3

producing excess light.

Wavelengths of light produced by

chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out by

the Optical Filter.

Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3

generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)

and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque

white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms

highly corrosive HNO3 (Nitric Acid)

Most of the ammonium sulfate and ammonium

nitrate produced is removed from the sample gas

by an air purifier located between the O3

Generator and the reaction cell.

SOX

3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide with NO2*

molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and

preventing emission of photons.

If high concentrations of SOX are suspected,

special calibration methods must be performed to

account for the affects of the SO2.

Contact Teledyne API Technical Support depart-

ment for details.

3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide with NO2*

molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and

preventing emission of photons.

Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas must

have some method of drying applied to the

sample gas supply (Section 5.10 for more details).

H20 Chemically reacts with NH3 and SOX in O3 generator

to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and

NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque

white deposits on optical filter Window. Also forms

highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid)

Removed from the O3 gas stream by the Perma

Pure® Dryer (Section 8.3.7 for more details).

NH3

Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O and NO

by the NO2 converter. Excess NO reacts with O3 in

reaction cell creating excess chemiluminescence.

If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected, steps

must be taken to remove the NH3 from the sample

gas prior to its entry into the NO2 converter.

Chemically reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in O3

generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)

and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque

white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms

highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid).

The Perma Pure® dryer built into the T200H/M is

sufficient for removing typical ambient

concentration levels of NH3.

In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect can be

calibrated out by using calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the measured air.

Only very high and highly variable CO2 concentrations will then be cause of measurable

interference. For those applications, we recommend to use other analyzer models.

Please consult sales or our website.

8.2.4.3. Light Leaks

The T200H/M sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum

(Figure 10-1), hence, it is important to make sure than the reaction cell is completely

sealed with respect to light. To ensure this, all pneumatic tubing leading into the

reaction cell is either opaque (vacuum exit tubing) in order to prevent light from entering

the cell or light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices (gas

entries).

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

274

8.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION

Note It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not

pressurized over ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be

performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule,

Table 6-1. Procedures for correctly performing leak checks are provided

in Section 7.5

8.3.1. PUMP AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Note Relative Pressure versus absolute pressure. In this manual vacuum

readings are given in inches of mercury absolute pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e.

indicate an absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).

The gas flow for the T200H/M is created by an external pump (Figure 8-5) that is

pneumatically connected through a 6.4 mm / 0.25” tube to the analyzer’s EXHAUST

port located on the rear panel. This pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A

at one standard liter/minute, which is provided to various pneumatic components by a

vacuum manifold located just in front of the rear panel. Gas flow is created by keeping

the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure, usually by means of a small vent

installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling the gas through the instrument’s

pneumatic systems.

There are several advantages to this external pump / pull-through configuration.

 By using an external pump, it is possible to remove a significant source of acoustic

noise and vibration from the immediate vicinity of the sensor. The PMT can act as a

“microphone”, amplifying noise and vibration within the chassis. This is one of the

main reasons, why the T200H/M has an external pump.

 Pumping heats and compresses the sample air, complicating the measurement

process if the pump is upstream.

 Most importantly, however, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of

materials that might chemically react with the sample gas. Placing the pump

downstream of the reaction cell avoids these problems.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

275

Figure 8-5: External Pump Pack

Finally, the T200H/M requires a steady, high under-pressure, which cannot be achieved

reliably over extended periods of time with small vacuum pumps. The external pump

used for the T200H/M has a very long lifetime and duty cycle and provides a very good

vacuum for its entire lifetime. However, the pump is too large to fit into the chassis of

the analyzer.

8.3.2. SAMPLE GAS FLOW

The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer, as the medium has to be

routed through a variety of valves and tubes for the measurement of zero offset and

concentrations of both NO and NOX (and possibly the drying of the gas if the optional

sample dryer is installed). At any point before and in the reaction cell, the integrity of

the sample gas cannot be compromised.

Sample gas flow in the T200H/M analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather

calculated from the sample pressure using the flow principle across a critical orifice. In

general, the differential pressure ratio between sample pressure and reaction cell

pressure needs to exceed 2:1 to allow critical flow. The actual flow rate is then only

dependent on the size of the orifice and the upstream pressure. Refer to Section 8.3.3

for a detailed description of the instrument’s method of gas flow rate control.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

276

8.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles

For the routing of the sample gas flow, the analyzer uses a variety of valves. The

NO/NOX valve directs the sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or through the

unit’s NO2 converter, alternating every ~4 s. The AutoZero valve directs the sample gas

stream to completely bypass the reaction cell for dark noise measurement once every

minute, which is then subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration

signal. The valve cycle phases are summarized in the following table.

Table 8-2: T200H/M Valve Cycle Phases

PHASE

NO/ NOX

VALVE

STATUS

AUTOZERO

VALVE

STATUS

TIME

INDEX ACTIVITY FIGURE

0 - 2 s

Wait period (NO dwell time).

Ensures reaction cell has been

flushed of previous gas.

Measure

Open to

AutoZero

valve

Open to

reaction cell

2 - 4 s Analyzer measures chemilumi-

nescence in reaction cell.

Figure 8-2

4 – 6 s

Wait period (NOX dwell time).

Ensures reaction cell has been

flushed of previous gas.

NOX

Measure

Open to

NO2

converter

Open to

reaction cell

6 – 8 s Analyzer measures NO + O3 chemi-

luminescence in reaction cell.

Figure 8-2

Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds

0 – 4 s

Wait period (AZERO dwell time).

Ensures reaction cell has been

flushed of sample gas and chemi-

luminescence reaction is stopped.

AutoZero

Open to

AutoZero

valve

Open to

vacuum

manifold

4 - 6 s Analyzer measures background

noise without sample gas

Figure 8-4

Cycle repeats every minute

8.3.3. FLOW RATE CONTROL - CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES

The Model T200H/M analyzers use special flow control assemblies (Figure 8-8) located

at various locations within the instrument to maintain constant flow rates for both the O3

supply air and the sample gas. These assemblies consists of:

 A critical flow orifice.

 Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal

the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.

 A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the

critical flow orifice and the assembly housing.

The figures that follow highlight the location of these flow control assemblies:

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

277

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Figure 8-6: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200H

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

278

VACUUM

PRESSURE

SENSOR

SAMPLE

PRESSURE

SENSOR

O3 FLOW

SENSOR

FLOW PRESSURE

SENSOR PCA

INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

PERMAPURE

DRYER

NO/NOX

VALVE

AUTOZERO

VALVE O3

GENERATOR

SAMPLE

GAS

INLET

Filter

Orifice Dia.

0.004"

PUMP

NOX Exhaust

Scrubber

EXHAUST

GAS

OUTLET

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

Orifice Dia.

0.007"

REACTION

CELL

PMT

Gas Flow

Control

Assemblies

NO2

Converter

Figure 8-7: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200M

Note Location of flow control assemblies in the T200H/M with zero/span option

50 installed are the same as shown in Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

279

8.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice

The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice.

Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates.

They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics.

By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This

pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws the gas

through the orifice.

As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,

the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of

upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas

through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1 the

gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream

pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are

therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical

flow orifice.

Figure 8-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends

on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas

molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass through the orifice.

With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction cell pressures,

respectively the necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is largely

exceeded and accommodates a wide range of possible variability in atmospheric

pressure and pump degradation extending the useful life of the pump. Once the pump

does degrades to the point where the vacuum pressure exceeds 14 in-Hg-A so that the

ratio between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 a critical flow rate can no

longer be maintained. At this point, the instrument will display “XXXX" indicating an

invalid sample flow rate.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

280

The following table lists the gas flow rates of the critical flow orifices in the standard

T200H/M

Table 8-3: T200H/M Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates

ORIFICE DIAMETER NOMINAL FLOWRATE

(cm³/min)

LOCATION PURPOSE

T200H T200M T200H T200M

Bypass manifold 1 out

to NO/NOx valve and

NO2 converter

Controls rate of flow of sample gas into the NO2

converter and reaction cell. 0.003” 0.007” 40 250

Vacuum manifold:

Bypass manifold 1 Port

Controls rate of sample gas flow that bypasses

the analyzer when bypassing the reaction cell

during the auto-zero cycle.

0.007” N/A 250 N/A

TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – Standard Configuration 290 250

Vacuum manifold: O2

sensor port

Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas through

the O2 sensor (when installed and enabled) when

inactive.

0.004" 0.004" 80 80

TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – With O2 Sensor Option 370 330

O3 supply inlet of

reaction cell.

Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into the

reaction cell. 0.007” 0.007” 250 250

Dry air return of Perma

Pure® dryer

Controls flow rate of dry air return / purge air of

the dryer. 0.004" 0.004" 80 80

1 Bypass manifold is built into the 3-port reaction cell.

In addition to controlling the gas flows, the critical flow orifices at the inlets of the

reaction cell also maintain an under-pressure inside the reaction cell, effectively

reducing the number of molecules in the chamber and therefore increasing the

chemiluminescence yield as the likelihood of third body quenching is reduced (Section

8.2.4.1). The T200H/M sensitivity reaches a peak at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the

sensitivity drops due to a low number of molecules and decreased yield in the

chemiluminescence reaction.

EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON CRITICAL FLOW

Changes in temperature will cause the critical flow orifice materials to expand or

contract. Even though these changes are extremely small, they can alter the diameter of

the critical flow orifice enough to cause noticeable changes in the flow rate though the

orifice. To alleviate this problem the two most important of the flow assemblies (those

controlling the sample gas an O3 gas flow)in the T200H/M are maintained at a constant

temperature.

8.3.4. SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER

To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a PTFE membrane

filter of 47 mm diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm pore size.

The filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down (after removal of the

CE Mark safety screw), and should be changed according to the maintenance schedule

in Table 9-1.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

281

8.3.5. OZONE GAS AIR FLOW

The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the

analyzer because of the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator

itself, this requires a dry air supply and filtering of the gas before it is introduced into the

reaction cell. Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3 must also be

removed from the gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet.

In contrast to the sample flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor,

which is mounted on the pneumatic sensor board, just behind the PMT sensor assembly.

This mass flow sensor has a full scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be calibrated

through software to its span point (Section 4.13.7.5). As the flow value displayed on the

front panel is an actual measurement (and not a calculated value), the flow variability

may be higher than that of the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more

stable) differential pressures. On the other hand, the drift, i.e. long-term change, in the

ozone flow rate may be higher and usually indicates a flow problem. As with all other

test parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone flow over time for predictive

diagnostics and maintenance evaluation.

CAUTION

Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas. Obtain a Material and Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) for this gas. Read and rigorously follow the safety guide-

lines described there. Always make sure that the plumbing of the

O3 generation and supply system is maintained and leak-free.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

282

8.3.6. O3 GENERATOR

The T200H/M uses a corona discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3. Corona discharge

generation is capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low

excess heat. Although there are many cell designs, the fundamental principle remains

the same (Figure 8-9).

Figure 8-9: Ozone Generator Principle

The T200H/M utilizes a dual-dielectric design. This method utilizes a glass tube with

hollow walls. The outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically

conductive material. The air flows through the glass tube, between the two conductive

coatings, in effect creating a capacitor with the air and glass acting as the dielectric. The

layers of glass also separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent

reaction with the O3. As the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and

accelerated across the air gap and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream

splitting them into elemental oxygen. Some of these oxygen atoms recombine with O2

to O3.

The quantity of ozone produced is dependent on factors such as the voltage and

frequency of the alternating current applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy

electrons are produced to ionize the O2 molecules, a light emitting, gaseous plasma is

formed, which is commonly referred to as a corona, hence the name corona discharge

generator.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

283

8.3.7. PERMA PURE® DRYER

The air supplied to the O3 generation system needs to be as dry as possible. Normal

room air contains a certain amount of water vapor, which greatly diminishes the yield of

ozone produced by the ozone generator. Also, water can react with other chemicals

inside the O3 Generator to produce chemicals that damage the optical filter located in the

reaction cell (Table 10-1) such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive nitric acid.

To accomplish this task the T200H/M uses a Perma Pure® single tube permeation dryer.

The dryer consists of a single tube of Nafion® , a co-polymer similar to Teflon® that

absorbs water very well but not other chemicals. The Nafion® tube is mounted within an

outer, flexible plastic tube. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube, water vapor is

absorbed into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the

membrane wall and evaporates into the dry, purge gas flowing through the outer tube,

countercurrent to the gas in the inner tube (Figure 8-10).

Figure 8-10: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process

This process is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient between

the inner and outer tubes as well as the flow rates and pressure difference between inner

and outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous membrane permeation, which transfers water

through a relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a simple kinetic reaction.

Therefore, the drying process occurs quickly, typically within milliseconds. The first

step in this process is a chemical reaction between the molecules of the Nafion® material

and water, other chemical components of the gases to be dried are usually unaffected.

The chemical reaction is based on hydrogen bonds between the water molecule and the

Nafion material. Other small polar gases that are capable of hydrogen bonds can be

absorbed this way, too, such as ammonia (NH3) and some low molecular amines. The

gases of interest, NO and NO2, do not get absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered.

To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the T200H/M returns

some of the dried air from the inner tube to the outer tube (Figure 8-11). When the

analyzer is first started, the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

284

very large and the dryer’s efficiency is low at first but improves as this cycle reduces the

moisture in the sample gas and settles at a minimum humidity.

Figure 8-11: T200H/M Perma Pure® Dryer

Just like on startup, if the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30

minutes, it takes a certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large

enough for the Perma Pure® Dryer to adequately dry the air. In this case, called a cold

start, the O3 Generator is not turned on for 30 minutes. When rebooting the instrument

within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the generator is turned on immediately.

The Perma Pure® Dryer used in the T200H/M is capable of adequately drying ambient

air to a dew point of ≤ -5˚C (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter

per minute (slpm) or down to ≤ -15˚C (~1600 ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The

Perma Pure® Dryer is also capable of removing ammonia from the sample gas up to

concentrations of approximately 1 ppm.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

285

8.3.8. OZONE SUPPLY AIR FILTER

The T200H/M uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce

a variety of byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides

can combine to create ammonium sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other

compounds. Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery residues inside the

reaction cell causing sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which

can deteriorate the analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical

byproducts from the O3 gas stream, the output of the O3 generator flows through a

special filter between the generator and the reaction cell.

Any NOX that may be produced in the generator (from reaction of O2 or O3 and N2 in the

air) and may cause an artifact in the measurement, is calibrated out through the Auto-

zero functionality, which checks the background signal of the O3 stream only once per

minute.

8.3.9. OZONE SCRUBBER

Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not

quite fast enough to ensure that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of

the T200H/M by the time the gas exits the analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and

reactivity of O3, a special catalytic ozone scrubber is used to remove all of the O3 exiting

the reaction cell. Besides its efficient destruction of O3, this catalyst does not produce

any toxic or hazardous gases as it only converts ozone to oxygen.

The O3 scrubber is located inside the NO2 converter housing next to the NO2 converter

in order to utilize residual heat given of by the converter heater. Even though the

catalyst is 100% efficient at scrubbing ozone at room temperature, heating it

significantly reduces the necessary residence time (the amount of time the gas must be in

contact with the catalyst) for 100% efficiency and full efficiency can be maintained at

higher gas flow rates. As this is a true catalytic converter, there are no maintenance

requirements as would be required for charcoal-based scrubbers.

A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is

subjected to sudden pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump

without letting the analyzer properly and slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To

avoid the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the scrubber is equipped with

sintered stainless steel filters of 20 µm pore size on either end and on some models, an

additional dust filter may be attached to the exhaust port.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

286

8.3.10. PNEUMATIC SENSORS

Note The T200H/M displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-Hg-

A), i.e. absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).

The T200H/M uses three pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are

located on a printed circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board,

located just behind the sensor assembly.

8.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold

The vacuum manifold is the central exit port for all analyzer pneumatics. All gas

streams of the analyzer exit through this assembly and connect to the instrument’s pump.

Figure 8-12 shows the standard configuration. Configurations will vary depending on

the optional equipment that is installed. An IZS option, for example, will add another

FT8 connector and orifice assembly to the manifold, an optional sample dryer may add a

Tee-fitting so that two ¼” tubes can be connected to the same port.

At this time, the vacuum manifold does not yet support the orifice holder shown in

Figure 6-5. To exchange the critical orifice installed in the vacuum manifold, the user

needs to either blow the orifice out with reversed pressure or remove the entire manifold

for this task. However, orifices installed in the vacuum manifold should not have to be

cleaned under normal circumstances.

Figure 8-12: Vacuum Manifold

8.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to

measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell. This

is the “upstream” pressure mentioned above, which is used to compute sample flow rate.

In conjunction with the vacuum pressure sensor, it is also used to validate the critical

flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas critical flow orifice (Section

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

287

8.3.3). If the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section

8.8.3), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation.

The actual pressure value is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as the

test function SAMP. The flow rate of the sample gas is displayed as SAMP FLW.

8.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure

the pressure downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell. The output of

the sensor is used by the CPU to calculate the pressure differential between the gas

upstream of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it and is also used as the

main diagnostic for proper pump operation. If the ratio between the upstream pressure

and the downstream pressure falls below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW

WARN) is displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the sample flow

rate will display XXXX instead of an actual value. If this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A,

an RCEL PRESSURE WARNING Is issued, even though the analyzer will continue to

calculate a sample flow up to ~14 in Hg.

Also, if the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section

8.8.3), the output of this sensor is used to supply pressure data for that calculation. This

measurement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel as the test function RCEL.

8.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor

A mass flow meter connected between the Perma Pure® dryer and the O3 generator

measures the flow rate of O3 supply air through the analyzer. This information is used

to validate the O3 gas flow rate. If the flow rate exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate

(250 cm³/min), a warning message OZONE FLOW WARNING is displayed on the

analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the O3 generator is turned off. As second

warning, OZONE GEN OFF, is displayed. This flow measurement is viewable

through instrument’s front panel display as the test function OZONE FL.

8.3.11. DILUTION MANIFOLD

Certain applications require to measure NOX in sample gases that do not contain any

oxygen. However, the molybdenum NO2 converter requires a minimum amount of

oxygen to operate properly and to ensure constant conversion efficiency. For these

special applications, the analyzer may be equipped with a dilution manifold (Figure

8-13) to provide the instrument with an internal sample stream that contains about 2.5%

O2. This manifold is mounted between converter housing and vacuum manifold on a

small mounting bracket. If the dilution manifold is to be mounted in the T200H/M

analyzer.

The manifold is equipped with two orifice holders that control the flow of the O2-free

sample gas and the bleeds in a small amount of zero air before the combined sample

stream goes to the NO/NOX valve for measurement. The zero air is produced by an

external zero air scrubber cartridge, mounted on the rear panel.

The dilution manifold is not temperature controlled, although the residual heat of the

NO2 converter housing provides some temperature stability. Tight temperature stability

is not critical to the dilution application.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

288

Figure 8-13: Dilution Manifold

Please inquire with Teledyne-API sales if the analyzer can be modified to fit your

application.

8.4. OXYGEN SENSOR (OPT 65A) PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

8.4.1. PARAMAGNETIC MEASUREMENT OF O2

The oxygen sensor used in the T200H/M analyzer utilizes the fact that oxygen is

attracted into strong magnetic field (in contrast with most other gases) to obtain fast,

accurate oxygen measurements.

The sensor’s core is made up of two nitrogen filled glass spheres, which are mounted on

a rotating suspension within a magnetic field (Figure 8-14). A mirror is mounted

centrally on the suspension and light is shone onto the mirror, which reflects the light

onto a pair of photocells that then generate a signal. The signal generated by the

photocells is passed to a feedback loop, which outputs a current to a wire winding (in

effect, a small DC electric motor) mounted on the suspended mirror.

Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the

nitrogen filled spheres and causing the suspended mirror to rotate. This changes the

amount of light reflected onto the photocells and therefore the output levels of the

photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the wire winding

in order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the

more the mirror moves and the more current is fed into the wire winding by the feedback

control loop.

A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which

is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture

(see Figure 8-14).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

289

Figure 8-14: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation

8.4.2. OPERATION WITHIN THE T200H/M ANALYZER

The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation.

All functions can be viewed or accessed through the front panel, just like the functions

for NOX.

 The O2 concentration is displayed in the upper right-hand corner, alternating with

NOX, NO and NO2 concentrations.

 Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with

the analyzer’s other test functions.

 O2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is

performed in a nearly identical manner as the standard NOX/NO calibration. See

Section 5 for more details.

 Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed (see 3.3.2.1)

The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and

accuracy and is available to be output via one of the instrument’s four user selectable

analog outputs (see Section 6.13.4).

The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50° C by means of a PID

loop and can be viewed on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP.

The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an

insulated canister.

8.4.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION OF THE O2 SENSOR

Pneumatically, the O2 sensor is connected after the particulate filter and draws a flow of

about 80 cm³/min in addition to the normal sample flow rate (See Table 10.-3 for

nominal sample inlet gas flow rates) and is separately controlled with its own critical

flow orifice located inside the vacuum manifold.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

290

8.5. ELECTRONIC OPERATION

Figure 8-15 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the T200H/M.

Pneumatic

Sensor

Board

Sample

Pressure

Sensor

Vacuum

Pressure

Sensor

O3 Flow Sensor

Analog Outputs

Status Outputs:

1 – 8

Control Inputs:

1 – 6

PC 104

CPU Card

Disk On

Module

Flash Chip

COM1 (RS–232 ONLY)

COM2 (RS–232 or RS–485)

Power-Up

Circuit

I2C Bus

Analog

Sensor Inputs

Box

Temp

Thermistor

Interface

REACTION CELL

TEMPERATURE

MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER

TEMPERATURE

PMT

Temperature

Sensor

Optional

4-20 mA

MOTHER

BOARD

A/D

Converter(

V/F)

PC 104

Bus

External

Digital I/O)

Analog

Outputs

(D/A)

RELAY

BOARD

C Status

LED

PUMP

(Externally Powered)

CPU

tatus

LED

NO/NOx

Valve

Autozero

Valve

Sample Cal

Valve Option

Option

Reaction Cell

Heater

Molybdenum

Converter Heater

PMT TEC

PMT

MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER

TEMPERATURE SIGNAL

TEC Drive

PCA

Internal

Digital I/O

ELECTRIC TEST CONTROL

OPTIC TEST CONTROL

PMT OUTPUT (PMT DET)

O2 Sensor

Option

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL

PMT TEMPERATURE

PMT

PREAMP PCA

O2 OPTION

TEMPERATURE

Display

Touchscreen

LVDS

transmitter board

Analog RS232 COM2 USB Ethernet

IN Male Female COM port

USB

or USB

C Bus)

Figure 8-15: T200H/M Electronic Block Diagram

The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal

processes, interprets data, calculates data, and reports results using specialized firmware

developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user, receives data from and

issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through the motherboard, the main

printed circuit assembly on the rear panel.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

291

8.5.1. CPU

The unit’s CPU card, installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel, is a low

power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex 86SX-based microcomputer

running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification.

Figure 8-16: T200H/M CPU Board Annotated

The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk on Module (DOM)

with an embedded 2MB flash chip.

8.5.1.1. Disk On Module (DOM)

The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash drive with storage capacity to 128 MB. It is used to

store the computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne API firmware and peripheral

files, and the operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition

system (DAS).

8.5.1.2. Flash Chip

This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2 MB of storage for calibration data as

well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily

accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption.

In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate

with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the

unit to be recalibrated.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

292

8.5.2. SENSOR MODULE, REACTION CELL

Electronically, the T200H/M sensor assembly (see Figure 9-6) consists of several

subassemblies with different tasks: to detect the intensity of the light from the

chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 in the reaction cell, to produce a

current signal proportional to the intensity of the chemiluminescence, to control the

temperature of the PMT to ensure the accuracy and stability of the measurements and to

drive the high voltage power supply that is needed for the PMT. The individual

functions are described individually below, Section 7.6.5 shows the sensor assembly and

its components.

8.5.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit

The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by

changes in the temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell.

In order to reduce temperature effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant

50 C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation temperature range.

Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded

directly above the chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters

operate off of the instrument’s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a

power relay on the relay board (Section 8.5.7). A thermistor, also embedded in the

bottom of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the

thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard (Section 8.5.9.3).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

293

8.5.3. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)

The T200H/M uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of

chemiluminescence created in the sample chamber.

PMT Housing End Plate

This is the entry to the PMT Exchange

PMT Preamp PCA

High voltage Power Supply

(HVPS)

PMT

PMT Cold Block

Connector to PMT

Pre Amp PCA

12V Power

Connector

Cooling Fan

Housing

TEC Driver PCA

PMT Heat Exchange Fins

ht from Reaction

Chamber shines

throu

h hole in side

of Cold Block

Insulation Gasket

PMT Power Supply

& Aux. Signal

Connector

PMT Output

Connector

Thermo-Electric Cooler

(TEC)

PMT Temperature

Senso

O-Test LED

Figure 8-17: PMT Housing Assembly

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

294

A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.

Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and

strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. A high voltage

potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high

voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each

stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons.

The greatly increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier

are collected by a positively charged anode at the other end, which creates a useable

current signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then

reported to the motherboard.

Figure 8-18: Basic PMT Design

A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the

electron multiplier. The higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons

emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier, making the PMT more sensitive

and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy (dark noise).

The gain voltage of the PMT used in the T200H/M is usually set between 450 V and 800

V. This parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (see

Section 6.2.1). For information on when and how to set this voltage, see Section

11.6.3.8.

The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (see Figure 10-18). This

assembly also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an

LED used by the instrument’s optical test function, a thermistor that measures the

temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including

the thermo-electric cooler (TEC).

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

295

8.5.4. PMT COOLING SYSTEM

The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature.

Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT.

Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature

as well. The warmer The PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders

the concentration signal useless. To alleviate this problem a special cooling system

exists that maintains the PMT temperature at a stable, low level

TEC

Control

PCA

PMT Preamp

PCA

Thermistor

outputs temp of

cold block to

preamp PCA

Preamp PCA sends

buffered and

amplified thermistor

signal to TEC PCA

TEC PCA sets

appropriate

drive voltage

for cooler

Heat form PMT is absorbed

by the cold block and

transferred to the heat sink

via the TEC then bled off

into the cool air stream.

PMT

Cold Block

Heat Sink

Cooling Fan

ThermoElectric Cooler

Figure 8-19: PMT Cooling System

8.5.4.1. TEC Control Board

The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located in the sensor housing assembly,

under the slanted shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan.

Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board (see

Section 10.4.5), it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer the

PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to

the heat sink.

A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit

is receiving power. Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the

definitions and acceptable signal levels of these test points see Section 11.

8.5.5. PMT PREAMPLIFIER

The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage

(PMT) that can be processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the

CPU to calculate the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations of the gas in the sample

chamber.

The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the

voltage across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two

hexadecimal switches. Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and,

hence, the signal from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can further

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

296

be adjusted through a potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when

encountering problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise.

See Section 11.6.3.8 for this hardware calibration.

Motherboard

PMT Preamp PCA

Low

Pass Noise

Filter

E Test Control

From CPU

MUX

Amp to

Voltage

Converter/

Amplifier

D-A

Converter

PMT

Coarse

Gain Set

(Rotary

PMT Fine

Gain Set

(Rotary

Switch)

PMT

Signal

Offset

E-Test

Generator

O-Test

Generator

O Test Control

From CPU

PMT Temp

Sensor PMT

Temperature

Feedback

Circuit

TEC Control

PCA

PMT Output

PMT HVPS

Drive Voltage

PMT Temp Analog Signal

to Motherboard

PMT Output Signal

(PMT) to Motherboard

O Test

LED

Figure 8-20: PMT Preamp Block Diagram

The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can

be viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel (see Section 6.2.1).

The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended to

simulate the output of the PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By bypassing

the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test most of the signal handling and

conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See section 6.9.6 for instructions

on performing this test.

The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a

light signal that can be measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer,

the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT

and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board. See

section 6.9.5 for instructions on performing this test.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

297

8.5.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD

The flow and pressure sensors of the T200H/M are located on a printed circuit assembly

just behind the PMT sensor. Refer to Section 7.5.16 for information on how to test this

assembly. The signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal

processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from

the front panel.

8.5.7. RELAY BOARD

The relay board is the central switching and power distribution unit of the analyzer. It

contains power relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as

well as thermocouple amplifiers, power distribution connectors and the two switching

power supplies of the analyzer. The relay board communicates with the motherboard

over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power problems and

valve or heater functionality. See Figure 7-4 for an annotated view of the relay board.

8.5.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout

Generally the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the analyzer and is

mounted vertically on the back side of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power

supplies, however the exact location of the relay PCA may differ from model to model

(see Figure 3-5)

8.5.7.2. Heater Control

The heater control loop is illustrated in Figure 8-21. Two thermocouples (T/C) inputs

can be configured for either type-J or type-K thermocouples. Additionally:

 Both T/C’s can be configured as either grounded or ungrounded thermocouples.

 Standard configuration of the both type of thermocouples is 10 mV/°C. In order to

accommodate the T200H’s Mini High-Con converter option, a type-K; 5mV/°C

output configuration has been added.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

298

Thermistor(s) – Low Temperature Sensing:

(e.g. Sample Chamber and Reaction

Cell temperatures)

RELAY PCA

Control

Logic

Solid State

AC Relays

Preamplifiers

and Signal

Conditioning

MOTHER BOARD

A/D

Converter

(V/F)

CPU

Themocouple(s)

(High Temperature Sensing;

e.g. Moly and HiCon

Converter temperatures)

AC HEATERSDC HEATERS

THERMOCOUPLE

CONFIGURATION

JUMPER

(JP5)

Cold Junction

Compensation

Figure 8-21: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.

8.5.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5)

Although the relay PCA supports two thermocouple inputs, the current T200H/M series

analyzers only utilize one. By default, this single thermocouple input is plugged into the

TC1 input (J15). TC2 (J16) is currently not used. See Figure 7-4 for location of J15 and

J16

CAUTION

Avoid damage to the unit: use only the recommended thermocouple type and its specific

settings. If in doubt, call T-API Technical Support for information about the correct part.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

299

Table8-4: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs

TC INPUT JUMPER PAIR DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

1 – 11 Gain Selector

Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC

- IN = J TC gain factor

- OUT = K TC gain factor

2 – 12 Output Scale Selector

Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC

- IN = 5 mV / °C

- OUT = 10 mV / °C

3 – 13 Type J Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction

Compensation for J type Thermocouple

4 – 14 Type K Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction

Compensation for K type Thermocouple

TC1

5 – 15 Termination Selector

Selects between Isolated and grounded TC

- IN = Isolate TC

- OUT = Grounded TC

6 – 16 Gain Selector Same as Pins 1 – 11 above.

7 – 17 Output Scale Selector Same as Pins 2 – 12 above.

8 – 18 Type J Compensation Same as Pins 3 – 13 above.

9 – 19 Type K Compensation Same as Pins 4 – 14 above.

TC2

10 – 20 Termination Selector Same as Pins 5 – 15 above.

TC2

TC1

Input Gain Selector 1 – 11

Type J Compensation 4 – 14

Output Scale Selector 2 – 12

Type J Compensation 3 – 13

Termination Selector 5 – 15

Input Gain Selector 6 – 16

Type J Compensation 9 – 19

Output Scale Selector 7 – 17

Type J Compensation 8 – 18

Termination Selector 10 – 20

Figure 8-22: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

300

Table 8-5: Typical Thermocouple Settings

TYPE

TERMINATION

TYPE

OUTPUT

SCALE TYPE

JUMPER

BETWEEN

PINS

USED ON JUMPER

COLOR

INPUT TC1 (J15)

K GROUNDED 5mV / °C 2 – 12

4 – 14 T200H/M with Mini HiCon Converter BROWN

K ISOLATED 5mV / °C

2 – 12

4 – 14

5 – 15

T200H/M with Mini HiCon Converter GREY

K ISOLATED 10mV / °C 4 – 14

5 – 15 T200H/M models with Moly Converter PURPLE

J ISOLATED 10mV / °C

1 – 11

3 – 13

5 – 15

T200H/M models with Moly Converter RED

J GROUNDED 10mV / °C 1 – 11

3 – 13 T200H/M models with Moly Converter GREEN

8.5.7.4. Valve Control

The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four

valves. The main valve assembly in the T200H/M is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid

valve assembly mounted right in front of the NO2 converter housing. These two valves

are actuated with 12 V supplied from the relay board and driven by the CPU through the

I2C bus.

A second set of valves may be installed if the zero/span valve is enabled in the analyzer.

Specialty manifold valves may be present in the analyzer.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

301

8.5.8. STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY

Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the

analyzer’s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator.

Table 11-2 shows the states of these LEDs and their respective functionality.

D3 (Yellow) – NO2 Converter Heater

D4 (Yellow) – Manifold Heater

D2 (Yellow) – Reaction Cell Heater

D5(Yellow)

D6 (Yellow) – O2 Sensor Heater

D7 (Green)

–

Zero / Span Valve Status

D8 (Green)

–

Sample / Cal Valve Status

D9 (Green )

–

Auto / Zero Valve Status

D10 (Green) – NOx / NO V alve Status

D1 (RED)

Watchdog

Indicator

Figure 8-23: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA

8.5.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1)

The most important of the status LED’s on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED. It is controlled

directly analyzer’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should

this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this

Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turn off all heaters.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

302

8.5.9. MOTHERBOARD

This is the largest electronic assembly in the analyzer and is mounted to the rear panel as

the base for the CPU board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly

provides a multitude of functions including A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC-

104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the

RS-232 and RS-485 signals.

8.5.9.1. A to D Conversion

Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are

converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog

to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a

particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.

The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic

device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices.

The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD

counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that

count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.

The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is

used in uni-polar mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and

under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.

For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:

Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two

voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to

compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent

conversions. See Section 6.13.5.4 for instructions on performing this calibration.

8.5.9.2. Sensor Inputs

The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master

multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ )

on each of the inputs prevent cross-talk between the sensor signals.

PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: This signal, output by the PMT preamp PCA, is used in

the computation of the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations displayed at the top right hand

corner of the front panel display and output through the instruments analog outputs and

com ports.

PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: This input is based on the drive

voltage output by the PMT pram board to the PMT’s high voltage power supply

(HVPS). It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage

setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS.

HVPS is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front

panel.

PMT TEMPERATURE: This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT

cold block amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

303

board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current

temperature of the PMT.

This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function PMT TEMP

and is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.

NO2 CONVERTER TEMPERATURE: This parameter is measured with a Type-K

thermocouple attached to the NO2 converter heater and its analog signal is amplified by

the circuitry on the relay board. It is sent to the CPU and then digitized and is used to

calculate the current temperature of the NO2 converter. It is also stored in the DAS and

reported as test function MOLY TEMP.

SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE: This is measured upstream of the reaction cell, stored in

the DAS and reported as SAMPLE. The vacuum gas pressure is measured downstream

of the reaction cell and is stored in the DAS and reported as RCEL. For more

information on these sensor’s functions see Section 8.3.10.

O3 GAS FLOW This sensor measures the gas flow upstream of the ozone generator,

stored in the DAS and reported as test function OZONE FL. For more information on

this sensor’s function see Section 8.3.10.

8.5.9.3. Thermistor Interface

This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-

coefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:

REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor embedded in the reaction

cell manifold. This temperature is used by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating

circuit and as a parameter in the temperature/pressure compensation algorithm. This

measurement is stored in the analyzer’s DAS and reported as test function

RCEL TEMP.

BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It

measures the analyzer’s inside temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and

can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display.

It is also used as part of the NO, NOX and NO2 calculations when the instrument’s

Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled. This measurement is stored in

the analyzer. Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test

function (Section 4.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.

The thermistor inside the PMT cold block as well as the thermistor located on the

preamplifier board are both converted to analog signals on the preamplifier board before

being sent to the motherboard’s A/D converter.

O2 SENSOR TEMPERATURE: For instruments with the oxygen sensor option

installed, the thermistor measuring the temperature of the heating block mounted to the

sensor is reported as test function O2 TEMP on the front panel. This temperature is

maintained at 50° C.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

304

8.5.10. ANALOG OUTPUTS

The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs: A1, A2, A3 and a fourth that is

a spare.

A1 and A2 Outputs: The first two, A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel

so that the same data can be sent to two different recording devices. While the names

imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder and the other for

interfacing with a data logger, either can be used for both applications.

Output Loop-back: All of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A/D

converter through a Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated

by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures (see Section 6.13.5.4)

8.5.11. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O

The external digital I/O performs two functions.

The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin

connector on the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey on/off information

about certain analyzer conditions such as CONC VALID. They can be used to interface

with certain types of programmable devices (Section 6.15.1.1).

The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external

source such as a PLC or data logger (Section 6.15.1.2). Zero and span calibrations can

be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.

8.5.12. I2C DATA BUS

I2C is a two-wire, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in

commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard

converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data are then fed to

the relay board and optional analog input circuitry.

8.5.13. POWER-UP CIRCUIT

This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during analyzer start-up and sets the analog

outputs, external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU

boots and the instrument software can establish control.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

305

8.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION & CIRCUIT BREAKER

The analyzer operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC

(both ± 10%) between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the

ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker

will automatically turn off the analyzer.

CAUTION

Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing

this situation before turning the analyzer back on.

SENSOR SUITES

LOGIC DEVICES

(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,

Touchscreen, Display,

MotherBoard, etc.)

RELAY PCA

ON / OFF

SWITCH

PS 2

(+12 VDC)

OPTIONAL

VALVES

(e.g. Sample/Cal,

Zero/Spans, etc.)

MODEL SPECIFIC

VALVES

(e.g. NOX – NO Valves,

Auto-zero valves, etc.)

TEC and

Cooling Fan(s)

PUMP

AC HEATERS

AC HEATERS for

O2 SENSOR

PS 1

ANALOG

SENSORS

(e.g. UV sensors,

Temp Sensors,

Flow Sensors,

PMT HVPS,

etc.)

Pre-Amplifiers

& Amplifiers

Sensor Control

& I/O Logic

Solenoid

Drivers

AC POWER

DC POWER

POWER IN

+5 VDC

±15 VDC

Configuration

Jumpers

Configuration

Jumpers

Configuration

Jumpers

UV Lamp

P/S

Figure 8-24: Power Distribution Block Diagram

Under normal operation, the T200H/M draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during

start-up.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

306

8.7. FRONT PANEL/DISPLAY INTERFACE ELECTRONICS

Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touch-

screen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The touch

screen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touch screen controller that connects to

the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.

Figure 8-25: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram

8.7.1. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE PCA

The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and touch

screen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video controller

and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:

 power supply circuitry for the LCD display module

 a USB hub that is used for communications with the touch screen controller and the

two front panel USB peripheral device ports

 the circuitry for powering the display backlight

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

307

8.8. SOFTWARE OPERATION

The instrument’s core module is a high performance, X86-based microcomputer running

Windows CE. Inside Windows CE, special software developed by Teledyne API

interprets user commands from the various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks,

stores data in the CPU’s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the

gas being sampled.

Windows CE

API FIRMWARE

Instrument Operations

 Calibration Procedures

 Configuration Procedures

 Autonomic Systems

 Diagnostic Routines

Memory Handling

 DAS Records

 Calibration Data

 System Status Data

Interface Handling

 Sensor input data

Display Messages

 Touchscreen

 Analog output data

 RS232 & RS485

 External Digital I/O

Measurement

Algorithms

INSTRUMENT

HARDWARE

PC/104 BUS

Figure 8-26: Basic Software Operation

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

308

8.8.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER

The T200H/M NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through

a built-in adaptive filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a

fixed time period, the T200H/M averages over a defined number of samples, with

samples being about 8 seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4 s each for NO

and NOX). This technique is known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software

may automatically switch between two different filters lengths based on the conditions

at hand.

During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an

average of the last 42 samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and

stable readings and averages out a considerable amount of random noise for an overall

less noisy concentration reading.

If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only

6 samples or about 48 seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two

conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First, the

instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50

ppb. Second, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long

filter by at least 10% of the average in the long filter.

If necessary, these boxcar filter lengths can be changed between 1 (no averaging) and

1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio.

Signal noise increases accordingly when in adaptive filter mode, but remains within the

official T200H/M specifications as long as the filter size remains at or above 3 samples.

In order to avoid frequent switching between the two filter sizes, the analyzer has a

delay of 120 s before switching out of adaptive filter mode, even if the two threshold

conditions are no longer met.

that the filter settings in NOX only or NO only

8.8.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET

Aside from the hardware calibration of the preamplifier board (Section 13) upon factory

checkout, calibration of the analyzer is usually performed in software. During

instrument calibration (Section 7) the user enters expected values for span gas

concentration through the front panel keypad and supplies the instrument with sample

gas of know NO and NOX concentrations. The readings are then compared to the

expected values and the software computes values for the new instrument slope and

offset for both NO and NOX response. These values are stored in memory for use in

calculating the NO, NOX and NO2 concentration of the sample gas. By default, the DAS

stores 200 software calibration settings for documentation, review and data analysis.

Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed on

the front panel. NO SLOPE, NOX SLOPE, NO OFFS and NOX OFFS are four of the

test parameters accessible through the <TST TST> buttons.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation

309

8.8.3. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC)

The software features a compensation of some temperature and pressure changes critical

in the measurement of NO and NOX concentration. When the TPC feature is enabled

(default setting), the analyzer divides the value of the PMT output signal (PMTDET) by

a value called TP_FACTOR. TP_FACTOR is calculated according to the following

equation.

























































)(

(

)(

)(7

)(

_K298

KTEMPBOX

Hgin29.92

HginSAMP

HginRCEL

Hgin

K323

KTEMPRCELL

AFACTORTP

(Equation 9-5)

Where A, B, C, D are gain functions. The four parameters used to compute

TP_FACTOR are:

 RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K.

 RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A.

 SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell,

measured in in-Hg-A. This measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric

pressure.

 BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is

typically about 5 K higher than room temperature.

The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST

FUNCTIONS through the instrument’s front panel display.

that, as RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP and SAMP pressure increase, the value of

TP_FACTOR increases and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. Conversely,

increases in the reaction cell pressure (RCEL) decrease TP_FACTOR and, hence

increase the PMTDET value. These adjustments are meant to counter-act changes in

the concentrations caused by these parameters.

Each of the terms in the above equation is attenuated by a gain function with a numerical

value based on a preset gain parameter (shown below in CAPITALIZED ITALICS)

normalized to the current value of the parameter being attenuated. The gain functions A,

B, C and D are defined as:

]__×)1

)(323

)(_

[(+1= GAINTPCRCTEMP

Ktemprcell

(Equation 9-6)

]__×)1

)("_

)("5

[(+1= GAINTPCRCPRESS

Hgpressurercell

(Equation 9-7)

]__×)1

)(323

)(_

[(+1= GAINTPCSPRESS

Ktemprcell

(Equation 9-8)

]__×)1

)(298

)(_

[(+1= GAINTPCBXTEMP

Ktempbox

(Equation 9-9)

The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to analyzer.

Section 6.12 describes the method for enabling/disabling the TPC feature.

07270B DCN6512

Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

310

8.8.4. NO2 CONVERTER EFFICIENCY COMPENSATION

Over time, the molybdenum in the NO2 converter oxidizes and looses its original

capacity of converting NO2 into NO, eventually resulting in a decreased converter

efficiency (CE). Even though we recommend to replace the converter if CE drops

below 96%, the analyzer’s firmware allows adjusting minor deviations of the CE from

1.000 and enables reporting the true concentrations of NO2 and NOX. Converter

efficiency is stored in the instrument’s memory as a decimal fraction that is multiplied

with the NO2 and NOX measurements to calculate the final concentrations for each.

Periodically, this efficiency factor must be measured and - if it has changed from

previous measurements - entered into the analyzer’s memory (Section 5.2.5).

8.8.5. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS)

The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for

users to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can

be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further

processing with common data analysis programs. The DAS has a consistent user

interface among all Teledyne API A-Series, E-Series, and T-Series instruments. New

data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed. Section

6.7 describes the DAS and its default configuration in detail, Section 6.2 shows the

parameters that can be used for predictive diagnostics.

Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters, the DAS can

store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered

off. However, if new firmware or a new DAS configuration are uploaded to the

analyzer, we recommend retrieving data before doing so to avoid data loss. The DAS

permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote

interface. The latter can automatically report stored data for further processing.

APICOM, a user-friendly remote control program is the most convenient way to view,

retrieve and store DAS data (Section 6.15.2.8)

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

311

9. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE

Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static

electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to

provide reliable service for a long time. This section describes how static electricity

occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to

prevent that damage from occurring.

9.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED

Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of

your analyzer, are very small, require very little power and operate very quickly.

Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them

very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling

electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the

first place.

Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens

whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the

atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate, some electrons from one surface

are retained by the other.

Materials

Makes

Contact

PROTONS = 3

ELECTRONS = 3

NET CHARGE = 0

PROTONS = 3

ELECTRONS = 3

NET CHARGE = 0

Materials

Separate

PROTONS = 3

ELECTRONS = 2

NET CHARGE = -1

PROTONS = 3

ELECTRONS = 4

NET CHARGE = +1

Figure 9-1: Triboelectric Charging

If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded,

the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place,

or static. The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone

wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor.

With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,

quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a

workbench, using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of

StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

312

Table 9-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities

MEANS OF GENERATION 65-90% RH 10-25% RH

Walking across nylon carpet 1,500V 35,000V

Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12,000V

Worker at bench 100V 6,000V

Poly bag picked up from bench 1,200V 20,000V

Moving around in a chair padded

with urethane foam 1,500V 18,000V

9.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE

Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an

electronic device. Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of

the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate

traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them. When

examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like

tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.

A quick comparison of the values in Table 9-1 with the those shown in the Table 9-2,

listing device susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates

that approximately 60% of device failures are the result of damage due to electro-static

discharge.

Table 9-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD

DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE

RANGE

DEVICE DAMAGE BEGINS

OCCURRING AT

CATASTROPHIC

DAMAGE AT

MOSFET 10 100

VMOS 30 1800

NMOS 60 100

GaAsFET 60 2000

EPROM 100 100

JFET 140 7000

SAW 150 500

Op-AMP 190 2500

CMOS 200 3000

Schottky Diodes 300 2500

Film Resistors 300 3000

This Film Resistors 300 7000

ECL 500 500

SCR 500 1000

Schottky TTL 500 2500

Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:

 Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device.

Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can

allow enough discharge to cause damage. A similar discharge can occur from a

charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

313

 When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device

to another surface such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or

other device. In some cases, charged device discharges can be the most

destructive.

A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the

connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the

assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is connected to ground a discharge will

occur.

 Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field,

a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device.

If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or

removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else, a

second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground.

9.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE

 I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human

nervous system isn’t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most

devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that.

 I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro-static charges

are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet

away from the surface bearing the charge.

 It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-

static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail

immediately. More likely, the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage

causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the trace. This

weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low

voltage and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the

defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.

These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in

which the damaged device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity,

as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property.

 Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this

statement.

Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will

be equalized across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are

still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are

discharged.

A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in

the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface

of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench.

 As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by

static discharges: It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your

analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from

building static electric charges themselves. This does not prevent discharges from

static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging

through the instrument and damaging it.

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

314

9.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL

It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not,

however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent

damage due to electro-static discharge from occurring.

9.4.1. GENERAL RULES

Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting

up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to

ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation (see

figure 9-2).

Wrist Strap

P rotective M at

Ground Point

Figure 9-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station

For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are

available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed

to create a temporary anti-ESD work area anywhere.

 Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic

assemblies of your analyzer. An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it

at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows

static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels. Anti-ESD wrist

straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there

is no available grounded plug.

Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one

meg-ohm) that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s

power supply.

 Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may

temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time, once you stop touching the

grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re-build. In some

conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few

seconds.

 Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags

or bins: Even when you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies

in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will prevent induced charges from building up

on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it.

 Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components

and assemblies rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, “pink-poly” bags are

made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent)

which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive

layer over the surface of the bag.

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

315

While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does

not prevent the build up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface,

these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the

surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the

circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is

eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD

as any ordinary plastic bag.

Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color)

provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when

properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from

discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.

Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also

excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and

discharges.

 Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to

close an anti-ESD bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape,

such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand

or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that

can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.

9.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND

MAINTENANCE

9.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack

When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a

properly grounded power supply.

1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.

 Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion

of the instrument chassis. This will safely connect you to the same ground level to

which the instrument and all of its components are connected.

2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.

3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal

casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any

conducted or induced static charges.

4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-

ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait.

5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of

the analyzer.

9.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.

When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on an anti-

ESD work bench:

1. Plug your anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before

touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away.

This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

316

connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and

induction from occurring.

2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.

3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or

assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.

 Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.

 Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the

outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded

protective mat.

4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or

holding an ESD Sensitive Device.

 Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of

your workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.

5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins

and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap.

6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the

workbench.

9.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back

When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an Anti-

ESD workbench or back:

1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and

workstation.

2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.

3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:

 If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is

connected to a ground point.

 If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work

surface.

 In either case wait several seconds.

4. Place the item in the container.

5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD

tape.

 Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static

fields.

 Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the

bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device.

6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have

built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate:

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

317

 Connect your wrist strap to ground.

 If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is

connected to a ground point.

 If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work

surface

 In either case wait several seconds

7. Open the container.

9.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne API

Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient

generators of static electric charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne API ships

all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti-ESD containers.

Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during

shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these

static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that

you always unpack shipments from Teledyne API by:

1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.

2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.

3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 9.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container

at the work station.

4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components

or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API.

9.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API

Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API in anti-

ESD bins, tubes or bags.

WARNING

DO NOT use pink-poly bags.

NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the

electronic component/assembly directly

 This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam

peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape

DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD

tape

1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.

2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

318

 If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is

connected to a ground point.

 If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work

surface.

 In either case wait several seconds.

3. Place the item in the container.

4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD

tape.

 Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static

fields.

 Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the

bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device.

Note If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or

containers available, Teledyne API Technical Support department will

supply them. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the

instrument rack and workstation.

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

319

GLOSSARY

Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual.

Term Description/Definition

10BaseT an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper

wires to transmit at 10 megabits per second (Mbps)

100BaseT same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)

APICOM name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to

its customers

ASSY Assembly

CAS Code-Activated Switch

CD Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the

surface of a conductor or between two conductors of the same

transmission line, accompanied by ionization of the surrounding

atmosphere and often by a power loss

CE Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is

actually converted into electricity

CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring

Chemical formulas that may be included in this document:

 CO2  carbon dioxide

 C

3H8  propane

 CH4  methane

 H

2O  water vapor

 HC  general abbreviation for

hydrocarbon

 HNO3 nitric acid

 H

2S  hydrogen sulfide

 NO  nitric oxide

 NO2  nitrogen dioxide

 NOX  nitrogen oxides, here defined as the

sum of NO and NO2

 NOy  nitrogen oxides, often called odd

nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other

compounds such as HNO3

(definitions vary widely and may

include nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O

and other compounds as well)

 NH3  ammonia

 O

2  molecular oxygen

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

320

Term Description/Definition

 O

3  ozone

 SO2  sulfur dioxide

cm3 metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete

abbreviation “cc”)

CPU Central Processing Unit

DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter

DAS Data Acquisition System

DCE Data Communication Equipment

DFU Dry Filter Unit

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN

or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols

between themselves and any other addressable device

connected to the network

DIAG Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.

DOM Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB

storage capacity for instrument’s firmware, configuration settings

and data

DOS Disk Operating System

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DR-DOS Digital Research DOS

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also

referred to as a FLASH chip or drive

ESD Electro-Static Discharge

ETEST Electrical Test

Ethernet a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology

for local area networks (LANs), facilitating communication and

sharing resources

FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers

that Du Pont markets as Teflon®

Flash non-volatile, solid-state memory

FPI Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a

transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel,

highly reflective mirrors

GFC Gas Filter Correlation

I2C bus a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between

individual analyzer components

IC Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can

contain many basic components such as resistors, transistors,

capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic

assemblies

IP Internet Protocol

IZS Internal Zero Span

07270B DCN6512

Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

321

Term Description/Definition

LAN Local Area Network

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LED Light Emitting Diode

LPM Liters Per Minute

MFC Mass Flow Controller

M/R Measure/Reference

MOLAR MASS the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance.

Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed

for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the

atomic mass of that substance.

EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the

molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of

carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12

grams.

Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.

NDIR Non-Dispersive Infrared

NIST-SRM National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard

Reference Material

PC Personal Computer

PCA Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components,

ready to use

PC/AT Personal Computer / Advanced Technology

PCB Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic

component

PFA Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that

Du Pont markets as Teflon®

PLC Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control

instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the

analyzer

PLD Programmable Logic Device

PLL Phase Lock Loop

PMT Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply

electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current

signal

P/N (or PN) Part Number

PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration

PTFE Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used

to handle gases that may react on other surfaces; one of the

polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon®

PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing

Rdg Reading

07270B DCN6512

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual

322

Term Description/Definition

RS-232 specification and standard describing a serial communication

method between DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE

(Data Circuit-terminating Equipment) devices, using a maximum

cable-length of 50 feet

RS-485 specification and standard describing a binary serial

communication method among multiple devices at a data rate

faster than RS-232 with a much longer distance between the

host and the furthest device

SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data

SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan

SLPM Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and

pressure

STP Standard Temperature and Pressure

TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard

communications protocol for Ethernet devices

TEC Thermal Electric Cooler

TPC Temperature/Pressure Compensation

USB Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish

communication between peripheral devices and a host

controller, such as a mouse and/or keyboard and a personal

computer or laptop

VARS Variables, the variable settings of the instrument

V-F Voltage-to-Frequency

Z/S Zero / Span

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A - Software Documentation, V.1.0.3 (T-Series)

Kd6 (E-Series)

A-1

APPENDIX A - Software Documentation, V.1.0.3 (T-Series) Kd6 (E-Series)

APPENDIX A-1: MODELS T200H/M, 200EH/EM SOFTWARE MENU TREES....................................................... 2

APPENDIX A-2: SETUP VARIABLES FOR SERIAL I/O .......................................................................................... 8

APPENDIX A-3: WARNINGS AND TEST MEASUREMENTS................................................................................ 21

APPENDIX A-4: M SIGNAL I/O DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................... 26

APPENDIX A-5: DAS FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 31

APPENDIX A-6: TERMINAL COMMAND DESIGNATORS .................................................................................... 35

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS REGISTER MAP......................................................................................................... 37

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-2

APPENDIX A-1: Models T200H/M, 200EH/EM Software Menu Trees

PRIMARY SETUP

SAMPLE

MSG1

CALZ4CALS4CLR1SETUP

A1: User Selectable Range2

A2: User Selectable Range2

A3: User Selectable Range2

A4: User Selectable Range2

NOX STB

SAMP FLW

0ZONE FLW

PMT

NORM PMT

AZERO

HVPS

RCELL TEMP

BOX TEMP

PMT TEMP

MF TEMP

O2 CELL TEMP3

MOLY TEMP

RCEL

SAMP

NOX SLOPE

NOX OFFSET

NO SLOPE

NO OFFSET

O2 SLOPE3

O2 OFFSET3

TIME

O23

LOW

CALTEST1

NOX

HIGH

CONCZERO SPAN

HIGH

ZERO

LOW LOW HIGH

CONCSPAN

CONVNOX NO

SETNO2 CAL

DASCFG ACAL4CLKRANGE PASS MORE

DIAGCOMM VARS ALARM

1 Only appears when warning messages are active.

2 User selectable analog outputs A1 – A4 (see Section X.X.X)

3 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O2 sensor option.

4 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve

options.

SECONDARY

SETUP MENU

Press to cycle

through the

active warning

messages.

Press to clear

an active

warning

messages.

Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-3

SETUP

PASS

DAS RNGE CLK MORE

ACAL1

CFG

MODEL TYPE AND

NUMBER

PART NUMBER

SERIAL NUMBER

SOFTWARE REVISION

LIBRARY REVISION

iCHIP SOFTWARE

REVISION

HESSEN PROTOCOL

REVISION2

CPU TYPE & OS

REVISION

DATE FACTORY

CONFIGURATION SAVED

Go to iDAS

Menu Tree

TIME DATE

OFF

UNIT DIL3

PPM MGM

PREV MODENEXT

SEQ 1)

SEQ 2)

SEQ 3)

PREV NEXT

DISABLED

ZERO

ZERO-LO

ZERO-LO-HI

ZERO-HI

LO-HI

O2 ZERO4

O2 ZERO-SP4

O2 SPAN4

SET

LOW5HIGH5

RANGE TO CAL5

DURATION

CALIBRATE

STARTING DATE

STARTING TIME

DELTA DAYS

DELTA TIME

TIMER ENABLE

SAMPLE

OFF

1 ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if

analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS

valve options.

2 Only appears if Dilution option is active

3 Only appears if Hessen protocol is active.

4 O2 Modes only appear if analyzer is

equipped with O2 sensor option.

5 DOES NOT appear if one of the three O2

modes is selected

Go to

SECONDARY SETUP

Menu Tree

Figure A-2: Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS)

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-4

SETUP

PASS

DAS RNGE CLK MOREACAL1

CFG

SAMPLE

1 ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with

Zero/Span or IZS valve options.

2 Editing an existing DAS channel will erase any

data stored on the channel options.

3 Changing the event for an existing iDAS

channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on

the channel.

EDITVIEW

PREV NEXT

CONC

CALDAT

CALCHE

DIAG

HIRES

VIEW

Selects the data point to be viewed

Cycles through

parameters

assigned to this

DAS channel

<PRM PRM>NX10NEXTPREVPV10

EDIT2PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

CONC

CALDAT

CALCHE

DIAG

HIRES

NX10NEXTSET><SET

YES

NAME

EVENT

PARAMETERS

NUMBER OF RECORDS

REPORT PERIOD

RS-232 REPORT

CAL MODE

CHANNEL ENABLE

OFF NO

YES2

Sets the maximum number of

records recorded by this

channel

Sets the time lapse between

each report

Create/edit the name of the channel

PREV NEXT

Cycles through

list of available

trigger events3

NOYES2

EDIT2PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV

PRNTEDITSET><SET

YES

Cycles through list of

currently active

parameters for this

channel

MAXMINAVGINST

PRECISIONSAMPLE MODEPARAMETER

Cycles through list of available &

currently active parameters for

this channel

NEXTPREV

Figure A-3: Primary Setup Menu  iDAS Submenu

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-5

SETUP

PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE

ACAL

CFG

SAMPLE

COMM VARS DIAG

EDIT PRNTJUMPNEXTPREV

0) DAS_HOLD_OFF

1) TPC_ENABLE

2) RCELL_SET

3) DYN_ZERO

4) DYN_SPAN

5) CONC_PRECISION

6) CLOCK_ADJ

7) SERVICE_CLEAR

8) TIME_SINCE_SVC

9) SVC_INTERVAL

Go to DIAG Menu Tree

HESN2

INET1

EDITSET><SET

COM1 COM21

TEST PORTBAUD RATEMODE

TEST

300

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

QUIET

COMPUTER

SECURITY

HESSEN PROTOCOL

E, 7, 1

RS-485

MULTIDROP PROTOCOL

ENABLE MODEM

ERROR CHECKING

XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE

HARDWARE HANDSHAKE

HARDWARE FIFO

COMMAND PROMPT

OFF

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

Go to

COMM / Hessen

Menu Tree

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

EDITSET><SET

DHCP

ON OFF

INSTRUMENT IP

GATEWAY IP

SUBNET MASK

TCP PORT4

HOSTNAME5

1E-Series: only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is

installed. NOTE: When Ethernet PCA is present

COM2 submenu disappears.

2Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON

(See COM1 & COM2 – MODE submenu above).

3INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK are only

editable when DHCP is OFF.

4 Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP

state, do not change the setting for this property.

5HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON.

EDITEDIT

Figure A-4: Secondary Setup Menu  COMM and VARS Submenus

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-6

SETUP

PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE

ACAL

CFG

SAMPLE

COMM VARS DIAG

Go to DIAG Menu Tree

HESN2

INET1

ID ENTER PASSWORD: 818

ENTER PASSWORD: 818ENTER PASSWORD: 818

1E-Series: only appears if Ethernet Option is installed.

2Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON.

Go to COMM / VARS

Menu Tree Go to COMM / VARS

Menu Tree

COM1 COM2

EDITSET><SET

GAS LISTRESPONSE MODEVARIATION STATUS FLAGS

TYPE2TYPE1 CMDTEXTBCC

EDIT PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV

NOYES GAS TYPE

GAS ID

REPORTED

OFF

Set/create unique gas ID number

NOX

NO2

SET><SET

NOX, 211, REPORTED

NO, 212, REPORTED

NO2, 213 REPORTED

O2, 214, REPORTED

Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu  Hessen Protocol Submenu

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-7

DISPLAY

SEQUENCE

CONFIGURATION

ANALOG

OUTPUT

SETUP

PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE

ACAL

CFG

SAMPLE

COMM VARS DIAG

NEXTPREV

SIGNAL

I/O

ANALOG

CONFIGURATION OPTIC

TEST ELECTRICAL

TEST OZONE GEN

OVERRIDE FLOW

CALIBRATION

Press ENTR

to start test

Press ENTR

to start test OZONESAMP

OFF

Press ENTR

to start test

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

EDIT PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV

NOYES

Cycles through list of

already programmed

display sequences

NEXTPREV NOX

NXL

NXH

NOL

NOH

NO2

N2L

N2H

DISPLAY DATA

DISPLAY DURATION

ENTR

NEXTPREV 0) EXT ZERO CAL

1) EXT SPAN CAL

2) EXT LOW SPAN

3) REMOTE RANGE HI

4) MAINT MODE

5) LANG2 SELECT

6) SAMPLE LED

7) CAL LED

8) FAULT LED

9) AUDIBLE BEEPER

10) ELEC TEST

11) OPTIC TEST

12) PREAMP RANGE HIGH

13) O3GEN STATUS

14) ST SYSTEM OK

15) ST CONC VALID

16) ST HIGH RANGE

17) ST ZERO CAL

18) ST SPAN CAL

19) ST DIAG MODE

20) ST LOW SPAN CAL

21) ST O2 CAL

22) ST SYSTEM OK2

23) ST CONC ALARM 1

24) ST CONC ALARM 2

25) RELAY WATCHDOG

26) RCELL HEATER

27) CONV HEATER

28) MANIFOLD HEATER

29) O2 CELL HEATER

30) ZERO VALVE

31) CAL VALVE

32) AUTO ZERO VALVE

33) NOX VALVE

34) LOW SPAN VALVE

35) HIGH SPAN VALVE

36 INTERNAL ANALOG

to VOLTAGE SIGNALS

61 (see Appendix A)

OFF CAL

EDITSET><SET

AOUTS CALIBRATED

DATA OUT 11

DATA OUT 21

DATA OUT 31

DATA OUT 41

AIN CALIBRATED

10V CURR5V1V0.1V

OFF

CAL2

Auto Cal Sets time lapse

between data

updates on

selected output

Sets the scale

width of the

reporting range.

RANGE OVER

RANGE CALIBRATED OUTPUT DATA SCALE UPDATE

Cycles

through the

list of iDAS

data types.

RANGE

OFFSET2AUTO2

CAL

Sets the

degree of

offset

OFF

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100

Manual Cal3

1Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of analyzer

2Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected.

3Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the

range is set for CURRent.

Figure A-6: DIAG Menu

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-8

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

Table A-1: Setup Variables

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)

DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0.5–20 Duration of DAS hold off period.

MEASURE_MODE — NO-NOX,

NOX 8

NO,

NOX, NOX-

NO,

NON-OX

Gas measure mode. Enclose

value in double quotes (") when

setting from the RS-232

interface.

STABIL_GAS — NOX NO,

NO2,

NOX,

O2 14,

CO2 15

Selects gas for stability

measurement. Enclose value in

double quotes (") when setting

from the RS-232 interface.

TPC_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON

ON enables temperature/

pressure compensation; OFF

disables it.

DYN_ZERO — OFF ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic

zero calibration; OFF disables it.

DYN_SPAN — OFF ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic

span calibration; OFF disables it.

51 IZS_SET 3 ºC

Warnings:

50–52

30–70 IZS temperature set point and

warning limits.

CONC_PRECISION — AUTO

3 4, 5

AUTO,

Number of digits to display to the

right of the decimal point for

concentrations on the display.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

STAT_REP_GAS 8 — NOX NO,

NO2,

NOX,

CO2 15,

O2 14

Selects gas to report in TAI

protocol status message.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

REM_CAL_DURATION 8 Minutes 20 1–120 Duration of automatic calibration

initiated from TAI protocol.

CLOCK_ADJ Sec./Day 0 -60–60

Time-of-day clock speed

adjustment.

SERVICE_CLEAR — OFF OFF

ON resets the service interval

timer.

TIME_SINCE_SVC Hours 0 0–500000 Time since last service.

SVC_INTERVAL Hours 0 0–100000

Sets the interval between service

reminders.

CAL_ON_NO2 3 — OFF ON, OFF

ON enables span calibration on

pure NO2; OFF disables it.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-9

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)

LANGUAGE_SELECT — ENGL ENGL,

SECD,

EXTN

Selects the language to use for

the user interface. Enclose value

in double quotes (") when setting

from the RS-232 interface.

MAINT_TIMEOUT Hours 2 0.1–100

Time until automatically

switching out of software-

controlled maintenance mode.

LATCH_WARNINGS — ON ON, OFF

ON enables latching warning

messages; OFF disables latching

DAYLIGHTSAVING_ENABLE — ON ON, OFF ON enables Daylight Saving

Time change; OFF disables

DST.

BXTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10

Box temperature compensation

attenuation factor.

RCTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10

Reaction cell temperature

compensation attenuation factor.

RCPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10 Reaction cell pressure

compensation attenuation factor.

SPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10

Sample pressure compensation

attenuation factor.

CE_CONC1A — 1 0-10000

Target CE concentration cal pt A

for range 1.

CONV_EFF1A — 1 0.8–1.2,

0.1–2 6, 19

Converter efficiency cal pt A for

range 1.

CE_CONC1B 19 — 1 0-10000

Target CE concentration cal pt B

for range 1.

CONV_EFF1B 19 — 1 0.1–2 Converter efficiency cal pt B for

range 1.

CE_OFFSET1 19 — 1 0.1–2

CE linearization Offset for range

CE_SLOPE1 19 — 1 -10–10

CE linearization Slope for range

CE_CONC2A — 1 0-10000

Target CE concentration cal pt A

for range 2.

CONV_EFF2A — 1 0.8–1.2,

0.1–2 6, 19

Converter efficiency cal pt A for

range 2.

CE_CONC2B 19 — 1 0-10000

Target CE concentration cal pt B

for range 2.

CONV_EFF2B 19 — 1 0.1–2 Converter efficiency cal pt B for

range 2.

CE_OFFSET2 19 — 1 0.1–2

CE linearization Offset for range

CE_SLOPE2 19 — 1 -10–10

CE linearization Slope for range

NEG_NO2_SUPPRESS — ON ON, OFF

ON suppresses negative NO2 in

during switching mode;

OFF does not suppress negative

NO2 readings

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-10

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

FILT_SIZE Samples 42,

10 4,9

1–500 Moving average filter size.

SG_FILT_SIZE Samples 60 1–500

Moving average filter size in

single-gas measure modes.

FILT_ADAPT — ON ON, OFF

ON enables adaptive filter; OFF

disables it.

FILT_OMIT_DELTA PPM 0.05

10 4,

0.03 5,

0.8 9

0.005–0.13,5,

5–100 4,

0.1–100 9

Absolute change in concentration

to omit readings.

FILT_OMIT_PCT % 10

3,4,

8 5

1–100 Percent change in concentration

to omit readings.

FILT_SHORT_DELT PPM 0.04

5 4,

0.015 5,

0.5 9

0.005–0.13,5,

5–100 4,

0.1–100 9

Absolute change in concentration

to shorten filter.

FILT_SHORT_PCT % 8

3,5,

5 4,

7 9

1–100 Percent change in concentration

to shorten filter.

FILT_ASIZE Samples 3,

2 4,

4 5

1–500 Moving average filter size in

adaptive mode.

SG_FILT_ASIZE Samples 6,

4 5

1–500 Moving average filter size in

adaptive mode, in single-gas

measure modes.

FILT_DELAY Seconds 120

60 4,

200 5,

80 9

0–200 Delay before leaving adaptive

filter mode.

SG_FILT_DELAY Seconds 200

0–200 Delay before leaving adaptive

filter mode in single-gas measure

modes.

CO2_DWELL 15 Seconds 1 0.1–30

Dwell time before taking each

sample.

CO2_FILT_ADAPT 15 — ON ON, OFF

ON enables CO2 adaptive filter;

OFF disables it.

CO2_FILT_SIZE 15 Samples 48 1–300 CO2 moving average filter size.

CO2_FILT_ASIZE 15 Samples 12 1–300

CO2 moving average filter size in

adaptive mode.

CO2_FILT_DELTA 15 % 2 0.01–10

Absolute CO2 conc. change to

trigger adaptive filter.

CO2_FILT_PCT 15 % 10 0.1–100

Percent CO2 conc. change to

trigger adaptive filter.

CO2_FILT_DELAY 15 Seconds 90 0–300

Delay before leaving CO2

adaptive filter mode.

CO2_DIL_FACTOR 15 — 1 0.1–1000

Dilution factor for CO2. Used only

if is dilution enabled with

FACTORY_OPT variable.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-11

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

O2_DWELL 14 Seconds 1 0.1–30

Dwell time before taking each

sample.

O2_FILT_ADAPT 14 — ON ON, OFF

ON enables O2 adaptive filter;

OFF disables it.

O2_FILT_SIZE 14 Samples 60 1–500

O2 moving average filter size in

normal mode.

O2_FILT_ASIZE 14 Samples 10 1–500

O2 moving average filter size in

adaptive mode.

O2_FILT_DELTA 14 % 2 0.1–100

Absolute change in O2

concentration to shorten filter.

O2_FILT_PCT 14 % 2 0.1–100

Relative change in O2

concentration to shorten filter.

O2_FILT_DELAY 14 Seconds 20 0–300

Delay before leaving O2 adaptive

filter mode.

O2_DIL_FACTOR 14 — 1 0.1–1000

Dilution factor for O2. Used only if

is dilution enabled with

FACTORY_OPT variable.

NOX_DWELL Seconds 2.5

4.2 4,

4 5,

3.5 9

0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve

to NOX position.

SG_NOX_DWELL Seconds 4

0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve

to NOX position in single-gas

measure modes.

NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30

Number of samples to take in

NOX mode.

SG_NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30

Number of samples to take in

NOX mode in single-gas measure

modes.

NO_DWELL Seconds 1.5

3,5,

4.2 4,

3.0 9

0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve

to NO position.

SG_NO_DWELL Seconds 1.5

0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve

to NO position in single-gas

measure modes.

NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30

Number of samples to take in NO

mode.

SG_NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30

Number of samples to take in NO

mode in single-gas measure

modes.

USER_UNITS — PPB

3, 5,

PPM 4, 9

PPB 3, 5,

PPM 3, 4, 9,

UGM 3, 5,

MGM 3, 4, 9

Concentration units for user

interface. Enclose value in

double quotes (") when setting

from the RS-232 interface.

DIL_FACTOR — 1 1–1000

Dilution factor. Used only if is

dilution enabled with

FACTORY_OPT variable.

AGING_ENABLE20 — OFF ON, OFF

ON enables aging offset and

slope compensation.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-12

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

AGING_OFFSET_RATE20 mV/day 0 -1.0–1.0 Aging offset rate of change per

day.

AGING_SLOPE_RATE20 Change/day 0 -0.01–0.01

Aging slope rate of change per

day.

AZERO_ENABLE — ON,

OFF 8

ON, OFF ON enables auto-zero; OFF

disables it.

AZERO_FREQ Minutes 1

3,5,

2 4

0–60 Auto-zero frequency.

AZERO_DWELL Seconds 2

4 4,

1.5 5

0.1–60 Dwell time after opening auto-

zero valve.

AZERO_POST_DWELL Seconds 2

4 4,

1.5 5

0–60 Dwell time after closing auto-zero

valve.

AZERO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–10

Number of auto-zero samples to

average.

SG_AZERO_SAMP Samples 2 1–10

Number of auto-zero samples to

average in single-gas measure

modes.

AZERO_FSIZE 3,4,6,8 Samples 15

8 4

1–50 Moving average filter size for

auto-zero samples.

AZERO_LIMIT mV 200

4000 5

0–1000 3,

0–5000 5

Maximum auto-zero offset

allowed.

NOX_TARG_ZERO1 Conc 0 -100–999.99

Target NOX concentration during

zero calibration of range 1.

NOX_SPAN1 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NOX concentration during

span calibration of range 1.

NO_TARG_ZERO1 Conc 0 -100–999.99

Target NO concentration during

zero calibration of range 1.

NO_SPAN1 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NO concentration during

span calibration of range 1.

NO2_SPAN1 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NO2 concentration during

converter efficiency calibration of

range 1.

NOX_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NOX slope for range 1.

NOX_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10–10 NOX offset for range 1.

NO_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NO slope for range 1.

NO_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10–10 NO offset for range 1.

NOX_TARG_ZERO2 Conc 0 -100–999.99

Target NOX concentration during

zero calibration of range 2.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-13

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

NOX_SPAN2 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NOX concentration during

span calibration of range 2.

NO_TARG_ZERO2 Conc 0 -100–999.99

Target NO concentration during

zero calibration of range 2.

NO_SPAN2 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NO concentration during

span calibration of range 2.

NO2_SPAN2 Conc. 400,

80 4,

20 11,

16 9

0.01–9999.99 Target NO2 concentration during

converter efficiency calibration of

range 2.

NOX_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NOX slope for range 2.

NOX_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10–10 NOX offset for range 2.

NO_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NO slope for range 2.

NO_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10–10 NO offset for range 2.

CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 15 % 12 0.01–100,

0.01–9999.99

Target CO2 concentration during

span calibration.

CO2_SLOPE 15 — 1 0.5–5 CO2 slope.

CO2_OFFSET 15 % 0 -10–10,

-100–100 16

CO2 offset.

O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 14 % 20.95 0.1–100 Target O2 concentration during

span calibration.

O2_SLOPE 14 — 1 0.5–2 O2 slope.

O2_OFFSET 14 % 0 -10–10 O2 offset.

RANGE_MODE — SNGL SNGL,

IND,

AUTO,

REM 4,5

Range control mode. Enclose

value in double quotes (") when

setting from the RS-232

interface.

PHYS_RANGE1 PPM 2,

20 9,

500 4,

1 11

0.1–2500,

5–5000 9,

5–10000 4

Low pre-amp range.

PHYS_RANGE2 PPM 22,

220 9,

5500 4,

100 11

0.1–2500,

5–5000 9,

5–10000 4

High pre-amp range.

CONC_RANGE1 Conc. 500,

100 4,

20 9

1–20000,

1–10000 4,

1–500 9

D/A concentration range 1 or

range for NOX.

CONC_RANGE2 1 Conc. 500,

100 4,

1–20000,

1–10000 4,

D/A concentration range 2 or

range for NO.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-14

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

200 9 1–500

CONC_RANGE3 1 Conc. 500,

100 4,

20 9

1–20000,

1–10000 4,

1–500 9

D/A concentration range 3 or

range for NO2.

CO2_RANGE 15 % 15 0.1–500 CO2 concentration range.

O2_RANGE 14 % 100 0.1–500 O2 concentration range.

50 3,4,

40 5

RCELL_SET ºC

Warnings:

45–55 3,4,

35–45 5

30–70 Reaction cell temperature set

point and warning limits.

50 4,6,8,

40 5

MANIFOLD_SET 5 ºC

Warnings:

45–55 4,6,8,

35–45 5

30–70 Manifold temperature set point

and warning limits.

CONV_TYPE — MOLY

3,5, 9,

CONV 4,

O3KL 6

NONE, MOLY,

CONV, O3KL

Converter type. “CONV” is mini-

hicon. Enclose value in double

quotes (") when setting from the

RS-232 interface. Changing this

variable changes CONV_SET

accordingly.

315,

200 6

CONV_SET ºC

Warnings:

305–325,

190–210 6

0–800 Converter temperature set point

and warning limits.

30 BOX_SET ºC

Warnings:

7–48

0–70 Nominal box temperature set

point and warning limits.

7 3,4,

5 5

PMT_SET ºC

Warnings:

5–12 3,4,

3–7 5

0–40 3,4,

-10–40 5

PMT temperature warning limits.

Set point is not used.

500,

290 4,

360 4+14,

250 9,

320 9+14

SFLOW_SET cc/m

Warnings:

350–600,

200–600 4,9,

300–700 4+14,

9+14

0–1000,

100–1000 4, 9

Sample flow warning limits. Set

point is not used.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-15

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001–100

Slope term to correct sample

flow rate.

80,

250 4, 9

OFLOW_SET cc/m

Warnings:

50–150,

200–600 4, 9

0–500,

100–1000 4, 9

Ozone flow warning limits. Set

point is not used.

OZONE_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001–100

Slope term to correct ozone flow

rate.

RCELL_PRESS_CONST2 — 3.6 -99.999–

99.999 Reaction cell pressure

compensation constant #2.

RCELL_PRESS_CONST3 — -1.1 -99.999–

99.999 Reaction cell pressure

compensation constant #3.

PRESS_FILT_SIZE Samples 3,

30 5

1–20,

1–120 5

Sample and reaction cell

pressure moving average filter

size.

PRESS_SAMP_FREQ 5 Seconds 20 1–120 Sample and reaction cell

pressure sampling frequency.

RS232_MODE — 0 0–65535

RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add

values to combine flags.

1 = quiet mode

2 = computer mode

4 = enable security

16 = enable Hessen protocol 12

32 = enable multidrop

64 = enable modem

128 = ignore RS-232 line errors

256 = disable XON / XOFF

support

512 = disable hardware FIFOs

1024 = enable RS-485 mode

2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1

stop bit

4096 = enable command prompt

BAUD_RATE — 115200 300,

1200,

2400,

4800,

9600,

19200,

38400,

57600,

115200

RS-232 COM1 baud rate.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

MODEM_INIT —

“AT Y0 &D0

&H0 &I0 S0=2

&B0 &N6 &M0

E0 Q1 &W0”

Any character

in the allowed

character set.

Up to 100

characters

long.

RS-232 COM1 modem

initialization string. Sent verbatim

plus carriage return to modem on

power up or manually. Enclose

value in double quotes (") when

setting from the RS-232

interface.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-16

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

RS232_MODE2 BitFlag 0,

3 8

0–65535 RS-232 COM2 mode flags.

(Same settings as

RS232_MODE, plus these when

MODBUS option is installed:)

8192 = enable dedicated

MODBUS ASCII protocol

16384 = enable dedicated

MODBUS RTU or TCP protocol

BAUD_RATE2 — 19200,

9600 8

300,

1200,

2400,

4800,

9600,

19200,

38400,

57600,

115200

RS-232 COM2 baud rate.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

MODEM_INIT2 —

“AT Y0 &D0

&H0 &I0 S0=2

&B0 &N6 &M0

E0 Q1 &W0”

Any character

in the allowed

character set.

Up to 100

characters

long.

RS-232 COM2 modem

initialization string. Sent verbatim

plus carriage return to modem on

power up or manually. Enclose

value in double quotes (") when

setting from the RS-232

interface.

RS232_PASS Password 940331 0–999999 RS-232 log on password.

MACHINE_ID ID 200 0–9999 Unique ID number for instrument.

COMMAND_PROMPT — “Cmd> ”

Any character

in the allowed

character set.

Up to 100

characters

long.

RS-232 interface command

prompt. Displayed only if enabled

with RS232_MODE variable.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

TEST_CHAN_ID — NONE

NONE,

PMT DE-

TECTOR,

OZONE FLOW,

SAMPLE FLOW,

SAMPLE

PRESSURE,

RCELL

PRESSURE,

RCELL TEMP,

MANIFOLD

TEMP,

IZS TEMP,

CONV TEMP,

PMT TEMP,

BOX TEMP,

HVPS

VOLTAGE

Diagnostic analog output ID.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-17

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

REMOTE_CAL_MODE 3 — LOW LOW,

HIGH,

CO2 15,

O2 14

Range to calibrate during remote

calibration. Enclose value in

double quotes (") when setting

from the RS-232 interface.

PASS_ENABLE — OFF ON, OFF

ON enables passwords; OFF

disables them.

STABIL_FREQ Seconds 10 1–300

Stability measurement sampling

frequency.

STABIL_SAMPLES Samples 25 2–40

Number of samples in

concentration stability reading.

650 3,5,

550 4,

600 9

HVPS_SET Volts

Warnings:

400–900 3,5,

400–700 4,

450–750 9

0–2000 High voltage power supply

warning limits. Set point is not

used.

6 RCELL_PRESS_SET In-Hg

Warnings:

0.5–15

0–100 Reaction cell pressure warning

limits. Set point is not used.

RCELL_CYCLE Seconds 10 0.5–30

Reaction cell temperature control

cycle period.

RCELL_PROP 1/ºC 1 0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature

control proportional coefficient.

RCELL_INTEG — 0.1 0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature

control integral coefficient.

RCELL_DERIV — 0 (disabled) 0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature

control derivative coefficient.

MANIFOLD_CYCLE 5 Seconds 5 0.5–30

Manifold temperature control

cycle period.

MANIFOLD_PROP 5 1/ºC 0.2 0–10

Manifold PID temperature control

proportional coefficient.

MANIFOLD_INTEG 5 — 0.1 0–10

Manifold PID temperature control

integral coefficient.

MANIFOLD_DERIV 5 — 0.5 0–10

Manifold PID temperature control

derivative coefficient.

IZS_CYCLE 3 Seconds 2 0.5–30

IZS temperature control cycle

period.

IZS_PROP 3 1/ºC 1 0–10

IZS temperature PID proportional

coefficient.

IZS_INTEG 3 — 0.03 0–10

IZS temperature PID integral

coefficient.

IZS_DERIV 3 — 0 0–10

IZS temperature PID derivative

coefficient.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-18

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

50 CO2_CELL_SET 15 ºC

Warnings:

45–55

30–70 CO2 sensor cell temperature set

point and warning limits.

CO2_CELL_CYCLE 15 Seconds 10 0.5–30

CO2 cell temperature control

cycle period.

CO2_CELL_PROP 15 — 1 0–10

CO2 cell PID temperature control

proportional coefficient.

CO2_CELL_INTEG 15 — 0.1 0–10

CO2 cell PID temperature control

integral coefficient.

CO2_CELL_DERIV 15 — 0 (disabled) 0–10

CO2 cell PID temperature control

derivative coefficient.

STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 14 ºK 323 1–500 Standard O2 cell temperature for

temperature compensation.

50 O2_CELL_SET 14 ºC

Warnings:

45–55

30–70 O2 sensor cell temperature set

point and warning limits.

O2_CELL_CYCLE 14 Seconds 10 0.5–30

O2 cell temperature control cycle

period.

O2_CELL_PROP 14 — 1 0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control

proportional coefficient.

O2_CELL_INTEG 14 — 0.1 0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control

integral coefficient.

O2_CELL_DERIV 14 — 0 (disabled) 0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control

derivative coefficient.

STAT_REP_PERIOD 8 Seconds 1 0.5–120

TAI protocol status message

report period.

SERIAL_NUMBER — “00000000 ” Any

character in

the allowed

character

set. Up to

100

characters

long.

Unique serial number for

instrument. Enclose value

in double quotes (") when

setting from the RS-232

interface.

DISP_INTENSITY — HIGH HIGH,

MED,

LOW,

DIM

Front panel display intensity.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

I2C_RESET_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON I2C bus automatic reset enable.

ALARM_TRIGGER 17 Cycles 3 1–100

Number of times concentration

must exceed limit to trigger

alarm.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O

A-19

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

CLOCK_FORMAT —

“TIME=%H:%

M:%S” Any character

in the allowed

character set.

Up to 100

characters

long.

Time-of-day clock format flags.

Enclose value in double quotes

(") when setting from the RS-232

interface.

“%a” = Abbreviated weekday

name.

“%b” = Abbreviated month name.

“%d” = Day of month as decimal

number (01 – 31).

“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format

(00 – 23).

“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01

– 12).

“%j” = Day of year as decimal

number (001 – 366).

“%m” = Month as decimal

number (01 – 12).

“%M” = Minute as decimal

number (00 – 59).

“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for

12-hour clock.

“%S” = Second as decimal

number (00 – 59).

“%w” = Weekday as decimal

number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0).

“%y” = Year without century, as

decimal number (00 – 99).

“%Y” = Year with century, as

decimal number.

“%%” = Percent sign.

FACTORY_OPT — 0,

512 5,6

0–0x7fffffff Factory option flags. Add values

to combine flags.

1 = enable dilution factor

2 = display units in concentration

field

4 = zero/span valves installed

8 18 = low span valve installed

16 3 = IZS and zero/span valves

installed

32 = enable software-controlled

maintenance mode

64 = display temperature in

converter warning message

128 = enable switch-controlled

maintenance mode

256 = not used

512 = enable manifold

temperature control

1024 = enable concentration

alarms 17

2048 = enable Internet option 22

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-20

Setup Variable Numeric

Units Default

Value Value

Range Description

4096 = suppress front panel

warnings

8192 = enable non-zero offset

calibration

16384 = enable pressurized zero

calibration

32768 = enable pressurized

span calibration

0x10000 = enable external

analog inputs 21

1 Multi-range modes.

2 Hessen protocol.

3 T200, M200E.

4 T200H, M200EH.

5 T200U, M200EU.

6 M200EUP.

7 “De-tuned” instrument.

8 TAI protocol

9 T200M, M200EM.

10 User-configurable D/A output option.

11 SUNLAW special.

12 Must power-cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect.

14 O

2 option.

15 CO2 option.

16 CO2 PPM sensor.

17 Concentration alarm option.

18 Low span option.

19 2 point Converter Efficiency option.

20 Aging Compensation option.

21 T Series external analog input option.

22 E Series internet option.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements

A-21

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements

Table A-2: Warning Messages

Name 1 Message Text Description

Warnings

WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU

was reset.

WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased.

WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory

configuration or erased.

WNOXALARM1 9 NOX ALARM 1 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #1

exceeded

WNOXALARM2 9 NOX ALARM 2 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #2

exceeded

WNOALARM1 9 NO ALARM 1 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

WNOALARM2 9 NO ALARM 2 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

WNO2ALARM1 9 NO2 ALARM 1 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #1

exceeded

WNO2ALARM2 9 NO2 ALARM 2 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #2

exceeded

WO2ALARM1 5+9 O2 ALARM 1 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

WO2ALARM2 5+9 O2 ALARM 2 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

WCO2ALARM1 8+9 CO2 ALARM 1 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #1

exceeded

WCO2ALARM2 8+9 CO2 ALARM 2 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #2

exceeded

WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits

specified by SFLOW_SET variable.

WOZONEFLOW OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow outside of warning limits

specified by OFLOW_SET variable.

WOZONEGEN OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only

warning message that automatically

clears itself. It clears itself when the ozone

generator is turned on.

WRCELLPRESS RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of warning

limits specified by RCELL_PRESS_SET

variable.

WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING

Chassis temperature outside of warning

limits specified by BOX_SET variable.

WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING

Reaction cell temperature outside of

warning limits specified by RCELL_SET

variable.

WMANIFOLDTEMP 4 MANIFOLD TEMP WARN Bypass or dilution manifold temperature

outside of warning limits specified by

MANIFOLD_SET variable.

WCO2CELLTEMP 8 CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CO2 sensor cell temperature outside of

warning limits specified by

CO2_CELL_SET variable.

WO2CELLTEMP 5 O2 CELL TEMP WARN O2 sensor cell temperature outside of

warning limits specified by O2_CELL_SET

variable.

WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning limits

specified by IZS_SET variable.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-22

Name 1 Message Text Description

Warnings

WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING

Converter temperature outside of warning

limits specified by CONV_SET variable.

WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits

specified by PMT_SET variable.

WAUTOZERO

WPREREACT 11

AZERO WRN XXX.X MV

PRACT WRN XXX.X MV 11

Auto-zero reading above limit specified by

AZERO_LIMIT variable. Value shown in

message indicates auto-zero reading at

time warning was displayed.

WHVPS HVPS WARNING

High voltage power supply output outside

of warning limits specified by HVPS_SET

variable.

WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed

while DYN_ZERO was set to ON.

WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed

while DYN_SPAN was set to ON.

WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during

power up.

WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with

the relay board.

WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with

the front panel.

WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel has

not been calibrated.

1 The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.

2 Engineering firmware only.

3 Current instrument units.

4 Factory option.

5 O

2 option.

6 User-configurable D/A output option.

7 Optional.

8 CO2 option.

9 Concentration alarm option.

10 M200EUP.

11 T200U, T200U_NOy, M200EU and M200EU_NOy.

12 T-Series External analog input option.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements

A-23

Table A-3: Test Measurements

Test Measurement Name Message Text Description

Test measurements

NONOXCONC NO=396.5 NOX=396.5 3 Simultaneously displays NO and NOX

concentrations.

RANGE not 6 RANGE=500.0 PPB 3 D/A range in single or auto-range modes.

RANGE1 not 6 RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #1 range in independent range mode.

RANGE2 not 6 RANGE2=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #2 range in independent range mode.

RANGE3 not 6 RANGE3=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #3 range in independent range mode.

STABILITY NOX STB=0.0 PPB 3

O2 STB=0.0 PCT 5

CO2 STB=0.0 PCT 8

Concentration stability (standard deviation

based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and

STABIL_SAMPLES). Select gas with

STABIL_GAS variable.

RESPONSE 2 RSP=8.81(1.30) SEC Instrument response. Length of each

signal processing loop. Time in

parenthesis is standard deviation.

SAMPFLOW SAMP FLW=460 CC/M Sample flow rate.

OZONEFLOW OZONE FL=87 CC/M Ozone flow rate.

PMT PMT=800.0 MV Raw PMT reading.

NORMPMT NORM PMT=793.0 MV PMT reading normalized for temperature,

pressure, auto-zero offset, but not range.

AUTOZERO AZERO=1.3 MV Auto-zero offset.

HVPS HVPS=650 V High voltage power supply output.

RCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP=50.8 C Reaction cell temperature.

BOXTEMP BOX TEMP=28.2 C Internal chassis temperature.

REMBOXTEMP 10 REM BOX TMP=30.1 C Remote chassis temperature.

PMTTEMP PMT TEMP=7.0 C PMT temperature.

MANIFOLDTEMP 4 MF TEMP=50.8 C Bypass or dilution manifold temperature.

CO2CELLTEMP 8 CO2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C CO2 sensor cell temperature.

O2CELLTEMP 5 O2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C O2 sensor cell temperature.

IZSTEMP IZS TEMP=50.8 C IZS temperature.

CONVTEMP MOLY TEMP=315.0 C

Converter temperature. Converter type is

MOLY, CONV, or O3KL.

SAMPRESTTEMP 10 SMP RST TMP=49.8 C Sample restrictor temperature.

RCELLPRESS RCEL=7.0 IN-HG-A Reaction cell pressure.

SAMPPRESS SAMP=29.9 IN-HG-A Sample pressure.

NOXSLOPE NOX SLOPE=1.000 NOX slope for current range, computed

during zero/span calibration.

NOXOFFSET NOX OFFS=0.0 MV NOX offset for current range, computed

during zero/span calibration.

NOSLOPE NO SLOPE=1.000 NO slope for current range, computed

during zero/span calibration.

NOOFFSET NO OFFS=0.0 MV NO offset for current range, computed

during zero/span calibration.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-24

Test Measurement Name Message Text Description

Test measurements

NO2 NO2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for current range.

NO2_1 7 NO2_1=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for range #1.

NO2_2 7 NO2_2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for range #2.

NOX NOX=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for current range.

NOX_1 7 NOX_1=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for range #1.

NOX_2 7 NOX_2=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for range #2.

NO NO=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for current range.

NO_1 7 NO_1=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for range #1.

NO_2 7 NO_2=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for range #2.

CO2RANGE 8, not 6 CO2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for CO2 concentration.

CO2SLOPE 8 CO2 SLOPE=1.000 CO2 slope, computed during zero/span

calibration.

CO2OFFSET 8 CO2 OFFSET=0.000 CO2 offset, computed during zero/span

calibration.

CO2 8 CO2=15.0 % CO2 concentration.

O2RANGE 5, not 6 O2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for O2 concentration.

O2SLOPE 5 O2 SLOPE=1.000 O2 slope computed during zero/span

calibration.

O2OFFSET 5 O2 OFFSET=0.00 % O2 offset computed during zero/span

calibration.

O2 5 O2=0.00 % O2 concentration.

TESTCHAN 5,6,8 TEST=3627.1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog

output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID

variable.

XIN1 12 AIN1=37.15 EU External analog input 1 value in

engineering units.

XIN2 12 AIN2=37.15 EU External analog input 2 value in

engineering units.

XIN3 12 AIN3=37.15 EU External analog input 3 value in

engineering units.

XIN4 12 AIN4=37.15 EU External analog input 4 value in

engineering units.

XIN5 12 AIN5=37.15 EU External analog input 5 value in

engineering units.

XIN6 12 AIN6=37.15 EU External analog input 6 value in

engineering units.

XIN7 12 AIN7=37.15 EU External analog input 7 value in

engineering units.

XIN8 12 AIN8=37.15 EU External analog input 8 value in

engineering units.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements

A-25

Test Measurement Name Message Text Description

Test measurements

CLOCKTIME TIME=10:38:27 Current instrument time of day clock.

1 The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.

2 Engineering firmware only.

3 Current instrument units.

4 Factory option.

5 O

2 option.

6 User-configurable D/A output option.

7 Optional.

8 CO2 option.

9 Concentration alarm option.

10 M200EUP.

11 T200U, T200U_NOy, M200EU and M200EU_NOy.

12 T-Series External analog input option.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-26

APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions

Table A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Signal Name Bit or Channel

Number Description

Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex

0–7 Spare

Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex

ELEC_TEST 0 1 = electrical test on

0 = off

OPTIC_TEST 1 1 = optic test on

0 = off

PREAMP_RANGE_HI 2 1 = select high preamp range

0 = select low range

O3GEN_STATUS 3 0 = ozone generator on

1 = off

4–5 Spare

I2C_RESET 6 1 = reset I2C peripherals

0 = normal

I2C_DRV_RST 7 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip

1 = normal

Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex

EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 0 = go into zero calibration

1 = exit zero calibration

EXT_SPAN_CAL 1 0 = go into span calibration

1 = exit span calibration

EXT_LOW_SPAN 20 2 0 = go into low span calibration

1 = exit low span calibration

REMOTE_RANGE_HI 21 3 0 = remote select high range

1 = default range

CAL_MODE_0 5

CAL_MODE_1

CAL_MODE_2

Three inputs, taken as binary number (CAL_MODE_2 is

MSB) select calibration level and range:

0 & 7 = Measure

1 = Zero, range #3

2 = Span, range #3

3 = Zero, range #2

4 = Span, range #2

5 = Zero, range #1

6 = Span, range #1

4–5 Spare

6–7 Always 1

Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex

0–5 Spare

6–7 Always 1

Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex

0–7 Spare

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions

A-27

Signal Name Bit or Channel

Number Description

Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex

0–3 Spare

Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex

ST_SYSTEM_OK2 12 1 = system OK

0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode

MB_RELAY_36 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register

OUT_CAL_MODE 13

1 = calibration mode

0 = measure mode

ST_CONC_ALARM_1 17 1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded

0 = conc. OK

MB_RELAY_37 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register

OUT_SPAN_CAL 13

1 = span calibration

0 = zero calibration

ST_CONC_ALARM_2 17 1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded

0 = conc. OK

MB_RELAY_38 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register

OUT_PROBE_1 13

0 = select probe #1

1 = not selected

ST_HIGH_RANGE2 19 1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors ST_HIGH_RANGE

status output)

0 = low auto-range

MB_RELAY_39 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register

OUT_PROBE_2 13

0 = select probe #2

1 = not selected

A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex

ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK

1 = any alarm condition

ST_CONC_VALID 1 0 = conc. valid

1 = conc. filters contain no data

ST_HIGH_RANGE 2 0 = high auto-range in use

1 = low auto-range

ST_ZERO_CAL 3 0 = in zero calibration

1 = not in zero

ST_SPAN_CAL 4 0 = in span calibration

1 = not in span

ST_DIAG_MODE 5 0 = in diagnostic mode

1 = not in diagnostic mode

ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL 20 6 0 = in low span calibration

1 = not in low span

ST_O2_CAL 11 7 0 = in O2 calibration mode

1 = in measure or other calibration mode

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-28

Signal Name Bit or Channel

Number Description

B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex

ST_CO2_CAL 15 0 0 = in CO2 calibration mode

1 = in measure or other calibration mode

1–7 Spare

Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex

MAINT_MODE 5 (input) 0 = maintenance mode

1 = normal mode

LANG2_SELECT 6 (input) 0 = select second language

1 = select first language (English)

SAMPLE_LED 8 (output) 0 = sample LED on

1 = off

CAL_LED 9 (output) 0 = cal. LED on

1 = off

FAULT_LED 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on

1 = off

AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)

1 = off

Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I2C address 44 hex

RELAY_WATCHDOG 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep

relay board active

RCELL_HEATER 1 0 = reaction cell heater on

1 = off

CONV_HEATER 2 0 = converter heater on

1 = off

MANIFOLD_HEATER 10 3 0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater on

1 = off

IZS_HEATER 0 = IZS heater on

1 = off

CO2_CELL_HEATER 15

0 = CO2 sensor cell heater on

1 = off

O2_CELL_HEATER 11 5 0 = O2 sensor cell heater on

1 = off

SPAN_VALVE 0 = let span gas in

1 = let zero gas in

ZERO_VALVE 3

0 = let zero gas in

1 = let sample gas in

CAL_VALVE 7 0 = let cal. gas in

1 = let sample gas in

AUTO_ZERO_VALVE 8 0 = let zero air in

1 = let sample gas in

NOX_VALVE 0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell

1 = let NO gas into reaction cell

NO2_CONVERTER 4

0 = turn on NO2 converter (measure NOx)

1 = turn off NO2 converter (measure NO)

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions

A-29

Signal Name Bit or Channel

Number Description

LOW_SPAN_VALVE 20 10 0 = let low span gas in

1 = let high span/sample gas in

SPAN_VALVE 3 11 0 = let span gas in

1 = let sample gas in

NO2_VALVE 16 0 = let NO2 gas into reaction cell

1 = let NOX/NO gas into reaction cell

VENT_VALVE 7

0 = open vent valve

1 = close vent valve

13–15 Spare

Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex

PMT_SIGNAL 0 PMT detector

HVPS_VOLTAGE 1 HV power supply output

PMT_TEMP 2 PMT temperature

CO2_SENSOR 15 3 CO2 concentration sensor

4 Temperature MUX

5 Spare

O2_SENSOR 11 6 O2 concentration sensor

SAMPLE_PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure

RCELL_PRESSURE 8 Reaction cell pressure

REF_4096_MV 9 4.096V reference from MAX6241

OZONE_FLOW 10 Ozone flow rate

TEST_INPUT_11 Diagnostic test input

SAMP_REST_TEMP 4

Sample restrictor temperature

CONV_TEMP 12 Converter temperature

TEST_INPUT_13 13 Diagnostic test input

14 DAC loopback MUX

REF_GND 15 Ground reference

Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex

BOX_TEMP 0 Internal box temperature

RCELL_TEMP 1 Reaction cell temperature

IZS_TEMP IZS temperature

CO2_CELL_TEMP 15

CO2 sensor cell temperature

3 Spare

O2_CELL_TEMP 11 4 O2 sensor cell temperature

TEMP_INPUT_5 Diagnostic temperature input

REM_BOX_TEMP 4

Remote box temperature

TEMP_INPUT_6 6 Diagnostic temperature input

MANIFOLD_TEMP 10 7 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature

Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex

DAC_CHAN_1 0 DAC channel 0 loopback

DAC_CHAN_2 1 DAC channel 1 loopback

DAC_CHAN_3 2 DAC channel 2 loopback

DAC_CHAN_4 3 DAC channel 3 loopback

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-30

Signal Name Bit or Channel

Number Description

Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex

CONC_OUT_1 Concentration output #1 (NOX)

DATA_OUT_1 6

Data output #1

CONC_OUT_2 Concentration output #2 (NO)

DATA_OUT_2 6

Data output #2

CONC_OUT_3 Concentration output #3 (NO2)

DATA_OUT_3 6

Data output #3

TEST_OUTPUT Test measurement output

CONC_OUT_4 11, 15 Concentration output #4 (CO2 or O2)

DATA_OUT_4 6

Data output #4

External analog input board, default I2C address 5C hex

XIN1 22 0 External analog input 1

XIN2 22 1 External analog input 2

XIN3 22 2 External analog input 3

XIN4 22 3 External analog input 4

XIN5 22 4 External analog input 5

XIN6 22 5 External analog input 6

XIN7 22 6 External analog input 7

XIN8 22 7 External analog input 8

1 Hessen protocol.

2 T200H, M200EH.

3 T200U, M200EU.

4 M200EUP.

5 Triple-range option.

6 User-configurable D/A output option.

7 Pressurized zero/span option.

8 Dual NOX option.

9 MAS special.

10 Factory option.

11 O

2 option.

12 Optional

13 Probe-select special.

15 CO2 option.

16 NO2 valve option.

17 Concentration alarm option.

18 MODBUS option.

19 High auto range relay option

20 Low span option.

21 Remote range control option

22 T-Series external analog input option.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions

A-31

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions

Table A-5: DAS Trigger Events

Name Description

ATIMER Automatic timer expired

EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode

EXITLS 1 Exit low span calibration mode

EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode

EXITMP Exit multi-point calibration mode

EXITC2 4 Exit CO2 calibration mode

EXITO2 3 Exit O2 calibration mode

SLPCHG Slope and offset recalculated

CO2SLC 4 CO2 slope and offset recalculated

O2SLPC 3 O

2 slope and offset recalculated

EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode

CONC1W 5 Concentration exceeds limit 1 warning

CONC2W 5 Concentration exceeds limit 2 warning

AZEROW Auto-zero warning

OFLOWW Ozone flow warning

RPRESW Reaction cell pressure warning

RTEMPW Reaction cell temperature warning

MFTMPW 2 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature warning

C2TMPW 4 CO2 sensor cell temperature warning

O2TMPW 3 O

2 sensor cell temperature warning

IZTMPW IZS temperature warning

CTEMPW Converter temperature warning

PTEMPW PMT temperature warning

SFLOWW Sample flow warning

BTEMPW Box temperature warning

HVPSW HV power supply warning

1 Low span option.

2 Factory option.

3 O

2 option.

4 CO2 option.

5 Concentration alarm option.

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-32

Table A-6: DAS Parameters (Data Types)

Name Description 9 Units

PMTDET PMT detector reading mV

RAWNOX 6 Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV

RAWNO 6 Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV

NXSLP1 NOX slope for range #1 —

NXSLP2 NOX slope for range #2 —

NXSLP3 7 NOX slope for range #3 —

NOSLP1 NO slope for range #1 —

NOSLP2 NO slope for range #2 —

NOSLP3 7 NO slope for range #3 —

NXOFS1 NOX offset for range #1 mV

NXOFS2 NOX offset for range #2 mV

NXOFS3 7 NOX offset for range #3 mV

NOOFS1 NO offset for range #1 mV

NOOFS2 NO offset for range #2 mV

NOOFS3 7 NO offset for range #3 mV

CO2SLP 5 CO2 slope —

CO2OFS 5 CO2 offset %

O2SLPE 3 O

2 slope —

O2OFST 3 O

2 offset %

NXZSC1 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

NXZSC2 NOX concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

NXZSC3 7 NOX concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

NOZSC1 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

NOZSC2 NO concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

NOZSC3 7 NO concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

N2ZSC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

N2ZSC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

N2ZSC3 7 NO2 concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB 2

CO2ZSC 5 CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before

computing new slope and offset %

O2ZSCN 3 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing

new slope and offset %

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions

A-33

Name Description 9 Units

NXCNC1 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB 2

NXCNC2 NOX concentration for range #2 PPB 2

NXCNC3 7 NOX concentration for range #3 PPB 2

NOCNC1 NO concentration for range #1 PPB 2

NOCNC2 NO concentration for range #2 PPB 2

NOCNC3 7 NO concentration for range #3 PPB 2

N2CNC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB 2

N2CNC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 PPB 2

N2CNC3 7 NO2 concentration for range #3 PPB 2

CO2CNC 5 CO2 concentration %

O2CONC 3 O

2 concentration %

STABIL Concentration stability PPB

AZERO Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV

O3FLOW Ozone flow rate cc/m

RCPRES Reaction cell pressure "Hg

RCTEMP Reaction cell temperature °C

MFTEMP 1 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature °C

C2TEMP 5 CO2 sensor cell temperature °C

O2TEMP 3 O

2 sensor cell temperature °C

IZTEMP IZS block temperature °C

CNVEF1 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —

CNVEF2 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 —

CNVEF3 7 Converter efficiency factor for range #3 —

CNVTMP Converter temperature °C

PMTTMP PMT temperature °C

SMPFLW Sample flow rate cc/m

SMPPRS Sample pressure "Hg

SRSTMP 8 Sample restrictor temperature °C

BOXTMP Internal box temperature °C

RBXTMP 8 Remote box temperature °C

HVPS High voltage power supply output Volts

REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) mV

RF4096 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV

TEST11 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV

TEST13 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV

TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C

TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C

XIN1 10 External analog input 1 value Volts

XIN1SLPE 10 External analog input 1 slope eng unit / V

XIN1OFST 10 External analog input 1 value eng unit

XIN2 10 External analog input 2 value Volts

XIN2SLPE 10 External analog input 2 slope eng unit / V

XIN2OFST 10 External analog input 2 value eng unit

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-34

Name Description 9 Units

XIN3 10 External analog input 3 value Volts

XIN3SLPE 10 External analog input 3 slope eng unit / V

XIN3OFST 10 External analog input 3 value eng unit

XIN4 10 External analog input 4 value Volts

XIN4SLPE 10 External analog input 4 slope eng unit / V

XIN4OFST 10 External analog input 4 value eng unit

XIN5 10 External analog input 5 value Volts

XIN5SLPE 10 External analog input 5 slope eng unit / V

XIN5OFST 10 External analog input 5 value eng unit

XIN6 10 External analog input 6 value Volts

XIN6SLPE 10 External analog input 6 slope eng unit / V

XIN6OFST 10 External analog input 6 value eng unit

XIN7 10 External analog input 7 value Volts

XIN7SLPE 10 External analog input 7 slope eng unit / V

XIN7OFST 10 External analog input 7 value eng unit

XIN8 10 External analog input 8 value Volts

XIN8SLPE 10 External analog input 8 slope eng unit / V

XIN8OFST 10 External analog input 8 value eng unit

1 Factory option.

2 Current instrument units.

3 O

2 option.

4 Optional.

5 CO2 option.

6 Engineering firmware only.

7 Triple-range option.

8 M200EUP.

9 All NOX references become NOy for T200U_NOy and M200EU_NOy.

10 T-Series external analog input option.

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators

A-35

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators

Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators

COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION

? [ID] Display help screen and this list of commands

LOGON [ID] password Establish connection to instrument

LOGOFF [ID] Terminate connection to instrument

SET ALL|name|hexmask Display test(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print test(s) to screen

name Print single test

T [ID]

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Disable test(s)

SET ALL|name|hexmask Display warning(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print warning(s)

name Clear single warning

W [ID]

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Clear warning(s)

ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] Enter calibration mode

ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence

COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN Compute new slope/offset

EXIT Exit calibration mode

C [ID]

ABORT Abort calibration sequence

LIST Print all I/O signals

name[=value] Examine or set I/O signal

LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests

ENTER name Execute diagnostic test

EXIT Exit diagnostic test

RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] Reset instrument

PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] Print iDAS configuration

RECORDS ["name"] Print number of iDAS records

REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]

[FROM=<start date>][TO=<end

date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS

records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)

[HH:MM:SS]

Print iDAS records

D [ID]

CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records

LIST Print setup variables

name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]] Modify variable

name="value" Modify enumerated variable

CONFIG Print instrument configuration

MAINT ON|OFF Enter/exit maintenance mode

V [ID]

MODE Print current instrument mode

DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>]

DASEND Upload iDAS configuration

CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel

CHANNELDELETE ["name"] Delete iDAS channels

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-36

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are

optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.

TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS

ESC Abort line

CR (ENTER) Execute command

Ctrl-C Switch to computer mode

COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS

LF (line feed) Execute command

Ctrl-T Switch to terminal mode

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

A-37

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS

(decimal,

0-based)

Description 10 Units

MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers

(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)

0 Instantaneous PMT detector reading mV

2 NOX slope for range #1 —

4 NOX slope for range #2 —

6 NO slope for range #1 —

8 NO slope for range #2 mV

10 NOX offset for range #1 mV

12 NOX offset for range #2 mV

14 NO offset for range #1 mV

16 NO offset for range #2 mV

18 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

20 NOX concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

22 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

24 NO concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

26 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

28 NO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

30 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB

32 NOX concentration for range #2 PPB

34 NO concentration for range #1 PPB

36 NO concentration for range #2 PPB

38 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB

40 NO2 concentration for range #2 PPB

42 Concentration stability PPB

44 Auto zero offset (range de-normalized)

Pre React 11

46 Ozone flow rate cc/m

48 Reaction cell pressure "Hg

50 Reaction cell temperature C

52 Manifold temperature °C

54 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —

56 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 —

58 Converter temperature °C

60 PMT temperature C

62 Sample flow rate cc/m

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-38

MODBUS

(decimal,

0-based)

Description 10 Units

64 Sample pressure “Hg

66 Internal box temperature C

68 High voltage power supply output Volts

70 Ground reference (REF_GND) mV

72 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV

74 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV

76 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C

78 IZS temperature C

80 9 Sample restrictor temperature C

82 9 Remote box temperature C

80 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV

82 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C

84 1 Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV

86 1 Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV

100 3 NOX slope for range #3 —

102 3 NO slope for range #3 mV

104 3 NOX offset for range #3 mV

106 3 NO offset for range #3 mV

108 3 NOX concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

110 3 NO concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

112 3 NO2 concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just

before computing new slope and offset PPB

114 3 NOX concentration for range #3 PPB

116 3 NO concentration for range #3 PPB

118 3 NO2 concentration for range #3 PPB

120 3 Converter efficiency factor for range #3 —

130 12 External analog input 1 value Volts

132 12 External analog input 1 slope eng unit /V

134 12 External analog input 1 offset eng unit

136 12 External analog input 2 value Volts

138 12 External analog input 2 slope eng unit /V

140 12 External analog input 2 offset eng unit

142 12 External analog input 3 value Volts

144 12 External analog input 3 slope eng unit /V

146 12 External analog input 3 offset eng unit

148 12 External analog input 4 value Volts

150 12 External analog input 4 slope eng unit /V

152 12 External analog input 4 offset eng unit

154 12 External analog input 5 value Volts

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

A-39

MODBUS

(decimal,

0-based)

Description 10 Units

156 12 External analog input 5 slope eng unit /V

158 12 External analog input 5 offset eng unit

160 12 External analog input 6 value Volts

162 12 External analog input 6 slope eng unit /V

164 12 External analog input 6 offset eng unit

166 12 External analog input 7 value Volts

168 12 External analog input 7 slope eng unit /V

170 12 External analog input 7 offset eng unit

172 12 External analog input 8 value Volts

174 12 External analog input 8 slope eng unit /V

176 12 External analog input 8 offset eng unit

200 5 O

2 concentration %

202 5 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing

new slope and offset %

204 5 O

2 slope —

206 5 O

2 offset %

208 5 O

2 sensor cell temperature °C

300 6 CO2 concentration %

302 6 CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before

computing new slope and offset %

304 6 CO2 slope —

306 6 CO2 offset %

308 6 CO2 sensor cell temperature °C

MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers

(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write)

0 Maps to NOX_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units

2 Maps to NO_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units

4 Maps to NOX_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2 Conc. units

6 Maps to NO_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2 Conc. units

100 3 Maps to NOX_SPAN3 variable; target conc. for range #3 Conc. units

102 3 Maps to NO_SPAN3 variable; target conc. for range #3 Conc. units

200 5 Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for range

O2 gas %

300 6 Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for range

CO2 gas %

MODBUS Discrete Input Registers

(single-bit; read-only)

0 Manifold temperature warning

1 Converter temperature warning

2 Auto-zero warning

3 Box temperature warning

4 PMT detector temperature warning

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512)

A-40

MODBUS

(decimal,

0-based)

Description 10 Units

5 Reaction cell temperature warning

6 Sample flow warning

7 Ozone flow warning

8 Reaction cell pressure warning

9 HVPS warning

10 System reset warning

11 Rear board communication warning

12 Relay board communication warning

13 Front panel communication warning

14 Analog calibration warning

15 Dynamic zero warning

16 Dynamic span warning

17 Invalid concentration

18 In zero calibration mode

19 In span calibration mode

20 In multi-point calibration mode

21 System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)

22 Ozone generator warning

23 IZS temperature warning

24 8 In low span calibration mode

25 7 NO concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

26 7 NO concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

27 7 NO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

28 7 NO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

29 7 NOX concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

30 7 NOX concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

200 5 Calibrating O2 gas

201 5 O

2 sensor cell temperature warning

202 5+7 O

2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

203 5+7 O

2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

300 6 Calibrating CO2 gas

301 6 CO2 sensor cell temperature warning

302 6+7 CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded

303 6+7 CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded

07270B DCN6512

T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

A-41

MODBUS

(decimal,

0-based)

Description 10 Units

MODBUS Coil Registers

(single-bit; read/write)

0 Maps to relay output signal 36 (MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list)

1 Maps to relay output signal 37 (MB_RELAY_37 in signal I/O list)

2 Maps to relay output signal 38 (MB_RELAY_38 in signal I/O list)

3 Maps to relay output signal 39 (MB_RELAY_39 in signal I/O list)

20 2 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

21 2 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

22 2 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

23 2 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)

1 Engineering firmware only.

2 Set DYN_ZERO or DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise a calibration check

is performed.

3 Triple-range option.

4 Optional.

5 O

2 option.

6 CO2 option.

7 Concentration alarm option.

8 Low span option.

9 M200EUP.

10 All NOX references become NOy for M200EU_NOy.

11 M200EU and M200EU_NOy.

12 T-Series external analog input option.

07270B DCN6512

This page intentionally left blank.

A-42

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX B - Spare Parts

Note

Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne Advanced

Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI) may result in non-compliance with European

standard EN 61010-1.

Note

Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers, please refer to the TAPI Website at

http://www.teledyne-api.com or call Customer Service at 800-324-5190 for more

recent updates to part numbers.

07270B DCN6512

B-1

This page intentionally left blank.

B-2

07270B DCN6512

T200H Spare Parts List

(Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p

PARTNUMBER DESCRIPTION

000940100 CD, ORIFICE, .003 GREEN

000940300 CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET

000940400 CD, ORIFICE, .004 BLUE (KB)

000940500 CD, ORIFICE, .007 ORANGE (KB)

001761800 ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B

002270100 AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12 GASKETS = 1)

002730000 CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)

003290000 THERMISTOR, BASIC (VENDOR ASSY)(KB)

005960000 AKIT, EXP, ACT CHARCOAL, (2 BTL@64 FL-OZ EA)

005970000 AKIT, EXP, PURAFIL (2 BTL@64 FL-OZ EA)

008830000 COLD BLOCK (KB)

009690200 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19,100=1) 47mm

009690300 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19, 30=1) 47mm

009810300 ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO

009810600 ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34

009811000 ASSY, PUMP, NOX, 220-240V/50-60HZ FL34

010680100 BAND HTR W/TC, 50W @115V, CE/VDE *

010820000 ASSY, THERMOCOUPLE, HICON

011630000 HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)

011930100 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, *

013140000 ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)

014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX

016290000 WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)

016301400 ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE

016680600 PCA, O3 GEN DRIVER, NOX (OBS)

018080000 AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)

018720100 ASSY, MOLYCON, w/O3 DESTRUCT

02190020A ASSY, TC, TYPE K, LONG, WELDED MOLY

022630200 PCA, TEMP CONTROL BOARD, W/PS

037860000 ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, 47MM (KB)

040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL (B/F)

040030800 PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, (NOX)

040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL

040410200 ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD

040900000 ORIFICE HOLDER, REACTION CELL (KB)

041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR

041920000 ASSY, THERMISTOR

042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS)

043220100 THERMOCOUPLE INSULATING SLEEVE *

043420000 ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN

044440000 ASSY, HICON w/O3 DESTRUCT

044530000 OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY,(KB)

044540000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, NOX

044610100 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON

045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD

045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL

045500400 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL

045500500 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, NOX ORIFICE

046030000 AKIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS

07270B DCN6512

B-3

T200H Spare Parts List

(Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p

047210000 ASSY, MINI-HICON GUTS, GROUNDED

048830000 AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL

049310100 PCA,TEC DRIVER,PMT,(KB)

049760300 ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1

050610700 OPTION, 100-120V/50-60Hz,NOX (KB)

050610900 OPTION, 220-240V/50-60Hz, NOX (KB)

050611100 OPTION, 100V/50Hz, NOX (OBS)

051210000 DESTRUCT w/FTGS, O3 *

051990000 ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE EXHAUST, DISPOS

052930200 ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, NOX

054250000 OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%) (WO)

055740000 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ

055740100 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ

055740200 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ

058021100 PCA, MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP(KB)

059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, Amb/H/M *

061400000 ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC

062390000 ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL

064540000 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ

064540100 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ

064540200 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ

065190100 ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO*

065200100 ASSY SENSOR, TOP-FLOW

066970000 PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P

067240000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)

067300000 PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB

067300100 PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET

067300200 PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB

067900000 LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)

068810000 PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

069500000 PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

072150000 ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE

072280100 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, PULSE, 250HZ

072640100 DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T200H *

072700000 MANUAL, OPERATORS, T200H/T200M

CN0000073 POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)

CN0000458 PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB)

CN0000520 PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB)

CP0000036 TEMP CONTROLLER, FUJI,PXR, RELAY OUTPUT

FL0000001 FILTER, SS (KB)

FL0000003 FILTER, DFU (KB)

FL0000034 FILTER, DISPOSABLE, PENTEK (IC-101L)

FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB)

FT0000010 CONNECTOR-ORING, SS, 1/8" (KB)

HW0000005 FOOT

HW0000020 SPRING

HW0000030 ISOLATOR

HW0000036 TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)

HW0000041 STANDOFF,#6-32X3/4"

HW0000099 STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F

HW0000101 ISOLATOR

HW0000453 SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP

B-4

07270B DCN6512

T200H Spare Parts List

(Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p

HW0000685 LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL (KB)

KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER

KIT000219 AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT

KIT000231 KIT, RETROFIT, Z/S VALVE

KIT000253 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37

KIT000254 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38

OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

OP0000033 CO2 MODULE, 0-20%

OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT *(KB)

OR0000002 ORING, 2-023V

OR0000025 ORING, 2-133V

OR0000027 ORING, 2-042V

OR0000034 ORING, 2-011V FT10

OR0000039 ORING, 2-012V (KB)

OR0000044 ORING, 2-125V

OR0000083 ORING, 105M, 1MM W X 5 MM ID, VITON(KB)

OR0000086 ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)

OR0000094 ORING, 2-228V, 50 DURO VITON(KB)

OR0000101 ORING,2-209V

PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)

PU0000011 REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)

PU0000052 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ

PU0000054 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ

PU0000083 KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82

RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB)

RL0000019 SSRT RELAY, TA2410, CE MARK

SW0000006 SWITCH, THERMAL, 60 C (KB)

SW0000025 SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB)

SW0000040 PWR SWITCH/CIR BRK, VDE CE (KB)

SW0000058 SWITCH, THERMAL/450 DEG F(KB)

SW0000059 PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN

WR0000008 POWER CORD, 10A(KB)

07270B DCN6512

B-5

T200M Spare Parts List

(Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p)

PARTNUMBER DESCRIPTION

040410300 ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD

040900000 ORIFICE HOLDER, REACTION CELL (KB)

041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR

041920000 ASSY, THERMISTOR

042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS)

043170000 MANIFOLD, RCELL, (KB) *

043420000 ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN

044340000 ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD

044430200 ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD

044530000 OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY,(KB)

044540000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, NOX

044610100 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON

045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD

045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL

047050500 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, SHORT, 7 MIL

048830000 AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL

049310100 PCA,TEC DRIVER,PMT,(KB)

049760300 ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1

050610700 OPTION, 100-120V/50-60Hz,NOX (KB)

050610900 OPTION, 220-240V/50-60Hz, NOX (KB)

050611100 OPTION, 100V/50Hz, NOX (OBS)

051210000 DESTRUCT w/FTGS, O3 *

051990000 ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE EXHAUST, DISPOS

052930200 ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, NOX

054250000 OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%) (WO)

055740000 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ

055740100 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ

055740200 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ

057660000 ASSY, DFU FILTER

058021100 PCA, MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP(KB)

059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, Amb/H/M *

061400000 ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC

062390000 ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL

040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL

040030800 PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, (NOX)

040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL (B/F)

037860000 ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, 47MM (KB)

018720100 ASSY, MOLYCON, w/O3 DESTRUCT

018080000 AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)

016301400 ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE

016290000 WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)

014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX

013140000 ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)

011930100 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, *

011630000 HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)

009811000 ASSY, PUMP, NOX, 220-240V/50-60HZ FL34

009810600 ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34

009810300 ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO

009690300 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19, 30=1) 47mm

B-6

07270B DCN6512

T200M Spare Parts List

(Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p)

009690200 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19,100=1) 47mm

002730000 CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)

002270100 AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12 GASKETS = 1)

001761800 ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B

000941200 CD, ORIFICE, .008, RED/NONE

000940500 CD, ORIFICE, .007 ORANGE (KB)

000940400 CD, ORIFICE, .004 BLUE (KB)

000940300 CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET

064540000 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ

064540100 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ

064540200 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ

065190000 ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO*

066430100 PCA, OZONE PULSE DRIVER, 250 HZ

066970000 PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P

067240000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)

067300000 PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB

067300100 PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET

067300200 PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB

067900000 LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)

068810000 PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

069500000 PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

072150000 ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE

072280100 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, PULSE, 250HZ

072630000 DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T200M *

072700000 MANUAL, OPERATORS, T200H/T200M

075980300 KIT, NOX RCELL SS MNFLD W/NZZL, ORFC HLDR 3 PORT

CN0000073 POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)

CN0000458 PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB)

CN0000520 PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB)

FL0000001 FILTER, SS (KB)

FL0000003 FILTER, DFU (KB)

FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB)

FT0000010 CONNECTOR-ORING, SS, 1/8" (KB)

HW0000005 FOOT

HW0000020 SPRING

HW0000030 ISOLATOR

HW0000036 TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)

HW0000099 STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F

HW0000101 ISOLATOR

HW0000453 SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP

HW0000685 LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL (KB)

KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER

KIT000219 AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT

KIT000231 KIT, RETROFIT, Z/S VALVE

KIT000253 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37

KIT000254 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38

OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

OP0000033 CO2 MODULE, 0-20%

OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT *(KB)

OR0000002 ORING, 2-023V

OR0000025 ORING, 2-133V

OR0000027 ORING, 2-042V

07270B DCN6512

B-7

T200M Spare Parts List

(Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p)

OR0000034 ORING, 2-011V FT10

OR0000039 ORING, 2-012V (KB)

OR0000044 ORING, 2-125V

OR0000083 ORING, 105M, 1MM W X 5 MM ID, VITON(KB)

OR0000086 ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)

OR0000094 ORING, 2-228V, 50 DURO VITON(KB)

OR0000101 ORING,2-209V

PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)

PU0000011 REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)

PU0000052 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ

PU0000054 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ

PU0000083 KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82

RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB)

SW0000025 SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB)

SW0000059 PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN

WR0000008 POWER CORD, 10A(KB)

B-8

07270B DCN6512

Appendix C

Warranty/Repair Questionnaire

T200H/M, M200EH/EM

(05149B DCN5798)

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE

EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com

PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816

C-1

CUSTOMER:_____________________________________ PHONE: ________________________________

CONTACT NAME: ________________________________ FAX NO. _______________________________

SITE ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________________

MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.:_________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: ___________

1. Are there any failure messages? ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary)

PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE:

TEST FUNCTION RECORDED VALUE UNITS ACCEPTABLE VALUE

NOx STAB PPB/PPM  1 PPB WITH ZERO AIR

SAMPLE FLOW CM3 500 ± 50

OZONE FLOW CM3 80 ± 15

PMT SIGNAL WITH ZERO AIR MV -20 to 150

PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN GAS CONC MV

PPB

0-5000MV

0-5,000 PPM1, 200 PPM2

NORM PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN

GAS CONC MV

PPB

0-5000MV

0-5,000 PPM1, 200 PPM2

AZERO MV

-20 to 150

HVPS V

400 to 900

RCELL TEMP ºC 50 ± 1

BOX TEMP ºC AMBIENT ± 5ºC

PMT TEMP ºC 7 ± 2ºC

O2 CELL TEMP3 ºC 30ºC to 70ºC

IZS TEMP3 ºC

50 ± 1ºC

MOLY TEMP ºC 315 ± 5ºC

RCEL IN-HG-A

<10

SAMP IN-HG-A AMBIENT ± 1

NOx SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3

NOx OFFSET mV 50 to 150

NO SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3

NO OFFSET mV 50 to 150

O2 SLOPE3 0.5 to 2.0

O2 OFFSET3 % -10 to + 10

PMT SIGNAL DURING ETEST MV 2000 ± 1000

PMT SIGNAL DURING OTEST MV 2000 ± 1000

REF_4096_MV4 MV

4096mv ±2mv and Must be

Stable

REF_GND4 MV

0± 0.5 and Must be Stable

1 T200H, M200EH 2 T200M, M200EM 3 If option is installed

4 Located in Signal I/O list under DIAG menu

07270B DCN6512

Appendix C

Warranty/Repair Questionnaire

T200H/M, M200EH/EM

(05149B DCN5798)

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE

EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com

PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816

2. What is the rcell & sample pressures with the sample inlet on rear of machine capped?

RCELL PRESS - __________________ IN-HG-A SAMPLE PRESSURE: _______________ IN-HG-A

3. What are the failure symptoms? ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data.

Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the

problem that you are encountering.

OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

C-2

07270B DCN6512

APPENDIX D – Wire List and Electronic Schematics

07270B DCN 6512

D-1

This page intentionally left blank.

D-2

07270B DCN 6512

T200X INTERCONNECT LIST

(Reference 0691101C DCN5936)

Cable Part

#Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin

0364901 CBL, AC POWER

AC Line Power Entry CN0000073 L Power Switch SW0000025 L

AC Neutral Power Entry CN0000073 N Power Switch SW0000025 N

Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Shield SW0000025

Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Chassis

AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 L PS2 (+12) 060820000 SK2 1

AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 N PS2 (+12) 060820000 SK2 3

Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS2 (+12) 060820000 SK2 2

AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 L PS1 (+5, ±15) 068010000 SK2 1

AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 N PS1 (+5, ±15) 068010000 SK2 3

Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS1 (+5, ±15) 068010000 SK2 2

AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 L Relay PCA 045230100 J1 1

AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 N Relay PCA 045230100 J1 3

Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Relay PCA 045230100 J1 2

03829 CBL, DC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD

DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P7 1 Motherboard 058021100 P15 1

+5V Relay PCA 045230100 P7 2 Motherboard 058021100 P15 2

AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P7 3 Motherboard 058021100 P15 3

+15V Relay PCA 045230100 P7 4 Motherboard 058021100 P15 4

AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P7 5 Motherboard 058021100 P15 5

-15V Relay PCA 045230100 P7 6 Motherboard 058021100 P15 6

+12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P7 7 Motherboard 058021100 P15 7

+12V Relay PCA 045230100 P7 8 Motherboard 058021100 P15 8

Chassis Gnd Relay PCA 045230100 P7 10 Motherboard 058021100 P15 9

04022 CBL, DC POWER, FANM KEYBOARD, TEC, SENSOR PCA

TEC +12V TEC PCA 049310100 P1 1 Relay PCA 045230100 P10 8

TEC +12V RET TEC PCA 049310100 P1 2 Relay PCA 045230100 P10 7

DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P10 1 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 P14 8

+5V Relay PCA 045230100 P10 2 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 P14 1

DGND LCD Interface PCA 066970000 P14 2 Relay PCA 045230100 P11 1

+5V LCD Interface PCA 066970000 P14 3 Relay PCA 045230100 P11 2

+12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P11 7 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 1

+12V Relay PCA 045230100 P11 8 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 2

P/Flow Sensor AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P11 3 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 3

P/Flow Sensor +15V Relay PCA 045230100 P11 4 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 6

Pressure signal 1 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 2 Motherboard 058021100 P110 6

Pressure signal 2 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 4 Motherboard 058021100 P110 5

Flow signal 1 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 5 Motherboard 058021100 P110 4

Flow signal 2 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 1 Motherboard 058021100 P110 3

Shield P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 P1 S Motherboard 058021100 P110 12

Shield Motherboard 058021100 P110 9 Relay PCA 045230100 P17 S

Thermocouple signal 1 Motherboard 058021100 P110 2 Relay PCA 045230100 P17 1

TC 1 signal DGND Motherboard 058021100 P110 8 Relay PCA 045230100 P17 2

Thermocouple signal 2 Motherboard 058021100 P110 1 Relay PCA 045230100 P17 3

TC 2 signal DGND Motherboard 058021100 P110 7 Relay PCA 045230100 P17 4

04023 CBL, I2C, RELAY PCA TO MOTHERBOARD

I2C Serial Clock Motherboard 058021100 P107 3 Relay PCA 045230100 P3 1

I2C Serial Data Motherboard 058021100 P107 5 Relay PCA 045230100 P3 2

I2C Reset Motherboard 058021100 P107 2 Relay PCA 045230100 P3 4

I2C Shield Motherboard 058021100 P107 6 Relay PCA 045230100 P3 5

04024 CBL, NOX, ZERO/SPAN, IZS VALVES

Zero/Span valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P4 1 Zero/Span valve 042680100 P1 1

Zero/Span valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P4 2 Zero/Span valve 042680100 P1 2

Sample valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P4 3 Sample valve 042680100 P1 1

Sample valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P4 4 Sample valve 042680100 P1 2

AutoZero valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P4 5 AutoZero valve 042680100 P1 1

AutoZero valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P4 6 AutoZero valve 042680100 P1 2

NONOx valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P4 7 NONOx valve 042680100 P1 1

NONOx valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P4 8 NONOx valve 042680100 P1 2

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

07270B DCN 6512

D-3

T200X INTERCONNECT LIST

(Reference 0691101C DCN5936)

Cable Part

#Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

0402603 CBL, IZS & O2 SENSOR HEATERS/THERMISTORS, REACTION CELL & MANIFOLD THERMISTORS

Rcell thermistor A Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 2 Motherboard 058021100 P27 7

Rcell thermistor B Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 1 Motherboard 058021100 P27 14

IZS or CO2 thermistor A Motherboard 058021100 P27 6 IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 2

IZS or CO2 thermistor B Motherboard 058021100 P27 13 IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 3

IZS or CO2 heater L IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 4 Relay PCA 045230100 P18 1

IZS or CO2 heater L IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 1 Relay PCA 045230100 P18 2

Shield Relay PCA 045230100 P18 11

O2 sensor heater Relay PCA 045230100 P18 6 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 4

O2 sensor heater Relay PCA 045230100 P18 7 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 2

Shield Relay PCA 045230100 P18 12 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1

O2 sensor thermistor A O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 3 Motherboard 058021100 P27 4

O2 sensor thermistor B O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 1 Motherboard 058021100 P27 11

Byp/dil. man. thermistor A Motherboard 058021100 P27 1 Manifold thermistor 043420000 P1 1

Byp/dil. man. thermistor B Motherboard 058021100 P27 8 Manifold thermistor 043420000 P1 2

Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P18 3 Relay PCA 045230100 P18 4

Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P18 8 Relay PCA 045230100 P18 9

04027 CBL, NO2 CONVERTER, REACTION CELL & MANIFOLD HEATERS

Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 1 Relay PCA 045230100 P2 11

Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 2 Relay PCA 045230100 P2 12

Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Relay PCA 045230100 P2 11 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 1

Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Relay PCA 045230100 P2 15 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 2

Moly heater A Relay PCA 045230100 P2 7 Moly heater A 039700100 P1 1

Moly heater C Relay PCA 045230100 P2 6 Moly heater C 039700100 P1 2

Moly heater B Relay PCA 045230100 P2 10 Moly heater B 039700100 P1 3

Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P2 13 Relay PCA 045230100 P2 14

Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P2 8 Relay PCA 045230100 P2 9

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 1B 040400000 P1 4

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 2B 040400000 P1 6

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 2 Reaction cell heater 1A 040400000 P1 3

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 3 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 1

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 4 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 2

Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 5 Reaction cell heater 2A 040400000 P1 5

04105 CBL, KEYBOARD, DISPLAY TO MOTHERBOARD

Kbd Interrupt LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 7 Motherboard 058021100 J106 1

DGND LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 2 Motherboard 058021100 J106 8

SDA LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 5 Motherboard 058021100 J106 2

SCL LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 6 Motherboard 058021100 J106 6

Shld LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 10 Motherboard 058021100 J106 5

04176 CBL, DC POWER TO RELAY PCA

DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P8 1 Power Supply Triple 068010000 J1 3

+5V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 2 Power Supply Triple 068010000 J1 1

+15V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 4 Power Supply Triple 068010000 J1 6

AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P8 5 Power Supply Triple 068010000 J1 4

-15V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 6 Power Supply Triple 068010000 J1 5

+12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P8 7 Power Supply Single 068020000 J1 3

+12V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 8 Power Supply Single 068020000 J1 1

04433 CBL, PREAMPLIFIER TO RELAY PCA

Preamplifier DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P9 1 Preamp PCA 041800500 P5 1

Preamplifier +5V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 2 Preamp PCA 041800500 P5 2

Preamplifier AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P9 3 Preamp PCA 041800500 P5 3

Preamplifier +15V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 4 Preamp PCA 041800500 P5 4

Preamplifier -15V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 6 Preamp PCA 041800500 P5 6

04437 CBL, PREAMPLIFIER TO TEC

Preamp TEC drive VREF Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 1 TEC PCA 049310100 J3 1

Preamp TEC drive CTRL Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 2 TEC PCA 049310100 J3 2

Preamp TEC drive AGND Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 3 TEC PCA 049310100 J3 3

D-4

07270B DCN 6512

T200X INTERCONNECT LIST

(Reference 0691101C DCN5936)

Cable Part

#Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

04671 CBL, MOTHERBOARD TO XMITTER BD (MULTIDROP OPTION)

GND Motherboard 058021100 P12 2 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 2

RX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 14 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 14

RTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 13 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 13

TX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 12 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 12

CTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 11 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 11

RS-GND0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 10 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 10

RTS1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 8 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 8

CTS1/485- Motherboard 058021100 P12 6 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 6

RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 9

TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 7

RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 5

RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 9

TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 7

RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J4 5

06737 CBL, I2C to AUX I/O (ANALOG IN OPTION)

ATX+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 1 Motherboard 058021100 J106 1

ATX- AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 2 Motherboard 058021100 J106 2

LED0 AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 3 Motherboard 058021100 J106 3

ARX+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 4 Motherboard 058021100 J106 4

ARX- AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 5 Motherboard 058021100 J106 5

LED0+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 6 Motherboard 058021100 J106 6

LED1+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 J2 8 Motherboard 058021100 J106 8

06738 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (USB OPTION)

RXD1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 1 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 1

DCD1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 2 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 2

DTR1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 3 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 3

TXD1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 4 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 4

DSR1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 5 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 5

GND CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 6 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 6

CTS1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 7 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 7

RTS1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 8 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 8

RI1 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 10 AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 J3 10

06738 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (MULTIDROP OPTION)

RXD CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 1 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 1

DCD CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 2 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 2

DTR CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 3 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 3

TXD CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 4 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 4

DSR CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 5 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 5

GND CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 6 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 6

CTS CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 7 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 7

RTS CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 8 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 8

RI CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 10 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 J3 10

06739 CBL, CPU LAN TO AUX I/O PCA

ATX- CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 1 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 1

ATX+ CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 2 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 2

LED0 CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 3 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 3

ARX+ CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 4 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 4

ARX- CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 5 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 5

LED0+ CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 6 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 6

LED1 CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 7 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 7

LED1+ CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 8 AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX J2 8

06741 CBL, CPU USB to Front Panel

GND CPU PCA 067240000 USB 8 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 JP9

LUSBD3+ CPU PCA 067240000 USB 6 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 JP9

LUSBD3- CPU PCA 067240000 USB 4 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 JP9

VCC CPU PCA 067240000 USB 2 LCD Interface PCA 066970000 JP9

07270B DCN 6512

D-5

T200X INTERCONNECT LIST

(Reference 0691101C DCN5936)

Cable Part

#Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

06746 CBL, MB TO 06154 CPU

GND Motherboard 058021100 P12 2 Shield

RX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 14 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 1

RTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 13 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 8

TX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 12 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 4

CTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 11 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 7

RS-GND0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 10 CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 6

RTS1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 8 CPU PCA 067240000 COM2 8

CTS1/485- Motherboard 058021100 P12 6 CPU PCA 067240000 COM2 7

RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 CPU PCA 067240000 COM2 1

TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 CPU PCA 067240000 COM2 4

RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 CPU PCA 067240000 COM2 6

RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 CPU PCA 067240000 485 1

TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 CPU PCA 067240000 485 2

RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 CPU PCA 067240000 485 3

06915 CBL, PREAMP, O2 SENSOR, O3 GEN, FAN, RELAY PCA & MOTHERBOARD

+15V Relay PCA 045230100 P12 4 Ozone generator 07228XXXX P1 4

AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P12 3 Ozone generator 07228XXXX P1 5

+12V Relay PCA 045230100 P12 8 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 1

+12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P12 7 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 2

O3GEN enable signal Ozone generator 07228XXXX P1 6 Motherboard 058021100 P108 15

ETEST Motherboard 058021100 P108 8 Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 1

OTEST Motherboard 058021100 P108 16 Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 2

PHYSICAL RANGE Motherboard 058021100 P108 7 Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 4

PMT TEMP Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 5 Motherboard 058021100 P109 4

HVPS Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 6 Motherboard 058021100 P109 5

PMT SIGNAL+ Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 7 Motherboard 058021100 P109 6

AGND Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 S Motherboard 058021100 P109 11

AGND Motherboard 058021100 P109 9 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 S

O2 SIGNAL - Motherboard 058021100 P109 7 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 9

O2 SIGNAL + Motherboard 058021100 P109 1 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 10

DGND O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 5 Relay PCA 045230100 P5 1

+5V O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 6 Relay PCA 045230100 P5 2

WR256 CBL, TRANSMITTER TO INTERFACE

LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J15 Transmitter PCA 068810000 J1

D-6

07270B DCN 6512

D-7

1 2 3 4 5 6

54321

APPROVALS

DRAWN

CHECKED

APPROVED

DATE

SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION

SHEET

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.

The information herein is the

property of API and is

submitted in strictest con-

Unauthorized use by anyone

fidence for reference only.

for any other purposes is

prohibited. This document or

any information contained

in it may not be duplicated

without proper authorization.

OZON_ GEN

01669 G

1 130-Nov-2006

LAST MOD.

DRIVER

+15V

+15V+15V

+15V

115V

15V

1N4007

VR2

100K

TP3

1.2K

TP1

TP2

TP6

100pF

1000uF/25V

IRFZ24

1000uF/25V

.01

R10

C11

.22

C12

.22

C10

VREF

INV+

COMP

INV-

+SEN

4GND 8

-SEN 5

OSC 3

E_A 11

E_B 14

C_A 12

C_B 13

VIN 15

SG3524B

OUT 3

GND

LM7815

4.7uF/16V

2200uF/35V

TP5TP4

68uH

VR1

1K 20T

R11

150K

IRFZ924

4.7K 1%

10K 1%

R12

10K 1%

R13

10K 1%

R14

4.7K 1%

R15

4.7K 1%

PWR XFRMR

1N4007

"PW"

"FREQ"

10/15/96 REV. D: Added PTC1,2 secondary overcurrent protection.

PTC2

1.1A

PTC1

1.1A

11/21/96 REV. E: Minor cosmetic fixes

10/01/99 REV. F ADDED VERSION TABLE AT D6

VERSION TABLE

016680000 - CE MARK VERSION

016680100 - NON CE MARK (OBSOLETE)

016680200 - SUB PS 17 SWITCHER FOR LINEAR SUPPLY

016680300 - LOW OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ

016680400 - HI OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ

REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER

REPLACE R4 WITH RS297 127KOHM

REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER

REPLACE R4 WITH RS13 11 KOHM

STD PROD. VERSION UP TO 10/99

DELETE COMPONENTS

T1, D1, D2, C9, C11, PTC1, PTC2, U2

ADD COMPONENTS

PS1

016680600 - HI OUTPUT,E SERIES

Text

DELETE COMPONENTS

T1,D1,D2,C9,PTC1,PTC2,U2

D-8

07270B DCN 6512

1 2 3 4 56

54321

AAPPROVALS

DRAW N

CH ECKED

APPROVED

DATE

SIZE DRAW ING NO. REVISION

SH EET

The information herein is the

property of API and is

submitted in strictest con-

Unauthorized use by anyone

fidence for reference only.

for any other purposes is

prohibited. This document or

any information contained

in it may not be duplicated

without proper authorization.

TH ER M OE LE C T

01840 B

1114-Jul-1999

LAST MOD.

COOLER_CONTROL

6 7

109

+15+15

+15 +15

1 2 3 4

5 67 8

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

1234

5 67 83

11 4

+15

+15 +15 +15 +15

+ +

+15

07270B DCN 6512

D-9

1 2 3 4 56

54321

APPROVALS

DRAWN

CHECKED

APPROVED

DATE

SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION

SHEET

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.

The information herein is the

property of API and is

submitted in strictest con-

Unauthorized use by anyone

fidence for reference only.

for any other purposes is

prohibited. This document or

any information contained

in it may not be duplicated

without proper authorization.

PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series

03632 A

1119-Jul-2002

LAST MOD.

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

HEADER 4X2

+15V

IOUT-

IOUT+

VIN-

VIN+

15 7

+VS1

-VS1 GND1 -VS2GND2

+VS2

VIN VOUT

ISO124

VIN- JP1

JUMPER2

+12V -12V

+12V

-12V

+VOUT

-VOUT

7SOUT 8

SIN 14

DCP010515

0.47

ISO_+15V

ISO_GND

ISO_-15V

ISO_-15V ISO_+15V

4.75K

9.76K

7 4

OPA277

1000PF

220PF

1N914

ISO_+15V ISO_-15V

VREF

SENSE

VRADJ

VIN(10)

VREFIN

VIN(5V)

GND

216MA 9

4MA 10

SPAN 8

OFFADJ 7

GATEDRV 14

SSENSE 13

SR 1

+V 16

OFFADJ 6

XTR110

ISO_+15V

IOUT+

0.1

MOSFETP

IOUT-

TP1

TESTPOINT

Date Rev. Change Description Engineer

8/9/00 A INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039) KL

TP3

ISO+15

TP2

TESTPOINT

TP4

ISO-15

TP5

ISO_GND

TP6

GND

D-10

07270B DCN 6512

123456

54321

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:

03956 A

M100E/M200E Relay PCB

31 3

1 2

U2A

SN74HC04

3 4

U2B

5 6

U2C

11 10

U2E

13 12

147

U2F

OUT4 1

OUT 3 3

GND

4GND

OUT 2 6

OUT 1 8

IN 1

9IN 2

VCC 11

GND

12 GND

ENABLE

14 IN 3

15 IN 4

UDN2540B(16)

CON5

VBATT

VOUT

VCC

GND

BATT_ON

LOW LINE'

OSC IN

OSC SEL

RESET 16

RESET' 15

WDO' 14

CD IN' 13

CD OUT' 12

WDI 11

PFO' 10

PFI 9

MAX693

0.001

VCC

AKK

D17

RLS4148

VCC

RED

RN1

330

I2C_Vcc

YEL

GRN

D10

GRN

9 8

U2D

VCC

8 PIN

VALVE0

VALVE1

VALVE2

VALVE3

2000/25

+12V

CON10THROUGH

DGND

VCC

AGND

+15V

AGND

-15V

+12RET

+12V

EGND

CHS_GND

AC_Line

AC_Neutral

I2C_Vcc

1 2

JP3

HEADER 1X2

DC PWR IN KEYBRD MTHR BRD SYNC DEMOD SPARE

VCC

1 2

3-4

SLD-RLY

1 2

3-4

SLD-RLY

1 2

3-4

SLD-RLY

I2C_Vcc

JP4

WTCDG OVR

10/16

+C4

10/16

0.1

20K

4 PIN

J216 PIN

J10

CON10THROUGH

TP1

DGND

TP2

+5V

TP3

AGND

TP4

+15V

TP5

-15V

TP6

+12RT

TP7

+12V

General Trace Width Requirements

1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil

2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils

3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils

4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil isolation/creepage distance around them

5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.

6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.

IRF7205

RELAY0 RELAY1 RELAY2

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

JP1

HEADER 4X2

2.2K

VCC

10K

INT

SCL

SDA

P10 13

P00 4

P01 5

P02 6

P03 7

P04 8

P05 9

P06 10

P07 11

Vss

P11 14

P12 15

P13 16

P14 17

P15 18

P16 19

P17 20

Vdd 24

PCF8575

I2C_Vcc

IO3

IO4

IO10

IO11

IO12

IO13

IO14

IO15

AC_Neutral

RELAY0

RELAY1

RELAY2

VLV_ENAB

JP2

Heater Config Jumper

RELAY0

TS0

TS1

TS2

RELAY1

RELAY2

TS0

TS1

TS2

J11

CON10THROUGH

J12

CON10THROUGH

RELAY0

RELAY1

RELAY2

WDOG

RL0 RL1 RL2 VA0 VA1 VA2 VA3

COMMON0

COMMON1

COMMON2

LOAD0

LOAD1

LOAD2

REV AUTH DATE

B CAC 10/3/02 CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX

APPLIES TO PCB 03954

07270B DCN 6512

D-11

123456

54321

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:

03956 A

100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB

32 3

1 2

U3A

SN74HC04

9 8

U3D

11 10

U3E

OUT4 1

OUT 3 3

GND

4GND

OUT 2 6

OUT 1 8

IN 1

9IN 2

VCC 11

GND

12 GND

ENABLE

14 IN 3

15 IN 4

UDN2540B(16)

RN2

330

YEL

D11

GRN

D12

GRN

D13

GRN

D14

GRN

D15

GRN

VCC

CON10

Valve4

Valve5

Valve6

Valve7

+12V

I2C_Vcc

1 2

3-4

SLD-RLY

1 2

3-4

SLD-RLY

I2C_Vcc

RELAY3 RELAY4

IO3

IO4

IO10

IO11

IO12

IO13

13 12

147

U3F

IO14

IO15

AC_Line

J20

MOLEX6

AC_Neutral

Aux Relay Connector

RELAY3

RELAY4

VLV_ENAB

D16

GRN

3 4

U3B

5 6

U3C

J13

MINIFIT-2

J14

MINIFIT-2

VCC

C13

0.1

IRL3303

+12V

+12RET

Use 50 mil traces

Use 40 mil traces

RL3 RL4 VA4 VA5 VA6 VA7 TR0 TR1

D-12

07270B DCN 6512

123456

54321

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:

03956 A

100E/200E/400E RELAY PAB

33 3

LTC1050

ZR1

5.6V

AKK

ZR2

5.6V

0.1

-15V

+15V

2.55K

R11

249K

J15

TYPE J

J18

TYPE k

0.1

K TC Connector

J TC Connector

J17

MICROFIT-4

VDD_TC

VEE_TC

LTC1050

Vin 2

Gnd

TOUT 3

R- 5

U10

LT1025 C12

0.1

R12

249K

R10

J16

TYPE J

J19

TYPE K

C11

0.1

K TC Connector

J TC Connector

VDD_TC

VEE_TC

C10

0.1

C14

0.1

R14

676K 1 2

JP6

JUMPER

R13

332K 1 2

JP5

JUMPER

U7A

OPA2277

R15

11K

R19

10K

CCW

CW CW

R17

+15V

-15V

C15

0.1

C16

0.1

U7B

OPA2277

R16

11K

R20

10K

R18

C17

C20

1 uF

ZR3

10V

ZR4

10V

R21

20k

R22

20k

07270B DCN 6512

D-13

1 2 34

321

APPROVALS

DRAWN

CHECKED

APPROVED

DATE

SIZE DRAWING NO.REVISION

SHEET

The information herein is the

property of API and is

submitted in strictest con-

Unauthorized use by anyone

fidence for reference only.

for any other purposes is

prohibited. This document or

any information contained

in it may not be duplicated

without proper authorization.

SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES

04354D

113-Dec-2007

LAST MOD.

1.1K

+15V

ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

FLOW SENSOR

+15V

TP5

S2_OUT

TP4

S1/S4_OUT

TP2

10V_REF

TP1

GND

TP3

S3_OUT

VR2

LM4040CIZ

VR1

LM4040CIZ

499

MINIFIT6

1.0UF

CON4

+15V

1.0

CN_647 X 3

FM_4

D-14

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?FF?6RXUFH?5HY*?GGE'UDZQ%\

+

0((3073UHDPS3&$



,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQV

+PHHVFK

SUHDPSFNWU\

+PHH6&+

+936&NWU\

+PHH6&+

07270B DCN 6512

D-15

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?FF?6RXUFH?5HY*?GGE'UDZQ%\

5 

5

.

5

6((7$%/(

5



5

.

5

.

E

F

(



4

31

&

S)

9

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

9B5()

4

-

57

&

X)

&

X)







 

8%

/)

 







8$

/)

 







8$

/)



&

1,

5

.

9B6<6







-

3,1,1/,1(

73



73



73



95()

&22/(5&21752/

$*1'

7+

9

5

. 





'

'4

'

9=(1(5

237,&7(67

5

6((7$%/(

)69

9B5()

/('

7+(50,6725

5

.

3077(03(5$785()(('%$&.

727(&%2$5'

307B7(03

237,&B7(67

















-

0,&52),7

9B6<6

73

73

73

73

73



73



73



73



73



73



73



73



(/(&7(67

237,&7(67

35($0351*%,7

35($0351*%,7

3077(03

+93692/7$*(

3076,*1$/

+936

307B7(03

237,&B7(67



















-

,1/,1(5$

9

+936

7+(50,6725

/('

35($03

((30735($033&$6FKHPDWLF





+,*$,1

(7(67





















-

0,1,),7

3RZHU&RQQHFWRU

6LJQDO&RQQHFWRU

9

/

X+



&

X)

&

X)

9

/

X+



&

X)Y

&

X)

5

.

5

6((7$%/(













-3

3077(03&21),*-803(5

7-3$

7-3$

9

9307



8

$+&*8

21-3

)25((6+2573,1621/<

)25(86+2573,16DQG3,16

&203(((8





5...

5...

5...



3ULQWHGGRFXPHQWVDUHXQFRQWUROOHG

D-16

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?FF?6RXUFH?5HY*?GGE'UDZQ%\

5

0

5

.

5

1,

5

6((7$%/(



& X)9



&X)9

& S)

9

9

*8$5'5,1*

127(6 81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('







5(6,67$1&(,6,12+06

5(6,67256$5(:

&$3$&,7$1&(,6,10,&52)$5$'6

5

1,327















8

23$

63$1$'-867

7+,6&,5&8,70867%(86('

$6$0$7&+('3$,5:,7+7+(

7(&&21752/&,5&8,7



5



5

6((7$%/(

5 0

,1 

&20 

1&



9

*1' 

1&

&20 

,1 

,1 

&20 

1&



9/

 9



1&

 &20 

,1 

8

'*'<

99

& X)

9B6<6

(7(67

5

.

73



95()

5

.327







(/(&77(67

35($03

35($03

35($03 35($03

(7(67

(7(67B6,*1$/

(7(67



8

$+&*8



8

$+&*8

(7(67

+,*$,1

5

.

&

6((7$%/(







 

8%

/)23$03

9

&

X)

&

X)

9

+,*$,1

9307

5

1,6+257('



$*1'



9



',95$7,2

&26& 

9 

287 

%8)287 

8

/7&&1

9B5()9

&

S)),/0

&

X)

73



73



73



73



& X)

& X)

5

N327





-

&2$;

3076LJQDO&RQQHFWRU

307*1'







 

8%

/)23$03

5

.

5 









8$

/)

9

9

73



&

X)

&

X)

9

9

5

6((7$%/(

+,*$,1

5

1,

+

0((3073UHDPS3&$6FKHPDWLF



9(56,217$%/(

0;(

0;(

&203



5.RKPV

5..

5.QRWLQVWDOOHG

&X)

&

&

X)

&$

X)9 &%

X)9

)RUX)XVH&

)RUX)XVH&$&%

6((7$%/(

3ULQWHGGRFXPHQWVDUHXQFRQWUROOHG

07270B DCN 6512

D-17

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?FF?6RXUFH?5HY*?GGE'UDZQ%\

 







8$

/)23$03

5 .

5

.

5

.

& S)

&

X)

9B5()

&

X)9

&

X)9

9

9B/2&$/

&

X)

&

X) &

X)9

5

.

5

.













6













6

9B/2&$/

9

73



73

9B/2&$/

95()

 

+936

'

'4

&

X)9

$



'

9

+,*+92/7$*(6833/<







95

/0= 5

N

9

9

73



73



&

X)

&

X)9

9







 

8%

/)



















51

.[



212))

287 

1& 

*1'



8

/3,0

&

X)9

287 

*1'



8

/0/$&=

9

9

&

X)

&

X)

+

0((30735($033&$6FKHPDWLF



&

X)9

&$

&$

,1 

287



*1'

*1'



8 /7$,6

*1'

9FF 

,RXW



' 

9UI

' 

' 

9UI

' 

' 

' 

&203



' 

' 

9HH





8

'$&

3ULQWHGGRFXPHQWVDUHXQFRQWUROOHG

D-18

07270B DCN 6512

D D

C C

B B

A A

Ti tle

Number Revis ionSize

Date: 6/28/2004 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\04468B.sch Drawn By:

JP1

No t U sed

SCH, E-Series Analog Output Isolator, PCA 04467

04468 B

07270B DCN 6512

D-19

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

'>@

,2:

,25

6+'$&

',*,2

',*,2

7(03

'$&9

:5'$&

9)352*

&+*$,1

9)5($'

6+'1

',*,2

',*,2

7&

6+'1

,&B5(6(7

,&B'59B567

,&B5(6(7

,&B'59B567

3&,)

E3VFK

'>@ '>@

,2:

,25

6+'$&

',*,2

',*,2

7(03

'$&9

:5'$&

9)352*

&+*$,1

9)5($'

6+'1

',*,2

',*,2

7&

6+'1

,&B5(6(7

,&B'59B567

,&B5(6(7

,&B'59B567

VKHHW

E3VFK

,2:

'>@

'$&9

&6'$&$

&6'$&%

'$&

'$&

'$&

'$&

6+'$&

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

:5'$&

95()

7&

$1$287

E3VFK

,2:

'>@ '>@

'$&9

&6'$&$

&6'$&%

'$&

'$&

'$&

'$&

6+'$&

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

:5'$&

95()

7&

,25

9)5($'

'>@

9)352*

'$&08;

&+*$,1

7(0308;

,2:

6+'1

95()

7&

7&

7&

$1$,1

E3VFK

,25

9)5($'

'>@ '>@

9)352*

'$&08;

&+*$,1

7(0308;

,2:

6+'1

95()

7&

7&

7&

7(0308;

'$&08;

7(03

,2:

'$&

'$&

'$&

'>@

'$&9

'$&

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

6+'1

6(1625,1

E3VFK

7(0308;

'$&08;

7(03

,2:

'$&

'$&

'$&

'>@

'$&9

'$&

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

6+'1

'>@

',*,2

,25

',*,2

',*,1

E3VFK

'>@ '>@

',*,2

,25

',*,2

6+'1

'>@

,2:

',*,2

',*,2

',*287

E3VFK

6+'1

'>@ '>@ ,2:

',*,2

',*,2

6+'1

',*,2

'>@

,2:

',*,2

',*287

E3VFK

6+'1

',*,2

'>@

,2:

',*,2

D-20

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

$

$

$

'

'

,2:

$

'

,25

6<6&/.

'

'

'

'

'

$

$

$

$

$

$

,17

;(

;'

,2(1

$(1

$

$

$

$

$

$

(1$%

,17

'

'

'

'

'

,2:

'

'

,2:

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

,25

'

'

'

,25

'

'

'

',*,2

,54 .%,17



73

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

*



*



<



<



<



<



<



<



<



<



8

+&

































-

0,&52),7



















51 .[

 &/.

 4

4

35(



&/5



8%

+&

*1'

$ 

,2&+(&. 

' 

' 

' 

' 

' 

' 

' 

' 

,2&+5'< 

$(1

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

-$

3&

*1'

5(6(7'59 

9 

,54 

9 

'54 

9 

(1';)5 

9 

.(< 

60(0: 

60(05 

,2: 

,25 

'$&. 

'54 

'$&. 

'54 

5()5(6+ 

6<6&/. 

,54 

,54 

,54 

,54 

,54 

'$&. 

7& 

%$/( 

9 

26& 

*1'

*1'

-%

3&

5

N

5

.

$



$



$



$



$



$



$



$



%



%



%



%



%



%



%



%



(1

3 4 

9&& 

*1'

8 +&

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2&



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8+&

&

X)FHUDPLF



73









*



*



< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

8 +&

 -3

,'&+($'(5

&

X)FHUDPLF







8$

+&

&/.

4

4

35(



&/5



8$ +&

















































































-

3&&'

 -3

,'&+($'(5

5

N







8%

+&

,$&.



,17

9&& 

$



6'$ 

966 

 &6





5(6(7



'%



'%



'%



'%



'%



'%



'%



'%



6&/ 

&/.



8 3&)

 

-3 ,'&+($'(5



73

5

.













-

,1/,1(







8'

+&

5

.

9&& 

9&& 

*1'



*1'



:',

5(6(7 

*1'



8

/7&&6









;

-,72'&)2+0

&

X)9

'>@

,2:

,25

6+'$&

',*,2

',*,2

7(03

'$&9

:5'$&

9)352*

&+*$,1

9)5($'

6+'1

',*,2

',*,2

7&

6+'1

,&B5(6(7

,&B'59B567

9&&

9

9&&

$''5 ['()$8/7

5

N

5

127,167$//('

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

',

',

',

',

',

',

',

',

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

'2

',

',

',

',

',

',

',

',

6&/

6'$

'*1'

















-

0,&52),7

.%,17

'

' '

 &/.

 4

4

35(



&/5



8% +&

&/.

4

4

35(



&/5



8$

+&

9&&

'2

,54

5

.

'6

/('5('VPW

 

8

$+&*8

 -3

,'&+($'(5

$''5 [-3,167$//('

$(1

,2(1

,2:







-3

+($'(5'()$8/7('



VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

-3

 

VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

-3

6'$

6&/

'*1'

9&&

1RWHV

7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&$

7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&%

3LQVVKRUWHGRQ3&%

;&

;)

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

9&&







8&

+&

'6

'6

6&/ 6'$

5



5



9&&

''

''

56

,&

,&

%/8( %/8(

6'$

6&/







8'

+&







8&

+&







8'

+&







8$

+&







8$

+&



73



73



73



73



73



73

,&







8%

+&







8&

+&







8'

+&

07270B DCN 6512

D-21

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %



07

02817,1*+2/(



73

9 

5(7 

'*1'

9 

9 

$*1'

9 

$*1'

(*1'

&+$6*1'

-

02/(;

























6:

6:6/,'(3'7

79$55$<

















79

60'$/&&

79$55$<

















79

60'$/&&





























-

,1/,1(

5

.



5;'



7;'





*1'





576



&76





-

'%0

'6

/('*51VPW

5

127,167$//('

$ .

'6

/('5(' 5

N



73



73

5

.



73

5

127,167$//('

5

127,167$//('



73



73

9 99&& 95(79

9

 





















-

'%)(0$/(

7;

&76

56*1'

5;

7;

576

&76

56*1'

5;

576

9&&



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(



07

02817,1*+2/(

(



I

KL



WRZD



LQ



7;IRU&RP

5;IRU&RP

9&&

5;

7;

576

&76

56*1'

'7(

&

X)97$17$/80

9&&

&

X)97$17$/80

'

0%56&7

'

0%56&7

5

127,167$//('

''5PXVWEH

ZLWKLQRI-

''B



=

02817,1*+2/(



=

02817,1*+2/(



=

02817,1*+2/(



'6

/('5('

 

'6

/('*51

5

.

5

.

7;IRU&RP 5;IRU&RP

D-22

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

'

&/.

'

&/.

&6'$&$

&

X)FHUDPLF

&/.

',1



92$ 

*1' 



92% 

'287



9&& 

8 '$&%,7



73











8&

23$8$

: 

$*1' 

: 

$*1' 

% 

$*1' 

$



'*1' 

: 

$



$





$*1' 

: 

$



% 

9&& 

% 

&/.



6'2



6+'1





% 

6',



8 327',*,7$/



73

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)FHUDPLF

5

N

5

.



73

5

N













8$

23$8$

&

X)FHUDPLF











8'

23$8$











8%

23$8$

5

.

6+'$&

'$&9

'$&9

9&&

9

9

'$&

'8$/'$&$

5 

5 

'

0%56&7

'

0%56&7

'DQG'

0XVWEHORFDWHG

ZLWKLQRI8

'

&/.

6+'$&

'

&/.

&6'$&%

&

X)FHUDPLF











8%

23$8$











8'

23$8$



73

: 

$*1' 

: 

$*1' 

% 

$*1' 

$



'*1' 

: 

$



$





$*1' 

: 

$



% 

9&& 

% 

&/.



6'2



6+'1





% 

6',



8 327',*,7$/

&/.

',1



92$ 

*1' 



92% 

'287



9&& 

8 '$&%,7

5

N

5

.

&

X)FHUDPLF













8$

23$8$











8&

23$8$

&

X)FHUDPLF



73

&

X)FHUDPLF

5

.

5

N



73

'$&9

'$&9

9

9&&

9

'$&

'$&

'8$/'$&$

5



5



'$&9

















-

,'&

















-

,'&

















-

,'&





















-

0,&52),7





*







*







*







*



-

7(50%/2&.

99

$1$/2*92/7$*(&855(172873876

,62/$7('0$237,21$/%2$5'6

/

/

/

/

)(%($'

/

/

/

)(%($'

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

&

S)

/

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

9&&

'$&9

'

'

'

'

'

'

,2:

'

&/.

'

&65$1*(

&65$1*(







8&

+&







8%

+&

,2:

'$&9

:5'$&

7&

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2&



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8 +&

'>@

'$&5$1*(2))6(7352*5$0

&6'$&$

&6'$&%

'$&

'$&

'$&

'$&

&6'$&%

&6'$&$

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)FHUDPLF

5

N

5 .



73

95()

9

9

''B

56



73













8$

23$











8%

23$

62&.(78

62&.(78

















-

+($'(5,'&

79$55$<



















79

60'$/&&

79$55$<



















79

60'$/&&

5 

5 

,QVWDOO-IRU

P$RQWK

FKDQQHO

,QVWDOO5

5LIP$

RQWKFKDQQHO

QRWXVHG

56

07270B DCN 6512

D-23

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

,2:

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

0,'

06%

'

'

'

'

/6%

67$57

'

6(/

'

6(/

&+

&+

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'



73









;

-,72'&$$(0+=



&

X)97$17$/80



73

























-

0,&52),7

&

X)FHUDPLF

& X)FHUDPLF

5

.

&

X)9FHUDPLF



73

,1

,1

,1

,1

,1

,1

,1

 ,1



,1



1&

966 

1&

,1

 ,1



,1

 ,1



(1%

$ 

$ 

$ 

$ 

95() 

,1



*1'

,1



966 

287 

,1



8

$108;



&

X)97$17$/80



73



73

5



1&

9,1

75,0

9287

15



*1'



8

92/7$*(5()

&

X)FHUDPLF



73

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)9

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2(



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8

+&

&

X)FHUDPLF

&

X)9



73

&26



2379



96



&/.



)287 

9,



9,

*1'

$*1'

&203 

&203 

23287



1&

96 

23



23



5() 

9,



1&

1&

8

$'.3

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2(



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8

+&



73

5



5 



73

























-

0,&52),7

5 









;

0%+0+=



&

X)97$17$/80

5

0&+,3

&

X)FHUDPLF

7,( 

7,( 

7,( 

7,( 

7,( 

)5(4 

7,( 

7,(



*1'



'%



7,(



'%



,&/. 

7,( 

'%

5'0%<7(



9&&,2 

6(/ 

67$57



7'2 

7',



706



7&.



5'06%



9)&/. 

'% 

'% 

7,( 

7,( 

'% 

9&&,17

5'/6% 

5($'

 6&

 6%



*1'

 ,25

 9&&,17

 '%



7,( 



'%



7,(



*1'

8

;LOLQ[&3/'

&

X)FHUDPLF



















51

.[

' 

6



96 

*1'

6

' 

,1

,1



6



,1



,1



' 

6



96 

9&& 

' 

8

'*'<

,25

9)5($'

'>@

9)352*

'$&08;

&+*$,1

7(0308;

,2:

6+'1

95()

7&

7&

7&

9

9&&

9

9&&

9

9&&

9

9

9

9&&

9

9&&

9

9&&

9



 

















51 .[

 

















51 .[

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+



73

95()



73

$*1'



5 

3/$&(

2+0

5(6,6725$6

&/26($6

3266,%/(72

;$1';

5LQGXFHVDQ

RIIVHWLQDQDORJ

VLJQDOWRJLYHD

OLYHIRUVHQVRUV

ZLWKRUVOLJKWO\

QHJDWLYHRXWSXW

5DQG5UHGXFHWKHJDLQ

IRUDQDORJLQSXWVE\VR

WKDWZHFDQUHDGVOLJKWO\

DERYHIXOOVFDOHWRSUHYHQW

RYHUIORZRI$'&UHDGLQJ

9&&

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

 %



,&

23$8$

&

X)

&

X)

9

9

,&











8%

/)













8$

/)

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

9

'

%$6

9

''

' %$6

' %$6

56

56

5 . $'&95()

95()&/,3

&$B

56

''

56













8$

23$











8%

23$







8$

+&







8%

+&

D-24

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

'

'

'

& X)FHUDPLF

& X)FHUDPLF







 







51 .[

$

(1%

9

,1 

,1 

,1 

,1 

287



,1 



$



*1'

 966



,1 

,1 

,1 

$





8

0$;&:1

'

6 

96



*1'



6 

'



,1

,1

6 

,1

,1

'

 6 

96



9&&



'



8

'*'<





























-

0,&52),7

;7

7+(50,67(5

7(0308;

'$&08;

7(03

,2:

'$&

'$&

'$&

'>@

'$&9

'$&

'$&9

'$&9

'$&9

6+'1

99

9$1$

9&&

9&& 9

9$1$9







 







51 .[

5 .

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5



212))

287 

1&

*1'



8

/3,0

&

X)

%<3$66&$36

0867%(:,7+,1

2)7+(

5(*8/$725

,1387287387

3,16

&

X)97$17$/80

5

.

56 5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

5

.

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5

7+(50,67(5







8'

+&

;7

7+(50,67(5

,QVWDOO;7WKURXJKKROH

25;760'

EXWQRWERWK

07270B DCN 6512

D-25

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'>@

,25

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

$



$



$



$



$



$



$



$



* 

* 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

8

+&





















-

7(50%/2&.



73





















-

7(50%/2&.







 







51

[































8

36

$



$



$



$



$



$



$



$



* 

* 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

< 

8

+&































8

36































8

36

'>@

',*,2

,25

',*,2

9&&



(;7(51$/

&21752/

(;7(51$/

&21752/

(;7B9B287

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

/

/

/)(%($'

/

/

/

/

)(%($'

/

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

&

S)

&

&

&

S)



















51

[



















51

.[



















51

.[

&

S)9

&

&

&

S)9

&

S)9

&

&

&

S)9

5



5



5



5

 5



5



5



5



'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

3ODFHWKHVHWHUPLQDWLRQUHVLVWRUVDWWKHHQGRIHDFKGDWD

OLQH(DFKGDWDOLQH

VKRXOGEHODLGRXWDVDGDLV\FKDLQWKHVLJQDOSDVVLQJ

IURPRQH,&WRWKHQH[W

&

&

/

/

&

&

/

/

D-26

07270B DCN 6512

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

'

'

'

,2:

'

6+'1

'

'

'

'



73































8 36

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2(



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8

+&































8 36

























-

7(50%/2&.

6+'1

'>@

',*,2

9&&





9&&

'

',2'(6&+277.<

)

5(6(77$%/()86($9

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

(;7B9B287



















51

[

/

)(%($'

/

)(%($'

&

&







8%

+&

07270B DCN 6512

D-27

    





7LWOH

1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ6L]H

2UFDG%

'DWH 0D\ 6KHHWRI

)LOH 1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE'UDZQ%\

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31



 %

,2:

6+'1

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

6+'1

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

4

62

5

.











.

5(/$<63'7

5

.











. 5(/$<63'7

























-

7(50%/2&.

4

62

5

.











.

5(/$<63'7

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2(



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8

+&

4

62































8 36

5 .











.

5(/$<63'7







4

62































8 36

'



'



'



'



'



'



'



'



&/.

 2(



4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

8

+&





























-

7(50%/2&.































8 36

6+'1

',*,2

'>@

,2:

',*,2

9&&

9

95(7









(;7(51$/

5($53$1(/

$/$502873876

'

',2'(6&+277.<

'

',2'(6&+277.<

'

',2'(6&+277.<

'

',2'(6&+277.<

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

/

/

/ )(%($'

/

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

&

S)

&

&

&

S)

&

S)

&

&

&

S)



















51

[



















51

[

/ )(%($'

&

S)

&2B(;7B5(7







8&

+&







8$

+&

D-28

07270B DCN 6512

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 6/24/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P1.R3.schdoc Drawn By:

GUI Interface

06698 D

GM800480X-70-TTX2NLW

CL586-0529-2

Mode

aVsync

aHSync

3.3V

100K

L/R

U/D

aReset

DithB

L/RU/DDithB

10K

22uF/6.3V

JMK316BJ226KL 0.0022

CA_112

Mode

aVsync

aHSync

i BackLightDrive

aB7aB6

aB5aB4

aB3aB2

aG7aG6

aG5aG4

aG3aG2

aR6

aR5aR4

aR3aR2

aR7

aDCLK

3.3V

1.0

GMK107BJ105KA

B5B4

B3B2

B1B0

G5G4

G3G2

G1G0

R3R2

R1R0

DEN

CL586-0527-7

DEN

DCLK

L/R

U/D

Mode

3.3V +5V

+5V

5V-GND

12 11

JP3

4X3 Jumper

12 11

15 14

18 17

JP2

6X3 Jumper

Bklght+

Bklght-

Vcom

Vgh

AVdd

Vcom

aG1

aG0

aR1

aR0

aB1

aB0

CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS

MT1

TP1

0039300100

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB1

CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS

Vgl

Make Model JP

FEM A

800

,4-5,7-

Dat a Image F

G01 3

-5,

,5-

United Radiant Tech. UM

H-

MD-

/8/9

16/ 1

/18

,5-

Internal Dithering

0 = Enable

1 = Disable

Scan Direction

U/D L/R Scan Dir.

0 1 UD, LR

1 0 DU, RL

0 0 UD, RL

1 1 DU, LR

(1 = H, 0 = L)

22uF/6.3V

JMK316BJ226KL

22uF/6.3V

JMK316BJ226KL

10K

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB2

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB3

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB4

0.0022

CA_112

0.0022

CA_112

TP3 TP4

R280

MT2 MT3 MT4 MT5 MT6 MT7 MT8 MT9

5V-GND

TP2

BACKL

R21

jumper

bDCLK

CLK

R48

R47

R46

aB6

aB5

aB4

aB3

aB2

aG7

aG6

aG5

aG4

aG3

aG2

aR7

aR6

aR5

aR4

aR3

SCL

SDA

aB7

aR2

aData Enable

aB7

aB6

aB5

aB4

aB3

aB2

aG7

aG6

aG5

aG4

aG3

aG2

aR7

aR6

aR5

aR4

aR3

aR2

aData Enable

Default:R21B

+5V

5V-GND

J14

0039300100

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB16

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB17

SCL

SDA

07270B DCN 6512

D-29

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 6/24/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P2.R3.schdoc Drawn By:

06698 D

22uH

Vin

SHDN

SW 1

GND

FB 3

CAT4139TD-GT3

4.7uF/16V

R12

2.0

R14

5V-GND

+5V

9.76

R13

3.9uH

487K

309K

80.6K

R18

66.5K

R19

464K

R16

806K

R11

2K1

MBRM120LT1G

0.001C8

24pf

C13

0.33

C16

0.220

C20

470pf

C21

22uf/25V

C12

TMK325BJ226MM

0.1

C26

3.3V

33K

R23

43pf

C23

BAT54S

3.3V

Bklght+

Bklght-

Vcom

Vgh

AVdd

3.3V

FDV305N

5V-GND

+5V

Default: NI

R22 jumper

AVdd: +10.4V

TP5

SCL

SDA

INT 13

P0 4

P1 5

P2 6

P3 7

P4 9

P5 10

P6 11

P7 12

Vdd 16

Vss

PCF8574

SW_46

Maint_SW

Lang_Select

5V-GND

+5V

FDLY

PGND

DRVP 17

PGND

DRVN

VCOM 10

SUP 9

COMP

IN 11

VGH 15

REF

GND

SW 6

DLY2

SW 5

FB 1

DLY1

FBP 12

FBN

ADJ

GD 23

CTRL

CPI 16

VIN 4

TPS65150PWP

HTSNK 25

CD214A-B140LF

SW_46

Opt. Lang. Sw.

Opt. Main Sw

Vgl

22uF/6.3V

C11

JMK316BJ226KL

1.0

C14

GMK107BJ105KA

1.0

C15

GMK107BJ105KA

1.0

C27

GMK107BJ105KA

24pf

C22

43pf

C24

43pf

C25

10K

R10

10K

R24

10K

R25

10K

R26

100K

R15

806K

R17

0.33

C17

0.33

C18

0.33

C19

BAT54S

4.7uF/16V

C10

Vgh: +16V

TP9

Vcom: +4V

TP10

Vgl: -7V

TP7

TP6

TP8

GUI Interface

C35

0.1

5V-GND AB

R31

10K

3.3V

R27

jumper

BACKL

SCL

SDA

Default:R27B

Default:R31B

Backlight Brightness Control

Control Mode R22 R27 R31

Remote – Video Port NO A NO

Remote – I2C YES B NO

Fixed Bright (default) NO B B

D-30

07270B DCN 6512

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 6/24/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P3.R3.schdoc Drawn By:

06698 D

To old TScreen

70553-004

J11

+5V

CHASSIS

J12

BUS +5

To new TScreen

70553-004

J10

LT 1

RT 2

SHLD 3

RL 4

LL 5

GND

D+

D-

CHS A

CHS B

TSHARC-12C

VBUS

D-

D+

GND

USB-B-MINI

VBUS

CHASSIS

5V-GND

USB3.3V

SDA

SCL

USB3.3V

R36

12K

-V 2

OUT

24MHZ

DS2

GRN

DS1

YEL

SCL

SDA

R37

100K

5V-GND

5V-GND 5V-GND

5V-GND

+5V

5V-GND

C28

1uF

USB3.3V

SHTDN

GND

OUT 1

BP 4

3.3V-REG

R38

0.5A/6V

D1-

D1+

D2-

D2+

+3.3V

D3-

D3+

D4-

D4+

+3.3V 10

TEST 11

PWR1 12

OCS1 13

+1.8V 14

3.3VCR 15

PWR2 16

OCS2 17

PWR3 18

OCS3 19

PWR4 20

OCS4 21

SDA/R1 22

+3.3V 23

SCL/S0 24

HS-IND/S1 25

RESET 26

VBUS-DET 27

SUS/R0

+3.3V

USB-

USB+

XTL2

CLK-IN

1.8VPLL

RBIAS

+3.3PLL

GND

USB2514-AEZG

C32

1uF

C44

1uF

5V-GND

+5V

1D-

2D+

3GND

USB-A_R/A

5V-GND

CHASSIS

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB5

C34

0.1

C36

0.1uF

C33

0.1uF

C31

0.1uF

R30

100K

R29

0.5A/6V

D+

D-

GND

+5V J5

USB-A_VERT

C29

470pf

C30

1uF

C37 0.01uF

JP4

3.3V

GND

FB7

R20

49.9

FB8

FB9

FB10

FB11

FB12

FB13

GUI Interface

1 8

U11

C40

0.1uF

C42

0.1uF

C45

0.1uF

C390.1

C43

0.1uF

C41

0.1

R33

100K

R45

R32

R34

100K

R35

100K

C38

1uF

R39

100K

JP5

C60

0.1uF

C59

0.1

D+

D-

GND

+5V J6

USB-A_VERT

+5V

D1_N

D1_P D4_P

D4_N

D3_P

D3_N

D2_P

D2_N

D_P

D_N

Configuration Select

Mode R32 R45

Default A A

MBUS B B

Install 100K for A, 0 Ohm for B

+5V

5V-GND

07270B DCN 6512

D-31

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 6/24/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P4.R3.schdoc Drawn By:

06698 D

TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE CIRCUITRY ( TBD)

GUI Interface

R40

10K

Option

CLKOUT_P

CLKOUT_N

3.3V

C49

0.1

R41

100

FB6

FB14

Vcc PIN 28

C47

0.01

22uF/6.3V

C46

JMK316BJ226KL

C50

0.1

C51

0.1

C52

0.1 C55

0.1

C57

0.1

bDCLK

BACKL

NOTE:

To receive backlight control (BACKL) from CPU board

when using ICOP_0096 LVDS Transmitter.

The connection from pin 42 on the TTL video connector

(VSYNC) to U1-23 must be broken and connected to

pin 43.

aB6

aB5

aB4

aB3

aB2

aG7

aG6

aG5

aG4

aG3

aG2

aR7

aR6

aR5

aR4

aR3

aB7

aR2

aData Enable

R42

100

R43

100

R44

100

Vcc PIN 36

C48

0.01

Vcc PIN 42

C53

0.01

Vcc PIN 48

C54

0.01 C56

0.01

C58

0.01

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB15 C61

0.1

J13

HEADER-7X2

Y0M

8Y0P

Y1M

10 Y1P

Y2M

Y2P

CLKOUT

CLKINM

CLKINP

SHTDN

VCC

LVDS/VCC

PLLVCC

LVDSGND

PLLGND

D0 24

D1 26

D2 27

D3 29

D4 30

D5 31

D6 33

D7 34

D8 35

D9 37

D10 39

D11 40

D12 41

D13 43

D14 45

D15 46

D16 47

D17 1

D18 2

D19 4

D20 5

GND 3

GND 25

GND 32

GND 38

GND 44

SN75LVDS86A

3.3V

Y0_P

Y0_N

Y1_P

Y1_N

Y2_N

Y2_P

MH3

MH4

7MH1

MH2

J15

G3168-05000202-00

CHASSIS

R490

R500

R510

R520

R530

R540

R550

R560

FBMH3216HM501NT

FB18

C62

0.1

3.3V

Y0_P1

Y0_N1

Y1_P1

Y1_N1

Y2_N1

Y2_P1

CLKOUT_N1

CLKOUT_P1

D-32

07270B DCN 6512

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 5/7/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06882-P1-R0.SchDoc Drawn By:

LVDS, Transmitter Board

06882

VAD6

VAD7

VAD8

VAD9

VAD10

VAD11

VBD10

VBD11

VAD0

VAD1

VAD2

VAD3

VBD2

VBD3

VBD4

VBD5

VBD6

VBD7

VBDE

Y0_N

Y0_P

Y1_N

Y1_P

Y2_N

Y2_P

CLKOUT_N

CLKOUT_P

22.1

From ICOP CPU To LCD Display

D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

GND

Y2P 34

Y2M 35

Y1P 38

Y1M 39

Y0P 40

Y0M 41

CLKOUTP 32

CLKOUTM 33

CLKIN 26

SHTDN 27

NC 14

NC 43

VCC 2

VCC 8

VCC 21

LVDSVCC 37

PLLVCC 29

VLDSGND 42

VLDSGND 36

VLDSGND 31

PLLGND 30

PLLGND 28

SN75LVDS84A

CHASSIS-0 CHASSIS

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

910

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 38

39 40

41 42

43 44

J2 Header 22X2

MH3

MH4

1MH1

MH2

G3168-05000101-00

CHASSIS

+3.3V

VAD0 VAD1

VAD2 VAD3

VAD6 VAD7

VAD8 VAD9

VAD10 VAD11

VBD2 VBD3

VBD4 VBD5

VBD6 VBD7

VBD10 VBD11

VBDE

VBGCLK

+3.3V

CLKIN

Y0_N

Y0_P

Y1_N

Y1_P

Y2_N

Y2_P

CLKOUT_N

CLKOUT_P

10K

BACKL

0.1

0.01

22uF/6.3V

JMK316BJ226KL

0.1

0.01

+3.3V

0.1

0.01

C10

0.1

C11

0.01

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

910

11 12

13 14

Header 7X2

+3.3V

Y0_P Y0_N

Y1_P Y1_N

CLKOUT_P

Y2_N

CLKOUT_N

Y2_P

MT1 MT2

07270B DCN 6512

D-33

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 1/28/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-1_ETHERNET.SchDocDrawn By:

Auxiliary I/O Board (PWR-ETHERNET)

06731

STRAIGHT THROUGH ETHERNET

GND

+5V

SCL

SDA

1.37K

+5V

1.37K

+5V-ISO

+C17

100uF

GND

DS3

GRN

Header 8

+5V

3 4

SP3050

3 4

SMF05T2G

GND

R10

2.2k

47uH

TP1

TP3

TP2

DF11-8DP-2DS(24)

SDA

SCL

CHASSIS-1

10 9

12 11

CONN_RJ45_LED

+5V-OUT

TP4

ISO-GND

C28

4.7uF

R16

LG1

ATX+

ATX-

ARX+

ARX-

LED0

LED0+

LED1+

LED1

VDD2 5

GND2 7

VDD1

GND1

LME0505

Header 8

D-34

07270B DCN 6512

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 1/28/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-2_USB.SchDoc Drawn By:

Auxiliary I/O Board (USB)

06731

TXD-A

RTS-A

DTR-A

RXD-A

CTS-A

DSR-A

DCD-A

RI-A

V-BUS

VBUS 1

D- 2

D+ 3

GND 4

USB

GND

V-BUS

CHASSIS

GND

C1+

C1-

C2+

C2-

TI1

TI2

TI3

RI3 6

RI2 5

RI1 4

TO3 11

TO2 10

TO1 9

RO2 20

V- 3

V+ 27

VCC 26

STAT

SHTDN

RI4 7

RI5 8

ONLINE 23

GND 25

RO1

RO2

RO3

RO4

RO5

SP3243EU

GND

R12

4.75k

GND

3nc 4

U11

NUP2202W1

TXD-B

RXD-B

CTS-B

RTS-B

DSR-B

DTR-B

RI-B

DCD-B

MT1

MT-HOLE

C24

4.7uF

C26

1uF

C25

0.1uF

C22

0.1uF

C23

0.1uF

C19

0.1uF

C20

0.1uF

C21

0.1uF

DS4

GRN

R11

2.2k

CHASSIS

MT2

MT-HOLE

R14

R15

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

N/C

DF11-10DP-2DS(24)

V-BUS

CHASSIS-1

DCD 1

RI 2

DTR 28

DSR 27

TXD 26

RXD 25

RTS 24

CTS 23

GND 3

14 20

VBUS

8VREG-I

7D-

RST

SUSPEND

VDD

D+

4U10

CP2102

3.3V

07270B DCN 6512

D-35

D D

C C

B B

A A

Title

Number RevisionSize

Date: 1/28/2010 Sheet of

File: N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-3_ADC.SchDoc Drawn By:

Auxiliary I/O Board (ADC)

06731

ANALOG INPUT

+5V-ISO

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

SHTDN 13

VDD 2

VDD 1

SDA 9

SCL 5

A2 10

A1 12

A0 6

REF 27

AGND

REF-AJ 26

DGND 3

24 NC 28

NC 25

MAX1270BCAI+

+5V

GND

+5V-ISO

SCL

SDA

ISO-GND

+5V-ISO

1 6

U4A

NC7WZ17P6X

3 4

U4B

NC7WZ17P6X

ISO-GND

+5V-ISO

ISO-GND

SMS12

C13

0.1uF

C14

0.1uF

C12

0.1uF

C11

0.01uF

YEL

DS2

SCL

YEL

DS1

SDA

GND1

2VDD1

4SDA1

SCL1

GND1

GND2 9

NC 15

VDD2 14

NC 13

SDA2 12

SCL2 11

GND2 16

NC 10

ADuM2251

4.75k

0.1uF C9

0.1uF

C10

4.7uF

AN-CH0

AN-CH1

AN-CH2

AN-CH3

AN-CH4

AN-CH5

AN-CH6

AN-CH7

4.99

C27

4.7uF

ISO-GND

+5V-ADC

ISO-GND

2.2k

SMS12

2.2k

D-36

07270B DCN 6512

Teledyne Drums T200H M Users Manual

T200HM to the manual f6049b5b-ec69-458f-95a5-93fcff74246b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation